Home

ChartScan/1400 User`s Manual

1. 2 Ss SS SS SS Sg SS SS Sas WSS SS SS WSS SS Iy SS SS 2 2 Bf H i H H l i i i i H i H i i Ai GSS 2 2 SBS SSS S22 22 862 6 amp P a Gani uel cen Ge el ee ee Ge ee ee es ee ee cee all Am mR ale Alls aldol ale all T al all ae Alls E m i E i m lof
2. Note With a card in slot 1 channels 3 6 11 and 14 must be used for cold junction calibration The table previous page provides CJC channel numbers for other card slot positions Cold Junction Calibration Equipment Setup CAUTION The main unit chassis and T C cards must be calibrated for offset and gain prior to calibrating the T C cards for cold junction CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit has been powered on for at least one hour and the Cold Cell powered on for at least 2 hours The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour chassis warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 1 With power OFF to the main unit complete the system setup as indicated by the previous figure and table 2 Turn power ON to the main unit Cold Cell calibrator and digital multimeter Allow at least one hour warm up tim
3. m Z E i Er a ee T AF AMAR o Pa epa l pilal W e Ks l 4 HOOT HS 0 2 oo A a a 0 ooo oc D a O gee ns p o 0rth 9 2E ae 0 G8 oS O U Oo A 2 U O ANA CSN14 TC P Card with Subminiature Plugs Number of Channels 16 differential programmable by channel for specific thermocouple type or voltage Input Types J K T E R S B N and 10V 5V 1V 100mV Input Connector Subminiature plug ChartScan User s Manual 959696 4 1 4 2 Type K Type T Type E Type R Type S Type B Type N CSN14 TC P continued Temperature Range Accuracy and Resolution Type J 100 to 760 C 200 to 100 C 100 to 1372 C 200 C to 100 C 100 to 400 C 200 to 100 C 100 to 1000 C 200 C to 100 C 0 0 to 1780 C 0 0 to 1780 C 350 to 1820 C 100 to 1300 C 200 to 100 C 0 5 C 0 8 C 0 6 C 0 8 C 07676 0 8 C 0 7 C 0 9 C 2 0 C 2 0 C E20 C 0 6 C 0 9 C 0 10 C 0 20 C 0 10 C 0 20 C 0 15 C 0 25 C 0 10 C 0 20 C 0 40 C 0 40 C 0 50 C 0 15 C 0 20 C Temperature Units C F K R mV and volts Fault Detection
4. P a E we ie Hiwa Ha ye He T iA D O oo s N O 4 dlor 5 Connection Box _ Rha PNEE Hi Not part of Cold Cell Al Ce aes lt Y e i 15 ies 5 Po Pa Tha oO O mea S Ll aH gt T C Card in Chassis gt TEA OS OP LO Twisted Pair Hi Voltage and Sensing Twisted Pair Calibrator and Lo Voltage and Sensing Voltage Reference Tables a Use of cold cell with 0 C reference and Volts DC Calibrator f T C Calibrator Thermometer Not Recommended Hot Cell Temperature Simulator c Use of T C Calibrator Simulator b Use of Hot Cell with hot temperature reference not recommended due to transient effects Three Methods of Verifying Calibrated Temperature ChartScan Users Manual 959
5. F s lGeneral GetData Sub GetData VIEWXL Interface vxlLoadConfigFile exceltest cfg VIEWXL Interface vxlArmServer Ene Subp Entering exceltest cfg as the Configuration File Name 6 Finally add a call to the vxlArmServer function When done your macro should look like the one shown above At this point you can return to the Macro dialog box and Run your GetData macro 989092 Software Reference ViewXL API Definition 989092 ViewXL provides a limited set of methods that you can use in your own Excel macros to leverage the power of the Add In The methods below make up the ViewXL Programming API If you use these methods in your own Excel macros there are certain precautions that you must take when designing your programs e Ifyou start an acquisition your program must periodically relinquish control so the ViewXL Add In can perform its internal tasks If your macro is simple like the example given in the Using the ViewXL Program API section then this is unnecessary The sample macro is called directs ViewXL to perform two tasks then exits During an acquisition ViewXL polls the server every two seconds Your macro must not run longer than this without releasing control e You must make certain that the currently running server can implement or is compatible with the API call being made For example in the example macro page vxl 9 we trusted that the exceltest cfg file
6. PH501 O b an adele Bo Jl Je oe UT ETINI a O Connects to PH401 and PH501 C352 C353 400000000000000000000027 ED p 3000000000000000000001 a Analog Backplane Card Partial Located In ChartScan Main Chassis Connecting the Backplane Cards Note Ribbon cable CA 154 is keyed for proper installation 5 2 CSN Exp Expansion Chassis 959696 ChartScan User s Manual 5 Using the same front back orientation position the expansion chassis on top of the ChartScan unit then insert the remaining end of cable CA 154 into expansion chassis connector PH501 on rear of PC board 6 Secure the expansion chassis to the ChartScan unit with two machine screws B for each of the four mounting blocks installed in step 3 7 Install the cover plate removed in step 2 onto the expansion chassis and secure with two screws Automatic Channel Assignment Unless the CSN Relay card is used Channels through 64 are automatically assigned to ChartScan while extended channels 65 through 128 are assigned to the expansion chassis Even if a card slot is left empty in the ChartScan or the expansion chassis the channel assignments are as shown in the table with slot 1 being at the bottom of the unit and slot 4 being at the top Device Channel Assignments Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 ChartScan 13 32 33 48 48 64 Expansion Chassis 65
7. DESCRIPTION The Set SRQ Mask M command uses the IEEE 488 Service Request SRQ mechanism to inform the IEEE 488 bus controller of the existence of several conditions in the Service Request Enable SRE Register These conditions are described in detail below Multiple conditions can be enabled simultaneously If multiple conditions are contained within the same command string each Set SRQ Mask command should be proceeded by an Execute X command The resulting SRQ Mask register value is the logical ORed value of the individual values sent Alternately the entire value of all the desired conditions may be sent within one Set SRQ Mask M command string The programmed SRQ Mask remains enabled until the receipt of a M000 command or the detection of a Device Clear DCL or Selected Device Clear SDC The following list outlines the possible conditions of the SRE M000 This is the power on default mask value It disables the unit from generating service requests by clearing the entire mask of the Service Request Enable SRE Register to zero M001 SRQ On Alarm Sending this command will enable the unit to generate an SRQ when it has recognized that one or more channels has gone into alarm condition Refer to the Configure Channels C command on how to configure an alarm condition M002 SRQ On Trigger Event Sending this command allows the unit to generate a service request when it has detected a valid trigger from the programmed trigger
8. e Channel Selection 14 can also be made by tabbing to the Center Control 17 or Units Div Control 18 and using PageUp or PageDown 2 e The min and max scale values 13 and 19 are automatically generated but can also be set from the Chart Setup Dialog e You can use the Chart pull down menu to turn grid limit lines Off or On Limit lines can be solid or dots e In regard to the time stamp region 21 if you stop the chart the time stamp will begin at 00 00 00 upon restarting the chart if using relative time or at the real clock time if using absolute time e More detailed information regarding the pull down menus and toolbar buttons is provided throughout the chapter CV 4 ChartView 988992 Software Reference lie Chart iew Simulated Instrument lolx File Chart View Acquire Data Window Device Setup 10 11 HD om Jens ne i aa apeten eerta e a oraaa WIA ef soana center 4 Hue a a a a i ATT a he lt 40 0014 Genter hui ChartView Main Window and Control Options fi Mouse t Arrow Keypads B PageUp PageDown Keypads Note The bulleted list on page CV 4 relates to this table Group Select Ctrl G or or Channel Selection 8 or 2 Start Charts and or F5 Multiply x2 or Tab to Spacebar Indicators 3 Pause Charts YA or F7 Present Value of Selected N A Channel top Charts 8 or F6 Center Value at Chart Mid 8 or or type in 7 Line Scroll
9. Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL loads Each digital input line is one eighth 0 125 TTL load All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltages Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to 0 3 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 29 B 30 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix C Registers Data Formats amp Queries Reference Note Q If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Commands and Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples Contents Using the High Low Last HLL Registers C 2 What is Contained in the HLL Registers C 2 Accessing the HLL Registers C 2 Data Format F C 6 Data Input Formats C 6 Data Output Formats C 7 Engineering Units Data Format C 7 Binary Data Format C 9 Counts Data Format C 9 Configuring Power Up State C 10 Queries C 11 Query Commands C 11 U Status Commands C 12 Status Event Reporting and Mask Registers C 13 Theory of Operation C 14 Calibration Status Register C 16 Error Source Register C 16 Event Status Register C 16 Event Status Enable Register C 16 Status Byte Register C 17 Service Req
10. Multimeter Binding Post 1 of 7 Digital 22 2 Twisted Pairs Multimeter 3 To the HI and LO Voltage To the Plus and Minus Sense Calibrator Connectors on the Calibrator Connections on the Calibrator HI LO and Sensing Connectors Connections for Main Unit Gain Calibration ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 9 1 Connect HI LO S and S lines from the precision calibrator to the binding posts of the calibration card as indicated in the figure above 2 Apply 4 4 VDC minus 4 4 VDC from the calibrator to the calibration card Use a precision digital multimeter to verify voltage accuracy Note You can view the main unit calibration constants by typing C 0X QC selects the main unit chassis To monitor the chassis calibration voltage type B to clear the buffer C3 90X to address the backplane T1 1 0 0X X _ to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes X starts acquisition U13X very entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Voltage will appear in counts For 4 4 volts the reading should be 32038 844 counts Note that X can be used to start or stop the acquisition 3 Type G0 91X The Trigger LED will flash indicating that gain calibration is in progress When flashing stops the chassis gain calibration is complete 4 Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occurred 5 Apply 4 4 VDC positive 4 4 VDC fr
11. Retrieve some current configuration settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the settings INPUT A Screen shows Q1 0 0 0 0 1T0 0 0 0 Y000000 000000 000000 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 17 T Time Stamping System EXECUTION immediate Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable time stamping default 1 Enable absolute time stamping and 2 Enable relative time stamping DESCRIPTION The Time Stamping T command when enabled will append a time date time stamp to each scan being sent by the unit to the controller If absolute time stamping is enabled the format is HH MM SS MIL MM DD YY where MIL milliseconds If relative time stamping is enabled the format is HH MM SS MIL DDDDDDD where MIL milliseconds and DDDDDDD days In the relative mode the time stamps are relative to the trigger scan which is time stamped 00 00 00 000 0000000 This implies that the pre trigger scans are negative and post trigger scans are positive Refer to the Time Stamping section of Appendix B for details Note Relative time stamping will not be valid if you attempt to use it in conjunction with continuous gap free acquisitions with two timebases In addition time stamping is not valid in burst mode Note If the output format is binary instead of ASCII the time stamp is returned as ten eight bit bytes in 2h 2 hexidecimal digit format Examples for absolute an
12. is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year P Query current start and stop times in the form Pstart stop DESCRIPTION The Program Trigger Times P command may be used to set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition that is configured for start and or stop on Absolute Time as configured by the Set Trigger Configuration T command The Program Trigger Times command is to be used in concert with the Set Trigger Configuration command when it is desired to begin and or stop an acquisition on certain times and or dates The values of the start and stop times are only used when the start and or stop events have been configured for Absolute Time If only the start time is needed the st op argument should be set to 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 Likewise if only the stop time is needed the st art argument should be set to 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 In addition to the ability to start stop on a particular time date the unit has the ability to start stop at a particular time independent of the date If the date for the start stop time is of no concern then the date portion of the time date field should be set to 00 00 00 In this way the unit can start or stop an acquisition at a particular time regardless of the date This feature is particularly useful when using the auto rearm feature of the unit since it will allow the collection of data at a particular time each day without user intervention EXAMPLE ER e
13. option and then enter either 16 or the letter P into the column entry field ViewXL will clip the display at column P and then create an additional worksheet for the remaining channels When Spanning is enabled the number of channels displayed on a worksheet and the number of worksheets created will be determined by factors such as 1 The number of channels in the acquisition 2 The column specified 3 The Data Destination settings and 4 Whether or not Timestamps are displayed Scans of data that span multiple worksheets are placed in the same row on each sheet along with timestamp information if enabled Y Remove unused worksheets Check this option if you want ViewXL to automatically delete any worksheets that are not needed to display the currently Imported data files or Server acquisition data Timestamps Enable Timestamps If checked the Add In attempts to read timestamp information from the data file and add it to the worksheet Timestamps are placed in the first column of the worksheet All channels are moved to the right one column to make room for the timestamps If timestamps are not supported they are not displayed in the worksheet You can check if timestamps are supported in a particular file by selecting the file in the Import Files dialog and checking the Preview Info button With timestamps enabled you can select the type of timestamp to be displayed e Display Absolute Time if available If s
14. 6 10 Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Calibration of Signal Conditioning Cards Offset Calibration of Cards Required Equipment BNC Short for CSN14 LV B cards see note Terminal Type Short for CSN14 LV T cards see note Banana Plug Type Short for CSN14 LV S cards see note Type U Subminiature Plug Short for CSN14 TC P cards see note Note The four types of shorting connectors are illustrated later in this section With exception of the type of shorting connector the offset calibration procedure is identical for each of the following cards CSN14 TC P CSN14 LV S CSN14 LV B CSN14 LV T CSN14 HV S CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge 1 Ensure the main unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it 2 Remove the calibration card used to calibrate the main chassis from slot 1 3 Install the signal conditioning card which will be used during data acquisition into slot 1 CAUTION Do not
15. For details on calibration refer to Chapter 6 Calibration 3 6 Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Interface Configurations RS 232 422 Interface Configuration CAUTION The RS 232 422 interface is only to be used for serial communications Cable length should not exceed 50 feet 15 meters gt The DIP switch is only read when power is first applied to ChartScan and for that reason must be set before applying power to the unit gt RS 232 configuration is required when using a Net232 ethernet RS 232 converter gt Unless an interface option is used ChartScan s serial port operation will be with RS 232 electrical characteristics gt For serial port use ChartScan s rear panel DIP switch settings determine the baud rate stop bits parity and handshake Use the following steps when you desire to change RS 232 RS 422 serial port parameters Note that there are separate steps for early production units ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 7 Steps for RS 232 422 Configuration Standard Units Only Early Production Units Only IEEE RS 422 RS 232 TPSBERERS CFRBBERPS 45 6 8 Rt tl Lod COMM H S PARITY SERIAL CAL COMM H S PARITY SERIAL RS 232 SELECT BAUD RATE SELECT BAUD RATE Recommended Configuration Recommended Configuration 1 Turn the ChartScan system s power OFF 1 Turn the ChartScan system s power OFF 2 Ensure
16. Main Window Pull Down Menus The ChartView main window features several pull down menus As an alternative to the menus you can enable several menu items by using Toolbar buttons previously discussed The common items for the pull down menus and toolbar are described in more detail in the Toolbar section File Hew Ctrl M Open Ctri O Save Ctrl 5 Save As Print Ctrl P About Authorization E it New Sets all channel parameters to their startup factory default setting Ctrl N Open Sets all channel parameters as directed by a specified configuration file cvw The Ctrl O Load ChartView Setup window prompts you to select from a list of previously saved configuration files Save Saves the existing all inclusive channel configuration settings for later recall The Ctrl S Save command overwrites the existing version if the versions are named the same Save As Saves the existing configuration for later recall asks whether to overwrite the original version or save under a new filename Print The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView s main window Ctrl P When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels listed lower in the display list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels higher in the list those that were added first About Displays ChartView v
17. 2 Type U2X to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode 3 Type H1X The Trigger LED will flash indicating that offset calibration is in progress for Channel 1 4 Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and no errors have occurred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follow Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error V132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range V144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 10 Repeat steps for each additional calibration channel using the H command channel number and X 11 When offset calibration is complete for all cards remove the shorting connectors 12 Reinstall original card connectors as applicable You are now ready to perform gain calibration for the signal conditioning cards as described in one or both of the following two gain calibration sections The first gain section 1s for low volts cards including the CSN14 TC P card while the second gain section applies to the high volts card CSN14 HV S 6 12 Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card BNC Harness for CSN14 LV B cards see note Terminal Ty
18. 3276 70 if temperature channel assuming units of C 005 7670000 if Volts channel Note Open thermocouple range error checking is only performed on channels previously activated by the C Command ChartScan User s Manual 958296 C 23 C 24 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples contains descriptions and examples of the Application Program Interface API Commands Reference Note You may find Appendix A useful while reading through these examples Appendix A Contents Overview D 1 Reading HLL Status using HLL16 BAS D 2 Reading HLL Data from T C and Volts Cards using HLL32 BAS D 2 Acquiring Pre amp Post Trigger Data at Data at Different Rates using SLOW_ACQ BAS D 3 Acquiring Pre amp Post Trigger Data at the Same Rate using FAST_ACQ BAS D 5 Operating Alarms using ALARM2 BAS D 7 Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms using ALAR2SRQ BAS D 8 Collecting Data in Binary Format using BIN_ACQ BAS D 10 Collecting Binary Formatted High Low Last Data using BIN_HLL BAS D 12 Using Auto Rearm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks using BLK_ACQ BAS D 14 Configure for 12 Channels with Continuous Binary Upload using CONTIN_D BAS D 16 Configure for High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode using BURST BAS D 19 Overview This chapter walks through the example programs that are supplied on the release disk in the EXAMPLES sub
19. 80 81 96 93 112 113 128 The relay card if used must go in slot of the main ChartScan unit When the relay card is used there are only 112 channels available The channel assignments are automatically bumped as shown in the following table Device Channel Assignments when relay option is used Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 ChartScan 1 16 13 32 33 48 CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a ChartScan system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of ChartScan s main unit could possibly cause equipment damage CSN Exp Expansion Chassis 959696 5 3 CSN Exp Specifications WARNING Service must be performed by qualified personnel All terminals including the AC line and analog inputs must be disconnected prior to opening ChartScan main unit or expansion chassis casing Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death CAUTION The Expansion Chassis contains no fuses However fuse failure in ChartScan s main chassis indicates a possible problem with device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from the ChartScan unit and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used Installation Category CE Category 2 for Line Voltage
20. ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 11 Three Ways of Using ChartView You can use ChartView to e chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk e acquire data with no charting or meter use e use charting and or meters while acquiring data to disk Chart channels and or monitor with meters with no acquisition of data to disk Prior to charting channels on ChartView s Main Window you need to configure a display in regard to groups charts and channels This aspect of configuration is performed through Chart Setup Wizard discussed in the following text or through a Display Setup dialog box which is accessed through the Display Configuration Setup button item 7 page 1 9 on Chart Views Main Window In addition to charting channels you can monitor selected channels via digital analog and or bar graph meters Meters are discussed in the main ChartView section of this manual Note For ChartView Plus users up to four channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Acquiring Data with no charting or meter use Prior to acquiring data for saving to disk you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition dialog box accessed through the Setup pull down menu of ChartView s Main Window or through use of the related icon button You can enable the desired channels assign high and low alarm values from th
21. Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 1 CAUTION The digital voltmeter or digital multimeter used to verify calibration voltage accuracy must meet the following criteria 1 Minimum Resolution 6 1 2 digits 2 Minimum DC Accuracy 0 005 full scale Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge The main main unit and each signal conditioning card are calibrated separately Note that the main unit and its signal conditioning cards contain components for saving calibration constants allowing for card swapping within a system card swapping between systems and system expansion Calibration relates to the main unit and cards as follows Main Unit NetScan or ChartScan main chassis calibrated for offset and gain only Signal Conditioning Cards Calibrated for offset gain and cold junction sensor offset if thermocouples are used Non Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants To preserve calibration constants main unit constants are
22. Get Last reading for channel 3 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0050 80 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last reading for channel 4 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0010 90 Notice that since a HLL response terminator was specified that each channel s Last reading had to be ENTERed separately Example 4 This example is the same as the previous except no HLL response terminators are specified and the format has been changed to F PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F1 0 Q1 0 0 0 OX Set format to ASCII degrees F with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure four channel no setpoints Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Just get the Last channel readings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last readings for channels 1 4 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 1743 08 0483 08 0059 44 0051 62 Notice that there are no HLL channel terminators and that the readings are now in F Example 5 Example 5 shows how changing the channel type can effect the output of HLL queries PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0 Q1 0 0 0 OX Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Cl1 4 11X Configure four channel no setpoints to VOLTS Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Just get the Last channel readings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last reading for channels 1 4 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 000 0045603
23. Spare T Power Receptacle Block with Opened Fuse Drawer Memory Configuration Memory configuration of ChartScan consists of installing expanded memory boards optional and selecting write enable or write disable for calibration memory Expanded Memory Options ChartScan can accommodate up to 8 MBytes of memory which is ideal for both high speed and long term data logging Measurements can be stored in memory and read out by a controlling computer as time permits 3 4 ChartScan provides three options for expanding the standard 256 KB of memory to 1 MB CSN MEM1 4 MB CSN MEM4 or 8 MB CSN MEM8 To install a memory option into the unit perform the following steps Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual WARNING Never disassemble ChartScan s case while it is connected to the AC power line Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog lines 3 disconnect AC power line 4 disconnect all additional lines WARNING Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan while analog connections to an external device exist Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic compon
24. Start and or Stop Event When absolute time is specified data collection starts when the real time clock time of day equals the programmed time Count post trigger Start and or Stop Even When count is selected as the Stop Event scans are collected until the specified number of post trigger scans specified by the Y command have been collected at which time the post trigger Acquisition will stop and the post stop Acquisition will begin if configured Time Stamping T As mentioned in the previous sections the contents of each scan contains one reading for each defined channel Optionally time stamping of each scan can be enabled with the T command T1 enables absolute time stamping T2 enables relative time stamping while T0 disables time stamping Refer to the T command description for further details An example of the T command is as follows Without time stamping default PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R3X Request all scan data in buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 0234 20 0019 4010001 40 0023 60 With absolute time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1X Enable time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R3X Request all scan data in buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 07 35 22 400 08 29 94R 0234 20 0019 4040001 40 0023 60 Note The R following the date 08 29 94 in the above code is a reading separator which has been assigned with Query Terminator Q
25. The information entered in the Acquisition window is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination l Event Configuration Trigger Channel alue hd Stop Count from trigger agi chee i i Count 100 Value o0 Hyst o0 C Above Below Acquisition Parameters Scan Intervals Scan Counts 1 Pre trigger Hrs Min Sec Pre trigger 0 Post Stop i poskstop o o o z o Average weight 32 g Post T rigger o o o 2 o Use Ore Interval Mode Normal High speed single channel Burst Mode Acquisition Dialog Box Normal Mode gt 19 Click Okay to exit the Acquisition dialog box Note that we are using the Acquisition default settings and the Data Destination default settings in this tutorial as shown in the above figure Reference Note For a detailed explanation of the Acquisition Dialog Box refer to the ChartView section of this document 5 Review the Configuration Reviewing the configuration prior to data acquisition is optional however you should complete a review at this time in the tutorial to help with your familiariz
26. VAL UAT scans UA S MID U 18 7 PRINT UA PRINT Pre Triggered scans VWAL UA UA MID U 47 8 PRINT Post Triggered scans VAL UA UAS MID U 77 8 PRINT Post stop Triggered scans VAL UAS VAL UA Upload Block PRINT Uploading trigger block i PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R2X FOR c 1 TO VAL UAT PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 SCAN NEXT c PRINT Block i is read NEXT i After all 5 trigger blocks have been collected the unit is disarmed by sending the T command PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 TO 0 0 0X ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 15 Configure for 12 Channels with Continuous Binary Upload using CONTIN D BAS This program configures the ChartScan for 12 Channels and allows the system to continuously upload binary data to disk when the buffer is 75 full Establish communication with the DRIVER488 OPEN DEV IEEEOUT FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OCTL 1 BREAK PRINT 1 RESET OPEN DEV IEEEIN FOR INPUT AS 2 PRINT 1 TIMEOUT 5 PRINT 1 ERROR ON PRINT 1 FILL ERROR PRINT 1 TERM IN LF EOI OPEN Chrtscan DAT FOR OUTPUT AS 3 output data file Dimensions s 4096 number of bytes to be transferred at a time DataBuffer SPACE s DIM DataBuffer s DEF FNPEEKW addr PEEK addr 256 PEEK addr 1 find the pointer to DataBuffer for DMA transfer buffseg VARSEG DataBuffer DX VARPTR
27. always refers to the trigger block that is currently being read The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the Buffer Status String U6 command As mentioned earlier the U6 command is a user query command which will return information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The acquisition buffer holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more trigger events This data is held in trigger blocks within the buffer Each trigger block defines one acquisition that has taken place An acquisition consists of the following e pre trigger scans optional e post trigger scans e post stop scans optional The trigger blocks may be variable in length The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which the current trigger block configuration may be queried The Buffer Status String is queried with the U6 command returning 10 fields as indicated by the following figure and corresponding list The values in the figure represent a U6 response when the acquisition buffer is empty 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 r D aia a va a 0000000 0000000 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Time Date Time Date Acquisition Buffer Interrogation 1 Number of Trigger Blocks Available This field represents the total number of trigger blocks currently contained within the buffer A block need not be complete to be included in this total it
28. 1 e without beginning from a pre existing display configuration This method is arrived at from the Chart Setup Wizard window by selecting Manual Chart Creation When this button is clicked the program exits the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual method of Display Configuration Setup Although this method is referred to as manual it still contains some automatic elements such as Automatically Add Groups to the Setup available with ChartView Plus Note Even if an unevenly distributed chart display is desired you can always edit a pre existing chart setup or create a new setup by one of the Chart Setup Wizard s automatic methods and then edit the setup To manually setup your chart display using the clean slate approach as opposed to editing an existing display perform the following steps 1 Select Wizard from the Chart pull down menu of ChartView s main window The New Display Setup dialog box appears Hew Display Setup N This operation will reset your Display Setup i Cancel 2 Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box The Wizard setup window appears see following figure 3 Click on the Manual Chart Creation button The Display Configuration Setup box appears Since the previous display configuration was reset no groups or charts are seen in the display area on the left side of the screen Note If you have ChartView Plus you will be allowed to have more than one group a
29. 1s represented by an individual button icon Toolbar related functions can also be activated from pull down menus discussed later Placing the cursor on the button and clicking the mouse button enables the tool or opens a corresponding dialog box Each Toolbar button has a pop up label that appears when the mouse is placed over the button Note The toolbar represented below is for ChartView s Main Window Separate toolbars exist for Bar Graph Digital Meters and Analog Meters options selectable from the Windows pull down menu These other toolbars are discussed later in the chapter Groupi E gt fe a E Ve amp OC OOOO O0 OOO 1 Group Select a Display Configuration 2 Start Charts and Indicators 8 Channel Configuration 3 Pause Charts 9 View File Data 4 Stop Charts 10 Arm Acquisition 5 Scroll Faster 11 Disarm 6 Scroll Slower 12 Print Charts Group Select E This feature indicates the chart group being charted Clicking on the down arrow reveals other chart groups configured by the user The standard ChartView program allows the use of only one chart group while ChartView Plus can be configured to display up to 64 groups one group at a time To select a different chart group simply pull down the group list and select the desired group The group list can be obtained by any of the control options provided in the table on page CV 5 These are a clicking the down arrow b using Ctrl G on the keyboard c using t
30. Average 16 samples at 50 60 Hz for line cycle noise TC Reference TC reference tables based on the IPTS 68 standard as listed with the US Department of Commerce NTIS International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 43 760 Trigger Input Connector Trigger Output Connector External BNC connector External BNC connector Data Storage and Format Storage 128 K reading 256 Kbyte standard optional 500 K reading 1 Mbyte 2 M reading 4 Mbyte 4 M reading 8 Mbyte Data Formats ASCII and binary binary format returns a 16 bit compensated and linearized temperature value 0 1 C bit user programmable for hi low byte or low hi byte Note High speed DMA transfers are binary format only Statistical Parameters High Low and Last available per channel during acquisition only Not available in single channel burst mode Time Stamp Available for each scan group and for each channel s high low and last parameters Time Format Relative time hh mm ss mi1 absolute time hh mm ss mil or absolute date and time dd mm yy hh mm ss mil Not available in single channel burst mode Alarm Stamp Available for each scan group Not available in single channel burst mode Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual 2 5 Digital I O Interface and Alarms Installation Category CE Category Number of Digital Inputs 8 bits LS TTL compatible Number of Digital Outputs 32 bits TTL le
31. Click the Tools menu then select the References item g Bun Tools Add Ins Window Help additional wont Macros Options VB4Project Properties Digital Signature Selecting References in the Tools Pull down Menu 4 Select VIEWXL from the list of Available References following figure Be sure a check mark is next to the VIEWXL selection then press the OK button vxl 8 ViewXL 989092 Software Reference References BAProject 4yailable References OK Visual Basic For Applications Microsoft Excel 9 0 Object Library OLE Automation Microsoft Office 9 0 Object Library Ol 1Gtech Inc Text File Based Configuration Files Ol IOtech Inc iot4auth 4uthorization Control a Ol IOtech Inc Data File Access API Cl IGtech Inc Generic Application Interface Priority CI Microsoft Common Dialog Control 6 0 SP Microsoft Forms 2 0 Object Librar w 4445erverTest h Ol Active OS Type Library Acti ibrary ae Location C WINDOW S application Daka Microsoft addins view sL xla Language English United States Selecting VIEWXL from Available References You have now performed the tasks needed to use the ViewXL Add In from your own Excel Macros An Example Macro We will now be looking at an example of a macro that uses ViewXL to tell a data acquisition application server to Load a Configuration File and to Arm the acquisition This macro assumes tha
32. ESE where ma s k is in the form of the number nnn such that000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed from the following conditions 000 Clear event mask 001 Acquisition complete 002 Stop Event 004 Query Error 008 Device Dependent Error 016 Execution Error 032 Command Error 064 Buffer 75 Full 128 Power On N CL Query the Event mask o O Set Digital Outputs Set any of the 32 digital outputs separated into four 8 bit banks to a specified setting where bankn n 1 2 3 4 isan argument in the form of the number nnn such that000 lt nnn lt 255 when converted to binary format represents the desired settings for the 8 bit bank Query current state of digital output Program Trigger Times Pstart Set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition configured stop for start and or stop on absolute time where start andstop are in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy i P Query current start and stop times 1 Query Query present configuration or mode of command preceding the Set Query Terminator Set the query terminators with the following parameters r es p is the response terminator hl is the channel terminator s an is the terminator which follows each scan output and bl oc k is the terminator which follows each trigger block output sep determines whether or not a separato
33. INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0450 20802 00 29 500 03 24 9740057 60810 35 00 400 03 24 97 0250 60 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get HLL for channel 10 INPUT A Screen shows 0045 50911 03 51 7 03 24 97 0110 10512 55 09 1 03 24 97 0050 80 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get HLL for channel 15 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0150 70803 39 01 200 03 24 97 0085 20805 25 17 300 03 24 97 0010 90 In example 1 notice that only those channels configured 1 2 10 and 15 where returned in the response Example 2 This example shows how to reset the High and Low values along with their associated Time Date Stamps It also shows the effect of specifying no HLL response terminator PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F0 0 Q1 0 0 0 OX Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Cl 4 1X After an indiscriminate amount of time Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U5X Query and reset the current HLL settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the response INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 1450 20512 23 21 700 03 24 9740850 20812 35 09 300 03 24 97 0950 30 0450 20802 00 29 500 03 24 97 0057 60810 35 00 400 03 24 97 0250 60 0045 50811 03 51 700 03 24 97 0110 10512 55 09 100 03 24 97 0050 80 0150 70803 39 01 200 03 24 97 0085 20805 25 17 300 03 24 97 0010 90 Notice that only one ENTER returned th
34. Input CTS input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent ChartScan from transmitting serial data to an RS 232 or RS 422 device when it is not able to accept it When RTS CTS handshaking is selected ChartScan will not transmit data out TxD while this signal is un asserted low If XON XOFF or no handshaking is selected the CTS line is ignored when transmitting data The signal is low true CTS Clear To Send Positive Input CTS input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent ChartScan from transmitting serial data to an RS 422 device when it is not able to accept it The signal is high true RTS Request To Send Negative Output RTS output is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent an RS 232 or RS 422 device from transmitting serial data to ChartScan when it is not able to accept it When automatic RTS CTS handshaking is selected ChartScan will assert high the RTS signal when greater than 4096 memory locations are available in its internal buffers If available memory drops below 4096 bytes ChartScan unasserts low the RTS signal The signal is low true RTS Request To Send Positive Output RTS output is used as a hardware handshake line for an RS 422 device The signal is high true GND Ground This signal sets the ground reference point for the other RS 232 RS 422 input and output signals Ethernet Interface Configuration Net232 LIA ACTIVITY LINK Your ChartScan unit can be operated over th
35. Open T C may be detected by a software query Cold Junction Sensors One for every 4 input channels Input Impedance and Input Bias Current 1M Ohm typical and 20 nA maximum Maximum Common Mode Voltage 200 VAC or 200 VDC peak Maximum Normal Mode Voltage 10 VDC or 10VAC peak Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Allowable Input 25V rms Channel to Power Ground Isolation 200V peak Channel to Channel Isolation 200V peak Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 x rated accuracy C Digital Filtering Averages 32 samples at 50 60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection VDC measurements Voltage Range Accuracy and Resolution 100 mV 0 02 3 05 uV bit 1 V 0 02 30 5 uV bit 5 V 0 02 153 uV bit 10 V 0 02 306 uV bit Note 1 Accuracy is based on 18 to 28 C 1 year includes cold junction compensation excludes thermocouple errors Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Option Cards 959696 thermocouple readings based on NIST Monograph 175 Resolution given is the typical value Add 5 C for common mode voltages greater than 25 VAC Voltage range is maximum peak to peak signal for AC volts For AC voltages where the frequency of the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle 1 with line cycle integration enabled Specified for coupling impedance gt 30 MQ and common mode frequency lt 60 Hz 300 VDC or 300 VAC peak before equipment damage occurs There is a 4700 pico farad polyprop
36. The current trigger block has been completely acquired The trigger block has reached a normal termination In this example the trigger for the current trigger block has occurred and the Current Read Pointer is located at the first available pre trigger scan 00000100 An additional 50 post trigger scans are available B 24 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Reading the Acquisition Buffer The three previous sections briefly discussed how the acquisition buffer may be accessed and read In this section the methods by which the acquisition buffer is read will be discussed in more detail As mentioned earlier the Acquisition Buffer is organized as a FIFO First In First Out As such all data read from the Acquisition Buffer will be the oldest available data Furthermore once the data has been read from the buffer it is no longer available Upon completion of a read operation the data associated with the read operation will be deleted The Read Acquisition Buffer R command is the command by which Acquisition Buffer data is read You can use this command to read anywhere from one scan to all the scan data currently residing in the buffer This command has the following valid forms R1 Read the oldest scan available R2 Read the oldest trigger block available R3 Read all available scan data When an R command is issued ChartScan checks to see 1f the request can be fulfilled If s the requested scan data is moved from the Acquis
37. Three Ways of Using ChartView 1 12 ChartView Tutorial 1 12 Power Switch LED Indicators Interface Card Slot LLLLLLA ALARM TRIGGER SCAN SEND RECEIVE ERROR POWER SERIAL DIP Switch TRIGGER TTL N OUTPUT Zs ef ION Power Fuse Chassis Calibration TTL Output Alarms amp Digital I O RS 232 DB9 Connector Holder Ground Enable Disable Trigger In DB50 Connector Connector ChartScan Rear Panel Note Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton but make use of a micro switch as discussed elsewhere in this manual Note If you used the ChartScan 1400 Quick Start document 483 0940 to startup your unit you may choose to skip this chapter or you may wish to run through the ChartView tutorial which begins on page 1 12 This chapter includes a brief introduction to the ChartScan 1400 and provides the steps to connect power up and run the device Although there are many ways to configure ChartScan 1400 this Startup is intended for a simple setup In addition to the following steps this chapter includes a section on basic concepts and a ChartView tutorial These are provided to help you gain a better understanding of the ChartView program Reference Note If you want to connect your ChartScan 1400 to the host PC via USB port refer to the associated Quick Start document QS RS 232 to USB Interface pdf 446 0941 T
38. command may only be used to extract data from the acquisition buffer which has been collected as a result of an acquisition that has been previously configured For more information regarding the configuration of acquisitions refer to the Set Trigger Configuration T command Since the unit s buffer is organized as a FIFO first in first out the Read Buffer Data command will always read the oldest data available in the buffer first As the controller requests buffer scan data the unit supplies the oldest available scan After the scan is supplied that scan is no longer available As scan data is read from the acquisition buffer the data is removed from the buffer and thereafter may not be referenced or read This command operates as follows When a Read Buffer Data R command is interpreted the requested scan data if it exists is moved one scan at a time from the Acquisition Buffer to the output queue where it will wait in state until you remove it Once the data is removed from the output queue the next Read Buffered Data command may be issued Note If the appropriate amount of scan data is not in the acquisition buffer at the time these commands are issued a conflict error will result The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte STB register may be queried or Serial Polled to determine if there is any buffer scan data available For a more complete description of how much data is available in the acquisition buffer at any partic
39. the Pre Trigger to the Post Trigger state changing its timebase This feature along with automatic re arm can be used to collect continuous gap free data at two different timebases To ensure that the collected data is gap free the Pre Trigger count must be set to 1 via the Set Count Y command Ifa value of 0 or higher is used as the Pre Trigger count only the number of Pre Trigger scans is placed in the buffer after the Trigger condition is satisfied The following graphs show an acquisition with the Pre Trigger set to 100 and then an acquisition with the Pre Trigger set to 1 With a count of 100 only These scans are not 100 scans before the trigger recorded in the buffer are stored in the scan buffer lt 150 Scans 200 S lt 100 Scans 60 lt cans gt y lt 200 Scans gt i gt D Qa z Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Time Pre Trigger Post Trigger Post Stop Trigger Event Stop Event Trigger Event PEENEM Pre Trigger Set to 100 All scans between the last Stop Event and the next Trigger Event are stored in the scan buffer regardless of the number of scans lt 150 Scans 60 lt 200 Scans gt lt 200 Scans gt Scans r gt k 0b Q E Fe Time Timebase 2 Timebase 1 Timebase 2 base 1 Time Trigger Event Stop Event Trigger Event Stop Event Pre Trigger Set to 1 To enable this functionality y
40. 0 and T3 7 0 0 and the immediate command K20 after the error have no effect Deferred commands help reduce the effects of errors and improve synchronization of command execution The primary advantage of deferred commands is that they are executed as a group either all or none If any errors occur deferred commands have no effect and the device is left in a consistent state instead of a partially modified inconsistent state ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 3 A 4 The following is a list of all the immediate and deferred commands for ChartScan Command Trigger On Command Flush Acquisition Buffer Clear Channel Configuration Restore Factory Settings Change Calibration Keyword Adjust Calibration Card Pots Power On Reset Power Up Settings Time Stamping Assign Alarm Output Alarm Stamping Configure Channels Select Cards Set Relay Make Time End Calibration Mode Error Status Query Set Data Format Set Burst Mode Frequency Calibrate Channel Gain Calibrate Channel Offset Set Scan Interval Digital Input Stamping Calibrate Cold Junction Offset Enter Calibration Mode Set Trigger Level Set SRQ Mask Set Measuring Mode Set Event Mask Set Digital Output Program Trigger Times Type Deferred Immediate Deferred Immediate Immediate Immediate Immediate Immediate Immediate Deferred Deferred Deferred Immediate Deferred Immediate Immediate Deferred Deferred Immediate Immediate Deferred Immediate Immediate Immediate Def
41. 1 A Screen shows 0104 20 PRI NT 1 ENTERO7 Get reading for channel 2 NPUT 1 A Screen shows 0010 40 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get reading for channel 3 NPUT 1 A Screen shows 0064 10 PRI NT 1 ENTERO7 Get reading for channel 4 NPUT 1 A Screen shows 0006 30 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q7 0 0 0 0X Set the resp terminator to LF EOI and the h11 scan and block terminators to None PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Request the last readings PRI NT 1 ENTERO7 Get readings for channels 1 4 Screen shows 0104 0010 0064 0006 A 46 958296 ChartScan Users Manual QC Query Card Data EXECUTION selected by the Select Card h command Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The information returned is as follows Card Number Gains and offsets for PGA values 0 7 Serial Number Offsets and temperature sensors Card ID Time and date last calibrated type 16 TC Volts card type 17 High Volts card C 001SN 0000000ID 016 Card ID type Card Serial Number Card Number 00000 1 00000 PGA 0 Gain for positive input PGA 0 Gain for negative input PGA 0 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 BGA 1 Gain for positive input PGA 1 Gain for negative input PGA 1 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 PGA 2 Gain for positive input PGA 2 Gain for negative input PGA 2 Of
42. A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U0X PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Query the CSR to determine the cause of the calibration error Get the response Screen shows E002 This is a calibration Gain error Now query the ESR reading ESC should have cleared it Get the response INPUT A Screen shows 000 Device Dependent Error no longer there PRINT A PRINT 1 SPOLL07 Screen shows 4 ESB bit no longer set only Ready is set 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Trigger Latency Each trigger source has an associated latency This is the time between the actual trigger and its recognition by the acquisition device The following latency times are only representative of the time between when the trigger is detected and when the trigger has been processed Hardware latency times and ISR servicing of other tasks at the time of the trigger event but before the trigger is detected are not accounted for In other words these times may be offset as much as the hardware latency times in addition to the amount of time that the longest uninterrupted ISR takes to process TRIGGER SOURCE External Triggers TTL Rising TTL Falling Selected Temperature Range GET IEEE only TALK IEEE only character Alarm Absolute Time Count post trigger 1 When using a channel level or alarm as the trigger source the trigger latency is dependent on the number of channels being scanned and the programmed timebase If the scan time is l
43. Configure acquisition counts PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X Configure acquisition start trigger is Trigger On command stop trigger is Counts PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Read a Scan PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve the Scan INPUT A Screen shows 0020 30 0023 80 0034 90 0013 50 PRI NT 1 OUTPUT07 V58X Set the User Terminator to be a colon PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Read a Scan PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve the Scan INPUT A Screen shows 0020 30 0023 80 0034 90 0013 50 ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 57 W Set Average Weight System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Specify the number of samples to average in the Normal mode where wt is the average weight Valid options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 with 32 being the default value DESCRIPTION Normal mode is used for line cycle integration for noise filtering or for high speed multiple channel use when noise is not a problem The selection for Average Weight W determines how many samples to average for each thermocouple or DC volts channel or how many samples over which the root mean square RMS is calculated for AC volts As there are 32 samples per line cycle setting wt to 32 64 128 or 256 samples will automatically enable line cycle noise rejection Note Due to hardware constraints weights greater than 128 limit the number of channels which can be active
44. Connect the ChartScan 1400 to the Host Computer V Apply Power to the ChartScan 1400 VI Connect the Channel Inputs VII Start ChartView Configure the System and Collect Data I Inspect the System If you have not already done so carefully unpack your shipping carton and check all contents for damage that may have occurred during shipment Immediately report all damage to the shipping agent and your sales representative Retain all shipping materials in case the unit must be returned to the factory II Install the Software For successful operation your computer should conform to the following as a minimum e Monitor SVGA 1024 x 768 screen resolution e Windows 2000 SP4 and Windows XP users PC with Intel Pentium or equivalent 1 GHz 512 MB memory 10 GB disk space e Windows Vista users PC must be Windows Vista Premium Ready 1 Remove previous device drivers if present You can do this through Microsoft s Add Remove Programs feature 2 Insert the Data Acquisition CD 8 1 2 or higher into your CD ROM drive and wait for the PC to auto run An Opening Screen will appear If AutoRun is disabled a right click Windows Start menu b select Explore and c double click MasterSetup exe As an alternative to using the CD you can download software from www mccdaq com software 3 After the intro screen appears follow the screen prompts Upon completing the software installation continue with step 3 Check and Install Har
45. DataBuffer buffoff FNPEEKW DX 2 Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default PRINT 1 CLEAR 07 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 S1X Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 3 WHILE sp AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 sp WE ND Setup SRQ handling ON PEN GOSUB Upl oadHandler PEN ON PRINT 1 ARM SRQ Program ChartScan to assert an SRQ on a Buffer 75 Full condition PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 N64XM32X Setup the ChartScan for line cycle integration mode PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 M 0X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 W 32X Setup ChartScan for 12 channels TC type T PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 12 14X Program Scan Counts and a fast timebase PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 YO 1 0X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 100 00 00 0 00 00 00 0X Program a trigger start on and stop on PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 Q7 0 0 0 0X T1 1 0 0X W ait for trigger event and Acquisition complete D 16 958296 ChartScan User s Manual PRINT Hit a key to start a trigger event PRINT 1 out put07 X WHILE s AND 2 lt gt 2 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 s WE ND PRINT A Start Trigger has been detected Set data format to Binary PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 FO 1X PRINT Waiting for 75 Full PRINT c CSRLIN WHILE I NKEY LOCATE c 1 1 PRINT TI ME WE ND CLOSE END UploadHandler PRINT 1 DISARM SRQ J
46. Failure Chksum Err NVRAM Err Inv Password Inv Command Cal Modes fie Se EEPROM rite Failure Errors Chksum Err Cal Err Inv Password Inv Command Not in cal mode offset cal offset out of range gain cal gt gain out of range cold junction cal iemp sensor offset out of range 365 gt offset gt 365 50 m v 8 gt gain gt 1 2 1000 gt offset gt 1000 Contents of Calibration Status Register CSR U3 Query the current system settings This command responds with the equivalent of the following F I L P Q0 S T Y U4 Reads the current High Low Last data for all configured channels Refer to the Data Output Format section of Appendix C for the format of the High Low Last response U5 Reads and resets the High Low Last data This command performs exactly like the U4 command except that it clears out the current High and Low readings for all of the configured channels U6 Reads the Buffer Status String The buffer status string contains current information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the Buffer Status String U6 command As mentioned earlier the U6 command is a user query command which will return information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The acquisition buffer holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more trigger events This data is held in
47. Faster D or Ctrl Z 18 Units Division Th cs oen Vertical increment per one grid box Chart Min Scale Value Grid From Chart Pull down Limit Line menu or Chart Setup Dialog Box Scroll Slower 8 or Ctrl X only Status Message Box N A View File Data YA or Windows Pull down menu Display Configuration Bor Pointer over chart Divide 2 ae Or Tab to Spacebar and right click Current group will be selected 16 17 19 20 21 Time Stamp hr min sec Thru Pull Down Menus 22 24 25 the Horizontal increment per Ctrl X Slower grid box Disarm YA or Ctrl Y 4 Status LEDs Print Charts 8 or Ctrl P E Chart Display YA Chart Max Scale From Chart Pull down Double click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or Value Grid Limit menu or Chart Setup Arm Acquisition KP or Ctrl tT Time Division Chart Speed Ctrl Z Faster Channel Configuration 10 11 12 13 zoom back out Right click to bring up the chart pop up display Line Dialog Box with the current group and target chart selected See Chart Display Pop up Menu page CV 8 for additional information Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 5 Channel Information Region Channels can return values in units of C F K R mV V or user defined units if the mX b option is used With exception of mX b is C user defined units units depend on the configuration and type of ae m CHI signal conditioning card used Sign
48. Input terminal All other terminals are Category 1 Number of Slots Four 4 Channel to Channel Isolation 200 V peak with CSN14 HV S 500 V peak Channel to System Isolation 500 V peak Dimensions 330 mm wide x 241 mm deep x 152 mm high 13 x 9 5 x 6 Weight 1 8 kg 4 lbs empty Operating Environment Standard Indoor use 0 to 50 C 0 to 95 RH non condensing to 35 C linearly derate 3 RH C from 35 to 50 C CE Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m 5 to 40 C 0 to 80 RH up to 31 C decreasing linearly to 50 RH at 40 C Power Receives power from ChartScan chassis 5 4 CSN Exp Expansion Chassis 959696 ChartScan User s Manual Calibration 6 Calibration Setup 6 1 Using ChartView s Calibration Feature 6 3 Manual Calibration Without ChartView 6 6 Calibration of Main Unit 6 7 Offset Calibration of Main Unit 6 7 Gain Calibration of Main Unit 6 9 Calibration of Signal Conditioning Cards 6 11 Offset Calibration of Cards 6 11 Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards 6 13 Gain Calibration of High Volts Card 6 16 Cold Junction Calibration 6 18 Note For users familiar with the ScanCal calibration program please be aware that ScanCal is no longer provided as a part of product support Calibration functions are now integral to ChartView and can be accessed from the Device pull down menu as detailed on page 6 3 Calibration Set
49. It is important to note Auto Rearm does not allow the user to change the configuration while armed To stop Auto Rearm the user must issue a T command with the flag set to zero If Auto Rearm is selected another acquisition will take place on the next trigger without any controller intervention This allows ChartScan to store several acquisitions contiguously in its internal memory The buffer locations of the trigger points and their associated time tags can be found in the Buffer Status String The read pointer is always on the oldest unread trigger block so requests for pointer status will always correspond to the trigger block available to be read The next trigger however must be initiated AFTER the previous acquisition was completed Otherwise a trigger overrun will occur Additional information about triggering and trigger error conditions can be found in the sections Trigger Latency and Trigger Overrun later in this appendix ChartScan User s Manual Read Pointer 958296 Me ao 845th Scan ist 3rd Scan 4th Scan 98th Scan 678th Scan 678th Scan i 824th Scan Pre trigger Scans Post trigger Scans Post stop Scans Pre trigger Scans Post trigger Scans Post stop Scans Multiple Trigger Blocks Trigger Block 1 Trigger Block 2 B 21 Acquisition Buffer Interrogation B 22 Note In the following sections current trigger block
50. Max single ch scan rate Min channel configuration Max channel configuration General mechanical relays 147 chs per sec 20 Khz 16 channels 128 channels Installation Category CE Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal All other terminals are Category 1 Warm Up 1 hour to rated accuracy Expansion Connector 40 conductor connector for connecting expansion chassis via ribbon cable ChartScan s expansion connector PH401 is located on the analog backplane Chassis Ground Connection Screw terminal Dimensions 330 mm wide x 241 mm deep x 152 mm high 13 x 9 5 x 6 Weight 6 75 kg 15 Ibs with 4 signal conditioning cards installed Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual 2 3 Operating Environment Standard Indoor use 0 to 50 C 0 CE Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m 5 to to 95 RH non condensing to 40 C 0 to 80 RH up to 31 C decreasing 35 C linearly derate 3 RH C linearly to 50 RH at 40 C from 35 to 50 C Control Power Switch RS 232 or IEEE 488 option handshake parity baud rate calibration memory write enable disable Rear Panel LED Indicators e ALARM TRIGGER and SCAN SEND and RECEIVE for standard serial interface ERROR and POWER e TALK LISTEN and SRQ on optional IEEE 488 interface card Power 105 125V or 210 250V 50 60 Hz 20 VA maximum Set via internal two position slide switch Transient Overvol
51. NPUT function must be used to bring the data into a language variable Note The ChartScan is at IEEE 488 address 07 for all IEEE 488 examples ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 1 Reading HLL Status using HLL16 BAS The following program is HLL16 BAS in the EXAMPLES directory It will configure 16 channels collect the HLL high low last data and post it on the screen Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command then waiting a few seconds PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The command will be used to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as T type thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3X The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition The program will not proceed until a key is pressed PRINT The ChartScan is collecting High Low Last for all 16 channels PRINT Hit a key to start or stop retrieving HLL data WHILE INKEY WEND Until another key is pressed to exit the loop the U4 command is issued and the high low last data is collected The OUTPUT command sends U4 to the device the ENTER command requests the data then QuickBASIC s LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488 driver and
52. PR Note that the program can go to other foreground tasks while ChartScan is acquiring data and only occasionally query the unit and collect its data This is possible since the acquisition is slow and ChartScan s buffer can be relatively large Upload data as it becomes available PRINT The program is currently collecting data as it becomes available PRINT Hit a key to stop Acquisition 0 WHILE I NKEY i i 1 S 0 WHILE s and 8 lt gt 8 Is scan available PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R1X Ask for one scan PRINT 1 ENTER 07 NPUT 2 READI NG LOCATE7 1 PRINT The scan i was READING WE ND After a key has been pressed the program proceeds to the next block where the character is issued again ending the post trigger state and entering the post stop state PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 X Now the collection of the post stop data begins by querying for new scans and requesting the data The program is done when the acquisition is complete 958296 ChartScan User s Manual i 0 WHILE I NKEY i i 1 5 0 WHILE S AND 8 lt gt 8 PRINT 1 SPOLLO7 INPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT 1 OUTPUT07 R1X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 READI NG LOCATE 7 1 PRINT The scan i was READI NG PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 UOX PRINT 1 ENTERO7 OUTPUT 2 U if U 1 then END WE ND A
53. Pointer will be less than 0 Likewise if post trigger scans are currently being read the Current Read Pointer will be greater than 0 If the current scan to be read is the trigger scan then the Current Read Pointer will be 0000000 If the Current Read Pointer is undefined its value will be 0999999 e Trigger Time Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the trigger event occurred for the current read block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the trigger event has not occurred then this field will have the value 00x007 0000007070700 A 54 958296 ChartScan Users Manual e Stop Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current read block that the stop event occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 e Stop Time Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the stop event occurred for the current read block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query then this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 End Scan Pointer This fi
54. S PARITY SERIAL RS 232 SELECT BAUD RATE SELECT BAUD RATE Recommended Configuration Recommended Configuration Standard Units Only Early Production Units Only Communication H S Handshake H S Handshake BAUD RATE 6 7 8 1 0 1 9600 Baud BAUD RATE 6 7 8 1 0 1 9600 Baud RS 232 or RS 422 9 0 RS 232 CALIBRATION 19 O Disabled It is recommended that you do not exceed 9600 Baud 3 Install the Signal Conditioning Card s if applicable Signal conditioning cards are pre installed per customer order However if you need to install a signal conditioning card or CSN Relay card perform the following steps Repeat the steps for additional cards and for placing cards into the optional CSN Exp expansion chassis if applicable 1 RS 232 CAUTION Ensure ChartScan 1400 is powered down and not connected to any power source prior to installing or removing a card Failure to do so could cause equipment damage CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a ChartScan 1400 system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of ChartScan 1400 s main unit can cause equipment damage 1 4 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan U
55. This feature works in conjunction with Keyboard Triggering when Auto Re Arm is being used For details regarding Auto Re Arm see page cv 46 If the option is disabled acquisition data is saved to disk and the device automatically re arms ChartView displays the Trigger dialog box and waits for the trigger button to be pressed by the user before beginning the next acquisition If the option is enabled the trigger dialog box is not displayed and the trigger is automatically sent to the acquisition device The automatic trigger may be delayed by up to 2 seconds after the previous acquisition has finished Ask to overwrite existing data files If this feature is checked existing data files will not be automatically written over Instead you will be asked via prompt if you want to write over the existing file Acquire Arn Acquisition Chrl T eine Bikey Acquisition Status Start All Meters Stop All Meters Arm Acquisition Arms the data acquisition device in preparation of receiving a trigger Ctrl T Disarm Disarms the data acquisition device and discontinues the acquisition of data Ctrl Y Acquisition Status Displays the condition of a data acquisition Start All Meters Starts all meters Does not affect charts Stop All Meters Stops all meters Does not affect charts CV 24 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Upload Data During Acquisition automatic control Abort Upload Ctrl J manual c
56. Trigger Timebase Interval If so then the Start Trigger regardless of what point in time it occurred will be synchronized with the next occurrence of the Pre Trigger Scan Interval tick In other words if the real Start Trigger occurs between Pre Trigger Scan Interval ticks then the acquisition will not begin until the next tick of the Pre Trigger Scan Interval Otherwise the acquisition will begin as soon as the Start Trigger is encountered EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 112 00 00 0 Collect scans once every 12 hours then when Start 00 01 00 0X Trigger occurs collect them once every minute PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Y100 10000 0X Set pre trigger count to 100 post trigger count to 10000 and define no post stop count PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 7 0 1X Start Trigger On command Stop Trigger on post trigger count 10000 and synchronize the Start Trigger to the pre trigger timebase interval PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Issue Start Trigger acquisition may begin as much as 12 hours from now because we synchronized with pre trigger timebase interval A 52 958296 ChartScan User s Manual U User Status EXECUTION SYNTAX Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where r eq refers to one of the following request types 0 Query and clear the Event Status Register ESR 1 Query the Status Byte Register STB 2 Query and clear Calibration Status Register CSR 3 Que
57. User s Manual PRINT The ChartScan is collecting High Low Last for all 32 channels PRINT Hit a key to start or stop collecting HLL data WHILE I NKEY WEND Until another key is pressed to exit the loop the U4 command is issued and the high low last data is collected The OUTPUT command sends U4 to the device the ENTER command requests the data then the QuickBASIC s LINE INPUT gets the data from the IEEE 488 driver and places it in the variable U The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels from the string U and places them on the screen Since format of the volts data is subtly different than that of the temperature data two different FOR loops must be used to extract the channels data WH LE I NKEY PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U4X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U FOR i 1 TO 16 PRINT High Low and Last readings of Channel PRINT MID U i 66 65 66 Extract temp data NEXT i FOR i 1 TO 16 PRINT High Low and Last readings of Channel i 16 PRINT MID U 32 66 i 78 77 78 Extract volts data NEXT i WE ND Acquiring Pre amp Post Trigger Data at Different Rates using SLOW ACQ BAS The following program is SLOW_ACQ BAS in the EXAMPLES directory It will configure 32 temperature channels and then collect data as soon as it becomes available and post it on screen Although not necessary it is good practice to reset
58. W 17 2 23 T 25 127 e be B E e 0 8 6 4 0 10 1 18 2 6 F 06 7 N 14 56 8 V 22 5E 9 A 30 1 f 06 6E 1 n 14 7e 1 V 2 7E 12 30 5 A E 1 05 9 73 T M 13 51 81 55 8 U 21 59 89 5D 9 Y 5 29 60 96 61 97 62 98 63 99 64 100 65 10 ch o 00 1 4 05 9 105 6D 1 m 2 13 1 113 75 1 q u 21 9 121 7D 1 y 5 9 8 9 b c d 02 03 6A 106 6B 107 6C 108 j k 10 11 72 114 73 115 74 116 a it it 18 19 0 7A 122 7B 123 7C 124 Z 26 27 8 68 104 Ei 08 70 112 16 78 120 X 24 889802 ChartScan User s Manual ASCII Code Details Decimal Values 00 to 31 ACG amp UCG Characteristics ASCII Control Codes Decimal 00 to 31 Hex Character Value and Bus Message or amp H Abbreviation Addressed Command Group ACG None NUL None Go To Local TT Selected Device Clear SDC G BEL Parallel Poll Disable PP D LEE Group Execute Tigger GET Take Control TCT Universal Command Group UCG Local Lockout 10 Device Gear DCT Parallel Poll Unconfig PPU Serial Pol Enable GPE Serial Poll Disable SPD 07 0A oc ico a m a oz oz S B Pena 5 o5 6 o 7 r 8 o 09 oo E A e E aa e a 15 F _ N Notes e ASCII control codes are sometimes used to formalize a communications session between communication devices e DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 FS GS RS
59. WHILE I NKEY WE ND Query the ChartScan for the of scans available in the Buffer PRI NT PRI NT NPUT PRI NT PRI NT PRI NT NPUT PRI NT PRI NT PRI NT LINE PRI NT UA UA amp PRI NT PRI NT An SRQ has been detected 1 SPOLLO7 2 sp spoll response before sp 1 OUTPUT 07 U0X 1 ENTER 07 2 EVENT EVent Status before EVENT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 U U MI D U VAL UA VAG 9 7 The ChartScan collected UA amp scans of data Upload available data B amp UA amp 24 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 958296 PRINT Total number of Bytes available B PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R3X PRINT Uploading data PRINT 1 ENTER 07 8 a I NPUT 8 2 PRINT The preamble is a pre amp VAL MID a 2 7 loops INT pre amp s PRINT loops loops FOR i 1 TO loops PRINT 1 ENTER 07 s BUFFER buffseg buffoff DMA PRINT 3 DataBuffers NEXT i rema pre amp s loops PRINT remainder of preamble rema PRINT 1 ENTER 07 rema BUFFER buffseg buffoff DMA PRINT 3 MID DataBuffer 1 rema PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U0X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 EVENT PRINT EVent Status after EVENT PRINT 1 SPOLLO7 INPUT 2 sp PRINT Spoll response after uploading sp PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INP
60. addition the U Status commands can be used at any time without interfering with normal operation to return information about various ChartScan conditions Query Commands Most commands have a corresponding query command formed by appending a question mark to the command letter Query commands place their responses into the output queue until the controller retrieves them They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command When appropriate the response from a query command is in the form of a command string which if it were executed would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the query was executed For instance the response to the User Terminator query command V X is in the form Vuser where 0 lt user lt 255 This response is in the form of the User Terminator V command and if it is sent to the ChartScan it would set the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the query was issued Query responses are always fixed length strings in a pre defined format Any number of query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that responds with only the information of interest for a given application Query commands are immediate in other words their command responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted and before any other commands including the Execute X command For example PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V1 X V X Get the res
61. are 0 Disable time stamping default l Enable absolute time stamping and 2 Enable relative time stamping Assign Alarm Output Set alarm condition where c hans is the channel s to assign to the digital output chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where l lt chan lt max orfirst last fora range of channels where 1 lt first lt l ast lt max where ma Xx 128 for ChartScan 1400 out put is the digital output number to associate the channel s with where 0 lt output lt 32 A Query channels assigned to digital output Alarm Stamping A state Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable alarm stamping default and 1 Enable alarm stamping Configure Channels Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units chans andt ype are required arguments while 0 ws p highsp andhyst are optional chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where l lt chan lt max orfirst last fora range of channels where 1 lt first lt l ast lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis ischan 0 t ype is the type to assign to those channels Query current channel configuration C Select Card C card Select the card from which subsequent QC and U12 interrogation will retrieve information Without optional Relay Card Valid options for car d are 0 Selects the chassis 1 2 3 or 4 Selects the card in corresponding
62. are intentionally disabled Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remain functional When you select the High speed single channel mode a Warning dialog box appears with this information providing you with the opportunity to cancel if desired Reference Note Burst mode operational constraints are discussed in greater detail on page CV 43 Acquisition Setup Parameter ftom Event Configuration Trigger Seta trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following Keyboard Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan Note If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre trigger is disabled External TTL Use an external signal to start the trigger scan Channel Value Use specified value and or hysterisis of a given channel Select if the trigger is to occur above or below the specified values Alarm Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan Absolute Time Use a time of day to start the trigger scan Note If Absolute Time is selected the use of Auto Re Arm is disabled Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count as specified below Keyboard isn t applicable If a Multiscan ChartScan or NetScan is connected and High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode is selected then Count from trigger is the only Stop available for the event configuration Count Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set Acqui
63. by ChartScan in Non Volatile RAM NV RAM The password is a safety feature used to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering calibration mode and altering the calibration constants As a safeguard the calibration password and chassis calibration constants are hardware protected by use of a Calibration Enable Disable switch pushbutton or micro switch as described in the following notices Calibration mode disabled is the factory default setting This setting should not be changed unless you want to change the password or chassis calibration constants CAUTION Ensure calibration mode is disabled during normal ChartScan operation Otherwise the calibration password and calibration constants may become corrupt and normal operation may be disrupted Standard ChartScan units have a Calibration E nable Disable Pushbutton If it is necessary to change the calibration password via the K command or to calibrate the chassis the calibration mode can be enabled by indenting the pushbutton For details on calibration refer to Chapter 6 Calibration E arly production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration E nable Disable Pushbutton These units enable and disable the calibration mode using micro switch number 9 on the DIP switch If it is necessary to change the calibration password via the K command or to calibrate the chassis the calibration mode can be enabled by setting micro switch 9 to the up 1 position
64. charts as well as in one or more meters analog digital or bar graph 3 Buffering Acquisition in Instrument Acquisiton Device Computer System Acquired data from point of trigger is received by acquisition device and temporarily stored in device buffer As in the previous scenarios selected display channels can be viewed 2 Acquiring amp Uploading Acquisition Acquisiton Device Computer System Device has been triggered Data is temporarily stored in device buffer prior to being uploaded to PC system hard disk As in the first scenario selected display channels can be viewed 4 Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Sensor Zz Acquisiton Device Computer System Acquired data is uploaded to the PC hard disk from the device buffer As in the previous scenarios selected display channels can be viewed Basic Data Acquisition Scenarios 988992 ChartView CV 3 What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide ChartView and ChartView Plus provide you with the capability to connect to and control any member of the ChartScan NetScan MultiScan or TempScan family of data acquisition instruments as well as Create and edit chart display Setups 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees Set up analog input parameters selecting Channels TC types Units to acquire data ccccc cece eee eieaa uas Contigurezalanms 10G alarms en r aa a a Set up automatic re arms Auto Re Arm cccee
65. collect and buffer scans it is necessary to configure an acquisition An acquisition can consist of the following components Pre Trigger Scans taken before the Trigger is satisfied Post Trigger Scans taken between the Trigger and the Stop event Scans taken after the Stop event However if the Post Trigger is set to 0 the Trigger scan is collected 1 scan but no Post Stop scans are collected Pre trigger ingest Post trigger Post stop Scans Scans Scans aaa Ae a a HEHHE EELEE e Stop Event occurs somewhere between scans Scans Composing a Single Acquisition Trigger Block These components constitute a single Trigger Block in the internal memory Every Trigger Block has one and only one Trigger point This figure describes a Trigger Block Pre Trigger State The Pre Trigger state is defined as the period after ChartScan has been configured to collect an acquisition via the Trigger Configuration T command and before the actual Trigger event occurs While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will flash As in any other acquisition state the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated at the fastest rate possible under the current channel configuration Pre trigger Trigger Post trigger Bredi Trigger ri S re trigger Post trigger Scans Scans Scans a Scans ed a ee a re time ESES CR ng AN e a Coe ee E N time Trigger ie Event Event Trigger With Synchronization Flag Off Trigger With Synchronization Flag On It
66. command options For example 1 2 3 is not the same as 123 Multiple Parameters If more than one parameter is used for a command they must be separated by a comma or white space For example 04 1 1 0 0o0rQ 4 1 1 0 0 is appropriate Command Strings Commands may be sent individually or in a string with other commands For example the following four lines of a program PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Al 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C2 2X PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A2 2X have the same effect as the single line PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 1 Al 1 2 2 A2 2 X Execute Command Deferred commands are interpreted and processed as they are received They require the Execute X command to be issued in order to be executed If multiple system commands are used in the same string each use of the command must be followed by the Execute x command However immediate commands do not require an Execute command to be processed For more detail on deferred and immediate command types refer to the next section on Command Interpretation in this chapter For example to clear the SRQ mask and then set it for SRQ on trigger PRINT 1 OUTPUT10 M000 X M002 X To configure channels 1 through 32 for temperature and 33 through 64 for volts using one command string PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 32 1 033 64 11X A 2 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Fixed Formats Any Query command or Status U command returns a fixed format For i
67. due to a command syntax error E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO A command parameter was out of range or missing E004 A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with the card type installed E008 A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately calibrated E016 A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger state or when a non expectant trigger event occurs E032 An Open T C Error or Range Error occurs when the hardware circuitry detects an open thermocouple or when the software detects the A D input has reached or exceeded its linearization E128 A Command Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other commands that have been issued or the current configuration This error usually occurs when a command is issued that cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit For instance if the Set Scan Interval 1 command is issued during an acquisition tstart 0 After execution of the Error Status Query most error conditions are cleared Error conditions may also be cleared by issuing a Clear Event Status U0 command to the unit The ERROR light will remain on until an E or UO command is executed to clear the error condition EXAMPLE
68. ease of discussion this document s use of the term ChartView also refers to ChartViewNET and ChartView Plus refers to ChartViewNET Plus Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 1 Overview ChartView is a graphic Microsoft Windows based program which was designed for ease of use with no need of programming knowledge fe ChartView Plus permits multiple groups and up to four overlapping channels per chart These enhanced features can be enabled by entering the following code in the authorization dialog box see page CV 20 C3523DFA6C0A Groups Charts amp Channels When starting the program with no configuration file present a feature called Chart Setup Wizard is automatically activated to assist you with your display setup To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you need to understand the relationship of Groups Charts and Channels Group Group refers to a group of charts ChartView makes use of one chart ne cA Display group ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups depending on the capabilities of oe your PC but can only display one group at a time 1 at Chart Chart refers to display area that reflects real time channel data values CH1 for a selected channel and can be scrolled at various rates You can assign up to CH2 16 charts per group ChartView Plus enables each chart to display up to four CH3 overlapping channels ai l l EA Chart 2 Channel Channel refers to a signal cha
69. expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 13 1 Connect an applicable calibration harness to each card Refer to figure below Twisted Pair to See Note 2 Hi V and S 100 pF Film Type Capacitor 1 uF Film Type Capacitor Twisted Pair to See Note 2 Lo V and S BNC Harness for CSN14 LV B Calibrator Voltage and Sensing Connections On Board Portion of Connector Removable Portion of Connector Banana Plug Solder Harness for CSN14 LV S Note 1 Twisted pair and capacitor connections are electronically identical to those shown for the BNC Harness Type U Subminiature Plug Note 2 These figures are to be used for relation of electrial connections only For actual harnesses the capacitors must be soldered as close Subminiature Plug TypeHarness for CSN14 TC P to the connector as possible Harness Types and Connections for Low Volts Card Gain Calibration 6 14 Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual 2 Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each card see following table and verify with a digital multimeter Requirements for both devices are specified in Required Equipment Volts DC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 S
70. following commands can be used Note that Appendix A contains more detailed information regarding these commands Mode Related Parameter Commands Command Syntax Function S M mode Ypre post stop Or YO count 0 M modeF f req W wt U17 ChartScan Users Manual Set Measuring Mode Options for mode are 0 Normal mode and 1 High speed single channel mode Set Averaging Weight Specify the number of samples to average in Normal mode where wt is the averaging weight Options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 with 32 being the default Set frequency for High speed single channel mode f req must be a value for Hz such that 38 5 lt f r eq lt 2000 The default is 2000 Hz Set Counts or Select Blocks In Normal mode This command is used to set acquisition counts where pr e is the pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and st op is the post stop count In High speed single channel mode burst mode the post position serves as count count is used to select the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Options for block count are dependent upon system memory as follows 256Kbytes count value allowed is 2 to 512 1 Mbyte count value allowed is 2 to 2048 4 Mbytes count value allowed is 2 to 8192 8 Mbytes count value allowed is 2 to 16384 Note In each case the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2 Query the Measuring Mode This command queries the
71. following three parameters M F and W Return RMS This command computes and returns the root mean square RMS value of the last completed high speed single channel mode acquisition 958296 B 3 Normal Mode ChartScan has the ability to reject noise resulting from AC line pick up when an Average weight setting of 16 or more measurements per line cycle is used This noise rejection factor is important as it allows for higher accuracy When an average weight setting of 32 or more is used ChartScan is operating in a line cycle integration manner and can provide readings for DC voltage AC voltage and thermocouple based temperatures at a rate of up to 44 channels per second Noise filtering improves by selecting higher average weight settings but reduces the overall response time of the unit You can use the following formulas to compute the amount of time needed to acquire one scan For 60 Hz systems Scan time channels x samples channel 12 x 520 83 us For 50 Hz systems Scan time channels x samples channel 12 x 625 00 us To use the Normal scan mode such that noise filtering line cycle integration is enabled use the M and W commands or use ChartView Example M 0 Select normal mode W 16 Select 16 samples over which to average Note The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following 64 128 or 256 However using the weight of 256 will limit the number of active channels
72. in Appendix A API Command Reference B 4 958296 ChartScan User s Manual High Speed Single Channel Mode Burst Mode The High speed single channel mode also known as burst mode is used for post acquisition waveform analysis of AC and DC voltages In this mode ChartScan can sample from 38 5 Hz to 20 0 kHz and store the data in memory Note that ChartScan s memory can be expanded up to 8 Mbytes When performing post acquisition waveform analysis such as Fast Fourier transforms ChartScan can return each data point in a waveform In addition ChartScan can provide the true RMS value of an AC voltage Because high sampling rates can be achieved in the High speed single channel mode the conditions indicated in the following table apply High Speed Single Channel Mode Necessary Item Conditions Due to High Sampling Rates High Low Last registers Alarms Trigger Start Trigger Stop Pre Trigger Post Stop Count Time Stamping Alarm Stamping Digital Input Stamping Averaging weight 256 forced default can not be changed Frequency In regard to AC voltage frequency must be such that it results in a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle ChartScan collects samples for the selected channel in blocks of 256 samples in one time increment This appears similar to a scan of 256 channels while in the normal multiple channel mode since you must program the number of 256 sample blocks to acquire in the post trigger count
73. in an acquisition to 122 channels maximum Weight wt Maximum of Channels 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M 0X Select line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 WHO4X Select number of samples 64 PRI NT 1 Setup to read 10 post trigger scans OUTPUTO7 YO 10 0X a NT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 Enable channels 1 3 for Type J thermocouples i 1X PRI NT 1 Arm the unit QUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger unit and collect scans A 58 958296 ChartScan User s Manual X Execute EXECUTION SYNTAX X Execute preceding command string DESCRIPTION Most commands are interpreted and processed as they are received but are not executed until the Execute X command is issued Commands sent without an X are stored in an internal buffer and are not executed until an X is received While a command line is being interpreted the front panel LEDs will not be updated These LEDs will only be updated when the unit is in a ready state In order to determine if the unit is in a ready state perform a Serial Poll for the ready bit 4 If multiple system commands are used in the same string each use of the command must be followed by the Execute X command Any number of Execute commands may be inserted into the same command string EXAMPLE PRINT 1 CLEARO7 Clear the unit PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C Clear the current chann
74. input defined under the Set Data Format F command The channel t ype is used by the unit to determine how a certain channels readings are to be interpreted Because of this fact defining the channel type is critical to the proper configuration of the channel Each channel must be assigned a channel type in order for it to be included in the scan group Likewise assigning a channel type of 0 will remove that channel from the scan group The following table outlines the channel types for ChartScan 1400 ON 1 9 Thermocouple Card UO NAY S Il Volts Card 12 13 14 Volts Card S piso Reserved S USN S 2000 High Voltage Card 21 22 High Voltage Card __ 23 24 25 26_ Volts Card S 28 29 High Voltage Card __ 30 High Voltage Card 31 50 Thermocouple Card EE NA S 100 110 Reserved S The following list outlines the channel type definitions Null Type The null channel type is type 0 Assigning a channel to the null type will remove the channel from the scan group Thermocouple Card Types See the following tables for details Volts Card Types See the following tables for details High Voltage Card Types See the following tables for details Reserved Types Reserved types are types that are reserved to the internal processes of the unit Among these types 90 and 91 are reserved for chassis calibration Refer to Chapter 6 for calibration details ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 21 Note Specifying a reserved type will cause
75. is taking place Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 9 Scan Configuration Configuring a Scan Although 128 channels are available for scanning when an expansion chassis is added to the ChartScan unit only those channels configured in the channel scan are collected and available to the controlling computer Channels are always scanned in ascending order regardless of the sequence you input The same configuration is used in reading channel data through the High Low Last Registers or the Acquisition Buffer Scan configuration is also accomplished using the Configure Channels C command This command allows up to 128 channels to be specified by either assigning individual channels or entering a range of channels The 128 possible channels can be configured in any sequence but the scan will be ordered sequentially by ChartScan Note Channels cannot be accessed randomly as part of a channel scan Configuring the Scan Interval The scan interval is the frequency at which the scans are acquired It can be programmed via the Set Scan Interval I command from a 99 hour period down to as fast as the unit can run under the current channel configuration The normal scan interval can be programmed in increments of 0 1 seconds ChartScan has two distinct scan intervals e First is the normal scan interval This scan interval is used when ChartScan is c
76. location or under a different file name See following note There will be no default Display Configuration file present the first time ChartView is started In this case Chart Setup Wizard activates allowing you to create a display setup When ChartView is shutdown the display configuration is automatically saved in a default configuration file that will load upon the next startup of ChartView If the default display configuration becomes corrupt or if you would like to bypass this configuration when starting ChartView you can hold down the Control Key when starting ChartView This causes the program to ignore the default display configuration and await your creation of a new display Starts stops or pauses chart scrolling Selects the next chart group in the display configuration Used to alter the chart scrolling speed There are fourteen possible chart speeds The range of speeds is from 0 1 sec div to 1 0 hr div Zoom causes the Main Window to display one chart only For example if you were viewing 3 charts and desired to get a better view of Chart 2 you could use Zoom to view Chart 2 using the full chart viewing area as compared to using one third of the area The zoom feature can also be invoked by double clicking in the chart region of the chart you want to apply the zoom to Once you have zoomed in on a chart the pull down menu Zoom option is replaced by a Restore option Selecting Restore from the menu will return t
77. m o p iowerassP Command 76 m n a Lowercase Command 7 ma 2 r f CtowercaseR Commande ms 7s s towercaseS Command 19 me a t towercaseT Command 20 ar s u f iowercaseu Commana ms e v towercasev Command22 m m w f towercasew Commandos 120 7s x towercasex Commana pat 79 y towercasey Command 25 i22 ra 2 LowercaseZ Command 35 i23 m Opening Brace Command 27 raza re _ Vertcaltine Command 28 prs m Grosing Brace Command 39 pe fe me f commas ChartScan User s Manual 889802 F 7 F 8 889802 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix G ChartScan Error Messages At initial power up ChartScan performs automatic self tests to ensure it is fully functional Rear panel LEDs indicate errors if they occur Possible error conditions and their corresponding indicator light patterns are shown in the following table Any pattern not shown indicates an internal error that is not field serviceable in this case contact the factory When onlythe POWER and ERROR LEDsareon a configuration error exists as a result of the setup information in NV RAM If you observe a configuration error refer to E in Appendix A then perform an error status query If you observe any other type of error condition make note of the error and contact your service representative If no problems are found ChartScan will begin its power up initialization This self t
78. machine screws A provided install two mounting blocks to the inner sides of the ChartScan unit as indicated by the following figure AN N Cover Plate Expansion Cover Plate eae Screw 1 of 2 races r on Screyy A 1 per block oo oo A A A EA A A A a ee m a A Ey A Expansion Screw B ee Chassis 2 per blacki QOQ OOOOOO OG Oo o000000000000000 Mounting Block 1 of 4 ai s O Q QOQO O O O D OOQO D 2 Ribbon Cable ae Mounting Block a Z CA 54 Included C Got i p i o Connector PH401 EE EA eA eA eA EA ee ee ee EE ee ee EE on back side of Analog Backplane Board Cross Section of Mounting Block 0000 O00000 000 2 0000000000000000 2 ChartScan s OQQ O Q DOQOOQ QOOO Connecting the Expansion Chassis to ChartScan 4 Insert one end of the included 40 conductor ribbon cable CA 154 into ChartScan s connector PH401 PH401 is located above the uppermost signal conditioning connector on the top edge of the analog backplane card See the following figure Connecting the Backplane Cards Expansion Backplane Card Partial Located In Expansion Chassis O TE l 4 Ll Pol Pel Jol Pol Pal Jel Jol Jo Jol Pel Jal Jol Jol Jol
79. numbered channels e g CH1 is calculated ahead of CH2 This makes a difference when subtracting a reference channel in regard to the time aspect of the reference value If the channel is configured for Volts the units automatically change to V at this point you have the option of selecting the millivolt unit mV The user can also change each channel to apply a linear equation mX b to the data When the mX b option is selected the Configure Engineering Units dialog box is displayed You are prompted to define m and b and the engineering units label as well as which standard units the mX b equation should be applied to The engineering units chosen will be displayed in the Units column and the mX b equation will be applied to the reading from the device before the reading is displayed or written to disk The mX b option is convenient for obtaining a value that has a linear relation to a channel reading X is the scanned voltage value read back from the acquisition device m is but not limited to a proportionality constant or gain factor but not zero b is the offset value the value of the calculated reading when the scanned value is zero CHOOSE UNITS gt Configure Engineering Units Use the form below to configure the channel to the formula Y mx b Ref Chan Chan Yalue Scale Factor Raw Chan Value Offset Ret Chan In Units C 1 000 A r Units E G 0 000 CH2 Linear Trans
80. of this chapter Logic Levels Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL loads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0 0 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground pins see following table DB50 Pinout CAUTION Do not exceed the 0 0 to 5 3 volt levels described above Exceeding these levels may damaged the unit in a way not covered by the warranty Digital I O Port Pinout 3 14 The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs inputs and grounds associated with the DB50 connector Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32 respectively As mentioned above outputs through 16 can be used with a relay card option Understanding the Hardware 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 33 et Sey qi SSSSSSSSESSS O O O O 00 O 0 0 0 0 O sees 50 49 4847 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 363 Inputs Grounds Outputs DBS50 Pin Descriptions Output Pin MEN CEF te a a B ee poe 5 35 e IE 8 36 9 2 Sa 959096 Output Pin Input Pin No Signal No Signa 12 13 14 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 ChartScan User s Manual External TTL BNC Connectors ChartScan s rear panel provides two external trigger BNC connectors The BNC TTL Scan output is used for synchro
81. parameter of the Y command and will retrieve the data from ChartScan as post trigger count scans of 256 samples Note High speed single channel mode is a one shot operation It permits ChartScan to collect the specified number of samples then stops The mode is not continuous nor does it allow for memory overflow and wrap around The maximum number of samples is limited by the amount of memory available See the Y command reference in Appendix A for related information Note In regard to AC voltage measurements ChartScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle In order to compute an accurate RMS value you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle Note In High speed single channel mode upon completion of the acquisition AC voltage RMS values can be retrieved with the U17 query command To use the High speed single channel mode use the following commands or use ChartView Note that these commands or ChartView equivalent are all that is needed to initiate the High speed single channel mode data acquisition M 1 Select high speed single channel mode Cchan type Select channel number and voltage range F freq Select sampling frequency where 38 5 lt f req lt 2000 0 YO count 0 Select count where count is the number of 256 sampling blocks to be acquired T1 8 0 0 Arm the s
82. parameters as Engineering Units Even though binary is specified Degrees F Interpret C and L command parameters as Counts Counts format is specified Note that Engr Units parameter is ignored PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F3 3X C 6 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Data Output Formats Data Output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may be used for Channel Data Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format if it is specified Channel Data 1s defined as data originating from the High Low Last HLL Registers or the Acquisition Buffer The commands that initiate Channel Data output are the R R U4 U5 andU13 commands However Channel Data may also be output as Engineering Units and Counts As in the case of Data Input Formats all other types of output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is specified However there are only 3 command queries which need to follow the F command format in this fashion They areC L and U8 command queries Note If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format the Engineering Units parameter of the F command is ignored Examples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F0 0X Output C L U8 as well as R R U4 U5 and U13 in Engineering Units Degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F1 1X Output R R U4 U5 and U13 as binary Output C L and U8 as Engineering Units Degrees F PRI NT 1 OUTPUT07 F3 3X Output C L U
83. per chart as well as vary the number of charts per group Chart Setup Wizard ey Char Saryy Yh jc rel w E e Automatic Chart Creation Simple Moderate Advanced Create Charts with one channel l assigned per chart Starting with channel CH Group Selector Jr Charts Channels The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 Manual Chart Creation Create Charts The above setup will assign 1 channels starting from channel CH1 Chart Setup Wizard Simple Mode Chart Setup Wizard Automatic Setup Options Setup Type Group Setup Chart Setup Channel Setup for Chart Groups Simple 1 group only Up to 16 charts 1 channel per chart 1 group only Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Up to 64 groups Up to 16 charts per Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart 7 group Note Moderate and Advanced modes of Automatic Chart Creation are only available with ChartView Plus The standard ChartView program allows for 1 chart group only and does not permit overlapping channels Note The Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button above figure allows you to exit the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a manual create chart display mode Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation The following figures show the Moderate and Advanced mode dialog boxes available only wi
84. perform calibration until after the ChartScan or NetScan and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 4 With all covers in place allow the ChartScan or NetScan unit to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour also allow calibration equipment to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour 5 Short circuit the input channels that will be used for calibration one calibration channel per card The following figure illustrates the four different types of shorting connectors ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 11 Copper Wire Solder ad Copper Wire BNC Connector Terminal Type Connector On Board Portion with Copper Short with Copper Short of Terminal Type Connector Short for CSN14 LV B Short for CSN14 LV T Copper Wire Copper Wire Gila Banana Plugs Type U Subminiature Plug with Copper Short with Copper Short Short for CSNI14 HV S and CSN14 LV S Short for CSN14 TC P Four Possible Short Types used for Signal Conitioning Card Offset Calibration 1 If the calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and the current password This enables the calibration mode
85. pin sub D to ChartScan 9 pin sub D RS 232 422 cable 6 ft IEEE 488 interface card see important notice below 16 output CSN Relay card RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p n CA 232 USB KIT This kit makes it possible to connect ChartScan to the host PC using ChartScan s RS 232 Serial Port and a USB Port on the PC For a list of kit components and instructions refer to document QS RS 232 to USB Interface pdf The pdf is included on Data Acquisition CD rev 8 1 2 and higher An Otech Personal488 product is required for IEEE 488 operation with ChartView A device named WAVE must be configured in IOtech Driver 488 W31 W95 or WNT when available 2 2 Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual Specifications are exceeded the function of the equipment as well as the protection provided by it may be impaired CAUTION If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual or if specification limits NOTE Specifications for signal conditioning cards and for the ChartScan Expansion Chassis appear in their respective sections of this manual Measurement Parameters A D resolution Accuracy with type J TC TCs supported DCV DC volts ACV AC volts Ch to ch isolation Ch to system isolation AC line rejection 16 bit w over sampling OSC J K T E R S B N yes yes 500 V or 200 V 500 V yes Scanning Parameters Switching Technology Max scan rate
86. places it in the variable U The FOR loop extracts the data for the individual channels from the string U and places them on the screen WHILE INKEY PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U4X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U FOR i 1 TO 16 PRINT High Low and Last readings of Channel i PRINT MID U i 66 65 66 NEXT i WE ND Time and date information is also available in the high low last data Reading HLL Data from T C amp Volts Cards using HLL32 BAS D 2 The following program is HLL32 BAS in the EXAMPLES directory It will configure 16 Temperature and 16 volts channels then collect the high low last data and post it on the screen Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned WHILE AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as T type thermocouples and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as 10 volt inputs PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 14X The next three lines tell you to hit a key to start the acquisition The program will not proceed until a key is pressed 958296 ChartScan
87. separately or by combining them in one command string The programmed Event Mask remains enabled until a Clear Event Mask NO command is sent or the controller sends a Power On Reset R command See the IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response section in Appendix C for more information The following list outlines the possible conditions of the ESE N000 Sending this command clears the entire mask of the Event Status Enable ESE Register to zero N001 Acquisition Complete Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB if the unit has determined that the configured acquisition has completed N002 Stop Event Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB when the pre defined stop event of a configured acquisition has occurred N004 Query Error This condition is set when an attempt is made to read data from the output queue when no data are present or data in the output queue were lost Data may be lost when too many data are requested to be buffered in the queue for example issuing multiple commands to return data without ever reading them 008 Device Dependent Error This condition is set when a conflict in programmed parameters is detected This is also referred to as a conflict error N016 Execution Error This condition is set when a parameter exceeds valid limits for a particular command This is also referred to as Invalid Device Dependent Command Option IDDCO error N032 Command Error This condition is set when an illegal c
88. state If however the post stop count parameter of the Set Counts Y command is zero the unit will return immediately to a non acquiring state upon the occurrence of the stop event unless the Auto Rearm feature is used The Post Stop state may be detected by querying the Stopped and the Acquisition Complete bits of the Event Status Register ESR ChartScan is in the Post Stop state if and only if the Stopped Bit of the ESR is set and the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR is not set The unit will exit the Post Stop state when the specified number of post stop scans have been collected When this occurs the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR will be set and the unit will return to a non acquiring state unless the Auto Rearm feature is used 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Trigger and Stop Events The programmed system events are the driving force behind any acquisition The trigger point also referred to trigger event signals the end of the pre trigger and the beginning of the post trigger the stop event signals the end of the post trigger and the beginning of the post stop In addition to the pre trigger normal scan interval a secondary post trigger acquisition scan interval can be assigned This would allow scans during the post trigger and post stop states to be collected faster or slower than those in the pre trigger One application for this secondary scan interval is when events after the trigger require faster sampling t
89. this data and displays it on the screen Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds Establish communication with the DRIVER488 OPEN DEV IEEEOUT FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OCTL 1 BREAK PRINT 1 RESET OPEN DEV IEEEIN FOR INPUT AS 2 PRINT 1 TIMEOUT 5 PRINT 1 ERROR ON PRINT 1 FILL ERROR PRINT 1 TERM IN LF EOI Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default PRINT 1 CLEAR 07 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 S1X Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 3 WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND Setup the ChartScan for line cycle integration mode PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 M 0X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 W 32X Setup ChartScan for 16 channels TC type J and 16 Volts channels PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 14X Program the ChartScan for binary format PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 FO 1X Start an acquisition with 1 pretrigger scan to enable the ChartScan to start scanning PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 Y1 0 0X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 T1 1 0 0X Pause for key press D 12 958296 ChartScan User s Manual PRINT The ChartScan is collecting High Low Last for all 32 channels PRINT Hit a key to start or stop reading HLL data WHILE I
90. trigger blocks within the buffer Each trigger block defines one acquisition that has taken place The trigger blocks may be variable in length The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which the current acquisition buffer configuration may be queried The Buffer Status String U6 command returns the following fields Blocks Available This field represents the total number of blocks currently contained within the buffer The total represents the total number of blocks that have been triggered A block need not be complete to be included in this total it only needs to be triggered This field also represents the number of trigger blocks that the read block is behind the current write block If there are no blocks available then Blocks Available will be 0000000 e Scans Available This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6 command was issued It should be noted that pre trigger data is not available for use until the defined trigger event has taken place This total represents the total number of scans available across all blocks in the acquisition buffer If there are no scans available in the buffer then Scans Available will be 0000000 e Current Read Pointer This field represents the current position within the current read block This pointer is relative to the trigger point which is always oriented at location 0 In other words if currently pre trigger scans are being read the Current
91. trigger state and one that is used in all other states This example sets up both scan intervals to 0 0 seconds which is interpreted a go as fast as possible NT 1 OUTPUT 07 100 00 00 0 00 00 00 0X PR PR The T command is used to set the trigger or start event to the character sent by the controller The stop event is set to Counted The auto rearm flag is set to 0 off so that the ChartScan will not re arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete The synchronization flag is also off so the ChartScan will not re synchronize itself to the trigger point when the start event begins When the ChartScan encounters the X command it will be armed and start the collection of the pre trigger data PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 T1 8 0 0X After the character is sent the IEEE 488 Serial Poll command is used to query the ChartScan as to the status of the acquisition A SPOLL value of 2 signifies that the ChartScan has encountered the Start event PRINT The ChartScan is currently collecting pre trigger data PRINT The ChartScan has not been triggered PRINT Hit a key to start a trigger event WHILE I NKEY WEND PRINT 1 out put07 X WHILE S AND 2 lt gt 2 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT A Start Trigger has been detected PRINT Waiting for acquisition complete including Post and Post Stop Scans 958296 Ch
92. used when the present configuration is no longer acceptable and you wish to reconfigure channels from scratch EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 CX Clear all channels configuration PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 1X Configure channel 1 of T C type J F Restore Factory Settings The Restore Factory Defaults F command may be used to restore the unit to the same configuration it had when it left the factory Issuing this command will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration into the working configuration The factory default configuration is defined in the Configuring Power Up State section of Appendix C This command may not be issued while an acquisition is configured since it will cause certain settings upon which the acquisition depends to change Issuing this command while an acquisition is configured will cause a Conflict Error to occur Note Issuing the F command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the settings INPUT A Screen shows Q1 7 7 7 0 T0 3 0 0 Y000100 001000 000000 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FX Restore factory default configuration PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the settings INPUT A Screen shows Q1 0 0 0 0 T0 0 0 0 Y000
93. was a valid configuration file for the currently running server e You must ensure that the server is running before making a call that would be directed to it You can t call the server if it is not running or has not been selected in the Options dialog box The Options dialog box is discussed on page vxl 4 Function vxlArmServer As Boolean This function Arms the acquisition If the server is not currently loaded it will be loaded and Armed The function returns True if successful otherwise False A False value will be returned if the server is already Armed when the call is made Function vxlDisArmServer As Boolean This function disarms the server and aborts the acquisition The function returns True if successful otherwise False A False value will be returned if the server is already disarmed when the call is made Sub vx1lConfig This method starts the server A server must have been previously selected in the Options dialog box before this call is made The Options dialog box is discussed on page vxl 4 Sub vxlLoadConfigFile Optional ByRef sCfgFullPathName As String This method instructs the server to load the specified configuration file The file name can not contain a drive or path specification If the file name is omitted from the call the Load Configuration dialog box is displayed allowing you choose a configuration file The Load Configuration dialog box is discussed on page vxl 4 Sub vxlUseDataDestination Optional B
94. 0 0X After the X command has been received the ChartScan arms itself and in this case waits for the start event of channel rising above 20 C The IEEE 488 Serial Poll command is used to query the ChartScan as to the status of the acquisition An SPOLL value of 2 signifies that channel has reached 20 C PRINT The ChartScan has not been triggered PRINT Waiting for Channel 1 to reach the trigger level WHILE S AND 2 lt gt 2 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT A Start Trigger event has been detected PRINT Waiting for a stop Trigger event Using the event status register command VOX we now wait until the acquisition complete event which includes the stop event WHILE U AND 1 lt gt 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U0X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 U WE ND PRINT The Acquisition is now complete During or after the acquisition has been completed the internal buffer can be queried for the amount of data available for transfer The U6 command will return the trigger block number the current scan number the current read pointer the trigger time date stamp the scan number where the stop event occurred the stop time date stamp the scan number of the end of the trigger block and the block complete flag This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available to transfer to the controller QuickBASIC s MI D func
95. 0 m 6 040555 e 5 740777 e 0 050575 0 040576 v 0 040444 Digital Meters Shown with 6 Meters Selected for Viewing z 0 050575 P 0 040576 y 0 040444 P Note Although the Digital Meters instrument is capable of displaying 6 decimal places there is not 6 place accuracy in the readings Due to transducer and transient noises the accuracy of voltage readings is 0 02 Temperature accuracy varies depending on thermocouple type with type J having 0 5 C for a range of 100 C to 760 C For your application please refer to specifications of the signal conditioning card s used as well as the thermocouple type and the data acquisition instrument used TempScan MultiScan or ChartScan Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu not shown A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop up menu see Bar Graph Meters figure item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu Note that each of the above channels shows a trend indicator on the left side of the meter The items in this window are as follows A Start C N A E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu Toolbar items A through G are discussed in more detail in the following section Meter Toolbars Item H is discussed in the subsequ
96. 00 S power switch is in the 0 OFF position 2 Plug power cord CA 1 into ChartScan 1400 S power connector located on the rear panel Plug the other end of the cord into an appropriate receptacle 3 Turn ChartScan 1400 S power switch to the 1 ON position The Power LED should light up At initial power up ChartScan 1400 performs automatic self tests to ensure that it is fully functional The rear panel LEDs indicate errors if they occur Possible error conditions and their corresponding indicator light patterns are shown in the following table Any pattern not shown is an internal error that is not field serviceable in this case contact the factory When only the POWER and ERROR LEDs are on a configuration error exists as a result of the setup information in NV RAM Error Condition ALARM TRIGGER SCAN ERROR POWER General Hardware Failure ON ROM Invalid forU22 COMM2_ ROM Checksum Error for U21 Comm 1 ROM Checksum Error for o Non Volatie RAMError ON ConfigurationError CE Cd If you observe a configuration error perform an error status query see E in aan A If you observe any other type of error condition make note of the error and contact your service representative If no problems are found ChartScan 1400 will begin its power up initialization This self test is performed each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power on was caused by the power switch or the Pow
97. 000 000000 000000 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 13 K Change Calibration Keyword Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Kkey Change the calibration keyword where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The Change Calibration Keyword K command allows the changing of the Calibration Keyword which is a user defined password The password is a safety feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering calibration mode and potentially altering calibration constants The new keyword must be a 5 digit decimal number Once the keyword is set it will thereafter be used by the Enter Calibration Mode K command to determine entry into Calibration Mode Note This command is only valid when calibration protection is disabled via the rear panel calibration protection disable enable DIP switch Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed instructions on calibration EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Keyword 12345 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U2X Check for Keyword Error PRINT 1 ENTERO7 I NPUT 2 C Get the Calibration Status Register IF C AND 16 THEN PRINT ERROR I NVALI D KEYWORD SLEEP 5 If so wait until keyword check jumper is disabled PRINT 1
98. 000 0000895 000 00800870 000 0090865 Notice that even though the format was degrees C since the channels have been configured to be VOLTS channels the response is in VOLTS 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Example 6 Example 6 shows how to retrieve the Last readings for a subset of the configured channels PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F0 0 Q1 1 0 0 0X Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure four channel no setpoints Configure and start the acquisition Just get the Last reading for channels 2 and 3 Get Last reading for channel 2 Screen shows PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R 2 3X PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT A PRINT A 0250 60 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last reading for channel 3 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0049 50 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 Data Format F Readings from ChartScan are output in the format configured by the user The Data Format F command determines the engineering unit and whether an ASCII format binary format or a raw data count is to be used Options for the engineering units and data formats are shown in the following table Data Format F Engineering Unit Data Format Code Celsius default C Engineering Units default Fahrenheit Binary Low Byte High Byte 1 Kelvin Counts ASCII 3 Volts E ee Note If a data format of 1 or 2 binary or 3 counts is specified as the data format the Engi
99. 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL GTL SDC PPD 08 08 09 09 0A 10 0B 11 0C 12 0D 13 0E 14 0F 15 BS HT LF VT FF CR 0 S GET TCT Universal Command Group UCG po Universal Command Group UCG OS O 10 16 11 17 12 18 13 19 14 20 15 24 1416 22 17 23 DLE DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB LLO DCL PPU 7 8 oO pa 1 148 24 19 25 1A 26 1B 27 1c 28 1D 29 1E 30 1F 31 CAN E M SUB ESC FS GS RS US SPE SPD Listen Address Group LAG 21 33 22 34 23 35 24 36 25 7 26 38 n le 2B 43 11 33 51 3 19 3B 59 i 27 O O 50 u l nt lt N O 20 32 6 SP 00 04 28 40 2C 44 08 12 30 48 34 52 0 4 16 20 38 56 3C 60 8 lt 28 58 24 ChartScan Users Manual 889802 F 1 Decimal Values 64 to 127 TAG amp SCG Box Items Hexadecimal Value 41 65 Decimal Value A Bus Message 01 in center ASCII Character Talk Address Group T AG 40 64 41 65 42 66 43 67 44 68 45 69 46 70 47 71 eee ee re 00 0 02 03 04 07 48 72 4 4A 74 4B 75 4C 76 4D 7 4E 4F 19 H j K L 0 08 09 10 11 12 15 50 80 52 82 53 83 54 84 5 57 87 P Q R S T W 16 17 18 19 20 23 58 88 5A 90 5B 91 5C 92 3 5F 95 X Z i 24 2 26 27 28 UNT Secondary Command Group SCG 1 66 02 67 103 At ke Le 0 07 6 09 6F 111 i Le 1 09 15 T 17 77 119
100. 07 Al 1X Assign channel 1 to alarm 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 A2 2X Assign channel 2 to alarm 2 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 A3 3X Assign channel 3 to alarm 3 The example now processes a loop waiting for a key press to exit If an SRQ is detected by the IEEE 488 driver program control will be automatically vectored to the Al ar mHand er subroutine then returned to the wait loop again PRINT The program is continuously detecting Alarms PRINT Hit a key to Quit WHILE I NKEY WEND END In the alarm service routine the unit is first SPOLL d to clear the SRQ signal Using the string returned by the 0 query which gets the status of the digital output lines the channel number that is in the alarm state can be identified The 0 query command returns the following string representing all 4 ports digital output status OXXX XXX XXX XXX AlarmHandler LOCATE 5 1 PRINT An Alarm condition has been detected PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 0 X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 A PRINT A A VAL MID A 2 3 IF A 1 THEN PRINT Alarm on CH1 only IF A 2 THEN PRINT Alarm on CH2 only IF A 3 THEN PRINT Alarm on CH1 amp 2 RETURN ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 9 Collecting Data in Binary Format using BIN ACQ BAS The following program BI N ACQ BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan then colle
101. 096 Calibration 6 21 Note 6 22 Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Software ChartView ViewXL ChartScan User s Manual 957896 ChartScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference ChartView ChartView Plus ChartViewNET ChartViewNET Plus amp ViewXL Overview CV 2 Digital Meters CV 34 Groups Charts amp Channels CV 2 Meter Toolbars CV 35 Three Ways of Using ChartView CV 2 Meter Pull Down Menus CV 35 What ChartView and ChartView Plus Meters Configuration Menu CV 36 Provide CV 4 Setup Window CV 37 Main Window CV 4 Channel amp Alarm Setup Dialog Box CV 37 Channel Configuration Columns CV 39 ae aed aa ac al Alarm Configuration Columns CV 40 Chart Pop up Menu CV 8 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box CV 41 Burst Mode Operational Issues CV 43 Main Window Toolbar CV 11 Measuring AC Voltage or AC RMS Voltage CV 44 Group Select CV 11 Data Destination Dialog Box CV 46 Start Pause and Stop Charts CV 11 Data Destination CV 46 Scroll Faster amp Scroll Slower CV 11 Auto Re Arm CV 46 Display Configuration CV 12 Why use Auto Re Arm CV 47 Channel Configuration CV 18 Disabling Auto Re Arm CV 47 View File Data CV 18 Chart Setup Wizard CV 48 Arm Acquisition CV 19 Introduction CV 48 Disarm CV 19
102. 1 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there are 20216 total scans in the buffer Furthermore it shows that the current read pointer is at scan 100 in the Ist trigger block To retrieve that scan perform the following PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the oldest scan PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows 4 channels are configured PRINT A 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000006 0020215 00000099 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 01 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 Notice that after reading the scan there are now 20 215 scans in the buffer and the current read pointer is now at scan 99 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 25 B 26 The R2 command will read the oldest available trigger block in the Acquisition Buffer For instance continuing with the previous example PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000006 0020215 00000099 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 01 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisitio
103. 128 The above setup will assign 1 channels starting from channel Create Charts CH1 Chart Setup Wizard Window Note ChartView Plus has Chart Setup Wizard options including Moderate and Advanced Automatic Chart Creation as well as the ability to create multiple groups ChartView Plus features can be unlocked by use of an authorized registration ID number as an unlock code Note Use C3523DFA6COA as the authorization code to enable all features The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the number of groups available for viewing the number of charts shown for each selected group and the number of overlapping channels in each chart not to exceed 4 As stated in the previous note only ChartView Plus allows the use of multiple groups and overlapping channels You can choose to manually create a configuration or have one created automatically In addition you can use Chart Setup Wizard to make a rough display configuration and then manually fine tune it The automatic setup method offers three choices Simple Moderate and Advanced The Manual Chart Creation option provides you with the same capabilities as the Advanced Automatic Setup selection but allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart as well as vary the number of charts per group ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 13 Chart Setup Wizard Automati
104. 8 as well as R R U4 U5 and U13 in Counts Note that Engineering Units parameter is ignored All commands and data sent to ChartScan are in ASCII although the engineering unit may vary Note Only data supplied by ChartScan such as time date stamps for High Low Last registers can be in binary format Both the IEEE 488 and RS 232 interfaces support data retrieval in ASCII and for high speed applications in binary format End of Reading and End of Scan terminators are not used with binary data transfers For the IEEE 488 interface EOI is asserted on the last byte Engineering Units Data Format If the engineering units data format is selected ChartScan supplies data in a format appropriate for the configured channel type The selected unit affects the number of decimal places used by either the ASCII or binary format This section describes engineering units in relation to thermocouples volts time date stamps and scan intervals Thermocouples ChartScan uses a default system unit of degrees Centigrade Therefore the resolution of returned data independent of configured temperature units is 0 1 C The binary format also returns data in degrees Centigrade The default binary format returns two bytes of 2 s complement binary data with user selecting low high byte or high low byte If the ASCII data format is selected the controller can select temperature units This requires the conversion of degrees Centigrade to configured tem
105. 88 interface card 1 Selects RS 232 422 TH 0 0 No Handshake 0 1 Software Handshake Only XON XOFF 1 0 Hardware Handshake Only RTS CTS 1 1 Both Hardware and Software Handshake 4 5 0 0 No Parity 0 1 Odd Parity 1 0 Even Parity 1 1 N A 0 0 0 300 Baud 0 0 1 600 Baud 0 1 0 1200 Baud 0 1 1 2400 Baud 1 0 0 4800 Baud 1 0 1 9600 Baud 1 1 0 19200 Baud 1 1 1 N A RS 232 or RS 422 0 Selects RS 232 serial CALIBRATION 1 Selects RS 422 serial MODE switch 1 must be in the 0 position 0 Calibration Mode Disabled 1 Calibration Mode Enabled normal position is 0 1 ChartView software will not run when Handshake is set for Software Handshake Only 0 1 It is recommended that you do not exceed 9600 Baud 3 At 9600 and 19200 Baud Rates Hardware Handshake should be set to Hardware Handshake Only 1 0 3 8 Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Serial Port Pin Connectors An optional CA 47 cable or equivalent connects ChartScan to the computer The ChartScan side of the cable has a male DB9 connector for use with the RS 232 422 serial port The cable s computer side has 2 connectors one for DB9 and the other for DB25 Other crossover type cables can be used if wired as shown in the figure The following table lists the RS 232 and RS 422 pin connections for a DB9 Pin RS 232 Signal Pin Description spo ee eed ea
106. After the C command is issued the ChartScan is now completely armed for alarming In our example levels above 18 or below 1 will cause a system alarm If the intent of the application was to use alarm levels to trigger an acquisition only the following line would be required to arm the alarms to satisfy the trigger and or stop events PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3 1 18 0X In addition to causing an internal system alarm state the alarm conditions can also be attached to any one of the 16 digital output lines The A command is used to assign the input channels to the digital alarm bit The following line attaches channels 1 and 2 to digital output line number 1 in an OR d fashion PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 Al1 2 1X Assign channels 1 amp 2 to alarm 1 S 0 WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND Using the string returned by the 0 query which gets the status of the digital output lines the alarm state can be detected since bit 1 of the digital output was mapped into alarm channel 1 and 2 This example shows alarm detection handling when 2 or more channels have to be muxed into one single digital output bit The U11X command shows each individual channel alarm status ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 7 WHILE I NKEY PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 0 X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 0 IF MID 0 2 3 001 THEN PRINT Channel 1 OR 2 is in Alarm condition PRIN
107. Alarm Setup Alt P 3 gt 16 Enable the desired channels You can enable channels by double clicking on the applicable channels On column obtaining On indicating enabled or Off indicating disabled You can also use a pull down list which appears for enable disable Refer to the ChartView section of this manual if addition information is needed Note Channels set up for your display will be automatically enabled You can enable additional channels for data acquisition These additional channels will not appear on ChartView s Main Window but data from them will still be acquired 3 gt 17 Click on button 3 Turn On Off Channel Readings See previous figure This activates the display scanned data in the reading column Since we are in the Simulated Instrument mode the Reading column of the Analog Input SpreadSheet will now display simulated data Selecting the Enable SpreadSheet Reading button again will freeze the Reading column s display ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 15 4 Configure the Acquisition 3 gt 18 Click on the Acquisition Setup tab see previous figure An Acquisition Configuration dialog box appears The box can be in either of two modes 1 Normal or 2 High speed single channel Note that you can also access the Acquisition Configuration dialog box from the Setup pull down menu or the Channel Configuration button item 8 page 1 9
108. Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard CV 49 Print Charts CV 19 Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup CV 50 Main Window Pull Down Menus CV 20 Bar Graph Analog and Digital Meters CV 31 ViewXL VXI T Bar Graph Meters CV 32 Analog Meters CV 33 Until the release of Data Acquisition CD 501395D 01 version 7 the NET and Plus features were purchased packages We now offer these additional features free However to enable full ChartView functionality you need to enter the following code C3523DFA6COA Enter the above code in the Authorization Dialog Box see page CV 20 Reference Note This document serves as a reference for ChartView ChartView Plus ChartViewNET ChartViewNET Plus Chart Setup Wizard and ViewXL A ChartScan TempScan or MultiScan unit can operate on the ethernet providing it is configured for RS 232 serial communications and properly connected to A Net232 ethernet RS 232 converter If you will be connecting your unit to a Net232 refer to the Net232 User s Guide p n 1037 0901 ChartViewNET refers to a ChartView program that has the network feature of the program activated for ethernet operation much like ChartView Plus refers to a ChartView program that has the enhanced chart feature of the program activated The NET and Plus features are each activated by separate registration ID codes thus it is possible to have ChartViewNET Plus when both codes are used For
109. B 29 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 1 Memory Allocation Each ChartScan comes equipped with 256 KB memory There are three options for additional memory 1 Mbyte 4 Mbytes and 8 Mbytes The memory modules are located in SIMM sockets JP201 and or JP202 on the microprocessor board Refer to Chapter 3 if you intend to add or remove memory modules Memory Module JP201 Reserved for Second Memory Module Microprocessor Board Not all components shown Regardless of the memory option used ChartScan will automatically allocate its memory for optimal use according to its current configuration ChartScan memory is broken into two main regions as shown in the following figure e High Low Last Data Registers only configured channels e Acquisition Data Buffer When channels are configured ChartScan will calculate how much memory will be needed for the High Low Last Registers The memory allocated to High Low Last is e Number of channels x 20 The remaining memory is then allocated to the Acquisition Buffer For example if the memory option used is the standard 256K 262144 bytes and the number of configured channels is 128 x 20 then the amount allocated to the acquisition buffer would be 262144 Total Memory Option Size 256K 19840 High Low Last Data Size 128 x 20 242304 Acquisition Dat
110. Busadcress 0 K fca f Busadcress i n a m Caviar Busadcress 3 pre ae n caan Buscadcress r4 pve ar 0 camo Busaddress15 Talk Address Group TAG so so P cap Buades e a o fca Busadcress 7 e2 s2 R Capt Busaddresst8 es ss Capitals Busadaresst9 ea sa T capar Busaddress20 e ss U Capt Bus accross a se se v capmav Busadaress22 er s w Captaw Busaddress23 es se x capax Busaddress24 so so Y capay Busadaress25 o sa 2 Capitaiz Bus address 26 Pet s i Opening Bracket Bus address27 o2 sc Backward Stash Busaddress28 os so 1 Closing Bracket Bus address 29 oa e fere O f Bus across 30 pes se Underscores Unen 889802 ChartScan User s Manual Decimal Values 96 to 127 SCG Dec Hex Character Name Bus Message o ome commo or et a Lowercase Commandon ez 6 towercaseB Commando2 o9 es e Lowercase Commandos o0 es towercaseD Commandos prot es e towercase Commandos o2 es f Lowercase Commando mos er g towercase Commanor pros ee n Lowercase Commandos aos eo 1 f rowercasei Commandoo os ea j Lowercase J Command 70 or e towercaseK Commana pros ec i Lowercaset Command 2 o9 eD m towercasem Commana prio ee towercaseN Commana peer o towercaseO Commands Secondary Command Group SCG
111. ChartScan 1400 is default configured for serial port connection to a PC For IEEE 488 E connection please refer to the JEEE 488 Configuration section of Chapter 3 Reference Note If you want to connect your ChartScan 1400 to the host PC via USB port refer to the associated Quick Start document QS RS 232 to USB Interface pdf 446 0941 The pdf is included on your Data Acquisition CD rev 8 1 2 and higher A RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p n CA 232 USB KIT available from Measurement Computing is required for USB connection Use a CA 47 cable or equivalent to connect the ChartScan 1400 to your computer Note that the RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit includes a CA 47 cable The ChartScan end of the CA 47 cable has a DB 9F connector while the computer end has 2 connectors DB9F and DB25F Other crossover type cables can be used if wired as shown in the following figure Computer ChartScan Computer ChartScan DB25 DB9 DB9 DB9 DB25 age Ge DBO a re nee 2345 7 TAD 22 gt 2 RXD aa RXD 2 2 RXD nea O 3 TXD TXD 3 3 TXD o0o000000000 o CTS 5 yd GND A i j GND 5 o 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS He RTS 7 7 RTS RTS 4 8 CTS CTS 8 8 CTS Interface Wiring Diagram ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 5 V Apply Power to the ChartScan 1400 The ChartScan 1400 can be powered from a standard AC outlet Use the following steps to connect power to your unit 1 Make sure ChartScan 14
112. ChartScan expansion chassis The CSN Relay Card uses 16 dual coil latch relays and associated circuitry to minimize load on ChartScan s internal power supply Note that the relays are contained in two groups with 8 relays per group Current is briefly drawn following a change in digital logic output level In event of a power failure it is possible for a relay to remain in a set state until power is restored CAUTION Do not exceed specified current limits on relay group commons Exceeding specified limits can damage the printed circuit board There is a common feed to all 8 relays in each of the two groups It is important to stay within the group total current limitation regardless of the current ratings of the relay contacts or the plug in terminal blocks otherwise the circuit board may be damaged Note that ratings of relay contacts exceed the current carrying capacity of the printed circuit board When the Alarm Relay Card option is used it is not possible to install more than 7 signal conditioning cards 3 in the main unit since the relay card occupies one card slot This means you can have no more than 112 channels instead of 128 when using this option Note The relay output card option if used must be inserted into slot 1 the bottom slot of the main ChartScan unit The channel assignments are then automatically bumped as shown in the following table Device Channel Assignments when relay option is used eo 1 Slo
113. D5 D7 ATN IFC NRFD EOI D6 Ds a 6 5 4 18 17 16 IEEE 488 Pinout Eight lines D1 through D8 used to transfer data and commands between devices on the bus Handshake Lines Used to handshake the transfer of information across the data lines DAV DAV Data Valid NDAC NDAC Not Data Accepted NRFD NRFD Not Ready for Data Bus Management Five bus management lines are used to control bus activities Lines ATN ATN Attention IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable SRQ Service Request EOI End or Identity Ground Lines Eight ground lines used as follows one for shield one for general signal ground and six logic ground lines one for each of the following DAV NDAC NRFD ATN IFC and SRQ IEEE 488 Interface Card Specifications Compliance Note The IEEE 488 interface card is compliant with IEEE 488 2 specifications Installation Category CE Category 1 Implementation SH1 AH1 T6 TE4 L4 LE4 SR1 PPO RLO DC1 DT1 CO El Programmable Parameters Alarm set points thermocouple type temperature units trigger level pre trigger and post trigger scan interval trigger mode SRQ mask scan count pre trigger count digital input digital output real time settings data output format and terminators Data Transfer Speed Up to 1Mbyte s Connector Standard IEEE 488 connector with metric studs ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 11 IEEE 488 Configuration interface Card Slot DIP Switch Config
114. Data Acquisition Server If a server program such as ChartView or DaqView is running you can stop it by selecting the application from the Select pull down list and pressing the lt Unload Server gt button After selecting a new server program from the list press the OK button to enable the selection Before the ViewXL Add In can control a data acquisition application server you must select the desired application from the list The selected server name will be saved when Excel is closed and restored the next time Excel is started This is the default server that will be started when the Configure Toolbar button is pressed or Menu item is selected Automatically start server when Excel opens When checked this informs the Add In that the default data acquisition application server should be automatically started when Excel is started The Configure button does not have to be pressed to start the server 989092 Load Server Configuration File two meters chg One Meter chg ChartScan chg MultiScan cfg temp ctg Multiscan 2 chg Mulkiscan 3 cFg Load Server Configuration File Dialog Box ViewXL Options Chart iew 32 Running Data Acquisition Server Select M Automatically start server when Excel opens I Enable Server file conversion M Display data after acquired I Delete server data files after reading into Excel M Clear spreadsheet cells when inserting data M Span worksheets bey
115. Engineering Units default 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 2 Binary High Byte Low Byte and 3 Counts ASCII IF Query the data format ee Select burst mode sampling frequency where f r e q is a real Frequency number and where 38 5 lt freq lt 20000 0 Hertz default Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chan is the channel number such that l lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis ischan 0 pe is the channel type Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card where han is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt maxX where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis ischan 0 Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where nor m and acq are the normal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form hh mm ss t where hh is hours mm is minutes S S is seconds and t is tenths of a second Query scan interval selection Specify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled state may have either of the following values The default of 0 which disables digital input stamping or 1 to enable digital stamping Calibrate Cold Junction Calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation Offset of the thermocouple signals where c han is the channel number such that1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 t ype is the thermocouple channel type t emp is the reference tempera
116. FILESSCHARTVIEWSAPPLICATIONS E bin IY Time Date Stamp T Alarm Stamp chartvOO00 iot T Digital Input Stamp chartvO001 ict i ChartvO002 iat ChartyvOO03 ict File Conversion Preferences a chartyClOd iot The list at right displays the set of 2 chartvD0 S iot files that will be created when the E diadem Acquisition has run to completion chart 0000 me Destination Dialog Box The Data Destination panel s Auto Re Arm feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to take place automatically with each acquisition using the same configuration settings When Auto Re Arm is selected as soon as a trigger block is terminated the system immediately re arms itself and waits for the trigger condition to repeat itself after which another acquisition begins There are three options regarding the use of Auto Re Arm e capture one trigger block default Auto Re Arm disabled e capture multiple trigger blocks in one file e capture multiple trigger blocks in indexed files To one file To one file To separate pi Z E pE files Ss K T KI B One trigger block Trigger blocks Trigger blocks Capture one trigger block Capture multiple trigger blocks Capture multiple trigger blocks Default in one file in separate indexed files CV 46 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Why use Auto Re Arm You can use Auto Re Arm as a convenient way to monitor and analyze specific types of trigger events For e
117. Gi Gi E JE imi imi amp i m aj ERDHA AA e AAD a ayia oga aa a aoa EA ill fi ogil aya al aloga l ala atodi eal ail apga aya O OO ii O ale o C EDC id as ie 5 OP Oxf ott 0 0 ilil o 0 OP Oop ott 0 ol 0 Wal o 0 0 Uje D Z g or a oP C a g E oA F 0L rf o i TE ER EE 4 o A U 0 aie HAR V BNC TR INPUT CARD 020 O4 eS ORLE en E F pO O oO yright 1997 F 6 k U D G U S OC oon CSN14 LV T CSN14 LV B a A 1 vO O O O GG BO BO OO E O E O a a BE mi O mi vE A amp mi BE mi mi mi rE Gi AP PCBS aa el edia HM GOR DECORA aa fipo fi Coi a a D O0c ra U cm xi qP T ik D990 0g0 Sry Wo gga SaM Os J 2 CIITA CSN14 LV S Three Types of Low Voltage Signal Conditioning Cards for use with ChartScan 1400 Number of Inputs 16 differential programmable by channel for input range Input Types 10V 5V 1V and 100mV Input Connectors Removable screw terminal blocks BNC or Safety Jacks Voltage Range Accuracy and Resolution 100 mV 0 02 3 05 uV bit 1V 0 02 30 5 uV bit 5V 0 02 153 uV bit 10V 0 02 306 uV bit Digital Filtering Used for AC line cycle noise rejection Selectable off 1 256 samples in a binary count Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 x rated accuracy C Input Impedance 1MQ typical Input Bias Current 20 nA maximum Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Common Mode Voltage 200 VDC or 200 VAC peak Maximu
118. MS accurately In general for AC measurements the frequency should equal 2n 60 Hz where n is a positive integer EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F 15000 0X Select 15 KHz sampling frequency PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F 100 5X Select 100 5 Hz sampling frequency ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 31 G Calibrate Channel Gain Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Gchan Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chan is type the channel number such that1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis is chan t ype is the channel type DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Channel Gain G command is used to calibrate the correction gain constants for a given slide in card The channel gain value is necessary in order for the internal firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels This command will take the parameters chan and type and will calculate the gain based on the present channel input voltage Note To achieve correct results this command must be issued twice First with a negative input voltage and then with a positive input voltage Each time the command has been issued the precision voltage source must remain at its value until the trigger LED stops flashing For further details on ch
119. Menu The toolbar contain six buttons separated into two groups From left to right these are Buttons Used to Control the Data Display FEE Display Header Info Buttons Used to Control the Data Acquisition Server oe og a ae _ a i ELA diia a ae Arm Disarm o Use Data Destination Cell 1 ViewXL Toolbar Set Data Configuration File Destination Cell The first three buttons are used to control the data acquisition application also referred to as server The remaining three are used to control the way data is displayed in the worksheets The toolbar can be left floating over the worksheet as shown in the above figure or docked along with the other Excel toolbars To dock the toolbar simply drag it to the toolbar area of the Excel main window A description of each button function follows Configure This button is used to launch the data acquisition application such as ChartView or DaqView If a data acquisition application server has not been selected a message will be displayed to that effect To choose a data acquisition server select the ViewXL Options menu item then select an application from the list of available servers a Arm Disarm a This push push button is used to arm or disarm the acquisition If the acquisition application has been set for manual trigger pushing this button will initiate the trigger When pushed the Arm button remains depressed until the acquisi
120. NKEY WEND CONST CHANNELS 32 BYTES CHANNELS 20 DIM READS AS STRING BYTES S VARSEG READS 0 VARPTR READS WHILE I NKEY PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U4X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 CHANNELS 20 BUFFER S 0 DMA PRINT High Low and Last readings of all 32 channels Decode received data and print on screen in ASCII FOR i 1 TO BYTES STEP 20 HI GH STRS CVI MID READS i 2 HOURhH STR ASC MID READS i 2 1 MI Nh STR ASC MID READS i 3 1 SECh STR ASC MID READS i 4 1 TENTHhH STR ASC MID READS i 5 1 MONh STR ASC MID READS i 6 1 DAYh STR ASC MID READS i 7 1 YEARh STR ASC MID READS i 8 1 LOWS STRS CVI MID READS i 9 2 HOURI STR ASC MID READS i 11 1 MINI STR ASC MID READS i 12 1 SECI STR ASC MID READS i 13 1 TENTHI STR ASC MID READS i 14 1 MONI STR ASC MID READS i 15 1 DAYI STR ASC MID READS i 16 1 1 YEARI STR ASC MID READS i 17 LAST STR CVI MID READS i 18 2 Convert counts to Degree C or Voltage readings IF i lt 640 THEN PRINT STR VAL HIGH 10 HOURh MINh SECh TENTHh MONh DAYh YEARh PRINT STR VAL LOWS 10 HOURI MINI SECI TENTHI MONI DAYI YEARI PRINT STR VAL LAST 10 ELSE PRINT MID STR VAL HIGH 4 5 32767 44 1 8 HOUR
121. NT 1 ENTERO7 Screen shows 101 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 LINE INPUT 2 I PRINT I A 34 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Digital Input Stamping System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Specifies digital input stamping as enabled or disabled state may have either of the following values the default of 0 which disables digital input stamping or 1 to enable digital stamping DESCRIPTION The Digital Input Stamping I command when enabled will append the digital input state to the end of each scan as it occurs in real time The digital input state consists of 8 bits I 8 through I1 Each bit has an assigned binary value of 1 or 0 where 1 indicates digital input on and 0 indicates digital input off In binary mode 2 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 2 00h I8 I1 In ASCII mode 8 bytes will be appended as follows DXXXD000 Where D User Terminator and XXX the decimal equivalent of 18 I1 Note If Alarm Stamping A is also enabled the Digital Input Stamp I will be appended after the Alarm Stamp EXAMPLES Without Digital Input Stamping default PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 1 0X Disable digital input stamp Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 1 111 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 With Digital Input Stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 I 1X Enable d
122. OUTPUTO7 K67890X Enter new Keyword 67890 ENDI F PRINT 1 EX End Calibration Mode 958296 ChartScan User s Manual P Adjust Calibration Card Pots Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Pchan Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment Valid options for chan are 01 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card 02 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card and 03 Select 0 Volts GND DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The Adjust Calibration Card Pots P command is used to enable the 4 4 Volt or 4 4 Volt source on the special calibration card to allow for their adjustment Refer to Chapter 6 for specific details A second diagnostic use for this command is to program the channel sequencer to SIT on a specified channel without changing address lines accessing temperature sensors or making breaking relay contacts EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12 PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 P02X Enable 4 4 Volt Source Adjust 4 4 Volt Source PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 P01X Enable 4 4 Volt Source Adjust 4 4 Volt Source PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 EX End calibration mode 345X Enter calibration mode ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 15 R Power On Reset EXECUTION SYNTAX Power On Reset Equivalent to a hardware reset DESCRIPTION The Power On Reset R command
123. Oy OO a a 3 12 Error Source Register E c E g os o O O Q EQ Ow Cc O oOo oO D x gt SUW Qu LU lt 2 Qa to D 2 I O o Event Status Register U0 A AEEA B amp AND Logic Connection Event Status Enable f Register Nn N Not Empty XL Output Queue Read by Serial Poll aay IEEE 488 only ervice Pa aoe e OAE Status Byte Register Read by U1 IEEE 488 or Serial k Available Service Request Enable Register Mn M Ta Mem edah ea oe Status Reporting Registers ChartScan User s Manual 958296 Calibration Status Register U2 Command The calibration status register indicates which calibration errors if any have occurred The individual errors are described in the U2 command Any calibration error will be mapped into the Calibration Status which maps to the Calibration Error bit in the Error Source Register Error Source Register E Command The error source register indicates which errors if any have occurred The individual errors are described in the E command When an error occurs it sets the appropriate bit in the error source register This in turn sets a bit in the event status register as shown in the previous figure Event Status Register The event status register is read with the U0 command The contents of the register are cleared after the U0 command is satisfied The event status register indicates which events if any h
124. PRINT UA PRINT The ChartScan collected UA scans of data After calculating the number of scans an integer type buffer is then prepared for the data The offset and segment pointers are supplied to the IEEE 488 driver so that the data can be transferred using DMA direct memory access The R2 command instructs the ChartScan to supply the entire block of data that is presently available CHANNELS 16 DIM CBUFFER UA CHANNELS SE VARSEG BUFFER 0 OF VARPTR BUFFER 0 B amp UVA CHANNELS 2 PRINT Total number of Bytes available B PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R2X PRINT Uploading data WHILE I NKEY WEND PRINT 1 ENTER 07 B amp BUFFER SE OF DMA At the completion of the DMA transfer the integer data is now in the buffer BUFFER To convert the integer data into temperatures a simple calculation is performed BINARY DATA 10 C ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 11 Collecting Binary Formatted HLL Data using BIN HLL BAS The following program BI N HLL BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan to collect High Low Last channel readings in a binary format rather than the default ASCII format This is inherently faster than ASCII format but the data must be deciphered after it 1s collected to yield temperature values This program configures the channels uploads HLL data in High speed binary mode decodes
125. PUT 07 Q 0 0 8 8 0X The FOR loop will read 5 trigger blocks each consisting of a trigger point FOR i 1 T0 5 The first lines of code within the FOR loop ask you to trigger the unit then the last line sends an character to the unit D 14 958296 ChartScan User s Manual PRINT PRINT The ChartScan s Block i has not been triggered PRINT It is currently collecting the Pre trigger data specified PRINT Press any key to send a start trigger event WHI LE I NKEY WEND PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 X Using the U6 query the controller gets the trigger block string which among other things supplies the block complete flag indicating the state of the present trigger block The block is marked complete when the last post stop scan is recorded into the buffer PRINT Waiting for completion of Block i DO PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U UA S MID U 86 2 LOOP UNTIL UA 1 PRINT The ChartScan is done with Block i and has re armed itself Using the U string which still contains the trigger block status string the number of scans available in the buffer is calculated The R2 command is then used to retrieve the data in the ChartScan s internal buffer Query the ChartScan for the of scans available in the Buffer UAT MID U 9 7 PRINT UAT PRINT The ChartScan collected a total of
126. S PRI NT 1 CLEARO7 Reset the unit PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 E X Request error status PRINT 1 ENTERO7 NPUT 2 A PRINT A Display shows E000 no errors occurred PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K3 X Send illegal command option to the unit Note ERROR indicator light turns on PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 E X Request error status Note ERROR indicator light turns off PRI NT 1 ENTERO7 NPUT 2 A PRINT A Displays E002 Invalid Device Dependent Command Option ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 27 F Set Data Format System Deferred SYNTAX Fengr Configure the input and output formats format engr converts the raw data to the engineering units with which you prefer to work Valid options are 0 C 1 F 2 R 3 K and 4 Volts C is the default engineering unit f or mat places the readings in a format with which you prefer to work Valid options are 0 Engineering Units default 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 2 Binary High Byte Low Byte and 3 Counts ASCII F Query the data format DESCRIPTION The Set Data Format F command configures the input and output data format for data transmissions with the unit and requires two arguments The first argument engr is the engineering units the second argument format is the reading format When the unit is inputting or outputting data it first references the current reading format If format is 0 Engineering Uni
127. SER USER sep This argument specifies whether or not a separator character should be placed between each returned reading in the buffer scan data This field will be in effect during Read Buffer Data R commands The value of this field is interpreted as follows 0 Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 45 The following table summarizes terminator usage with all possible commands in ASCII mode no terminators are used in binary mode where X indicates that the terminator is asserted at the end of the response O indicates that the terminator is asserted within the response to separate channel and scan readings and a blank cell indicates that the terminator does not affect the command Command DE a jAllothes x J o o D S EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure four channels for T C Type J PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Configure engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q7 7 0 0 0X Set the resp and h11 terminators to LF EOI and the scan and block terminators to None PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q X Get the current query terminators PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Screen shows 007 07 00 00 00 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Request the last readings PRI NT 1 ENTERO7 Get reading for channel 1 NPUT
128. Setup selection the Display Configuration Setup window appears with the current chart display configuration intact With this type of access you would simply edit your existing chart display Channel and alarm configurations do not change with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled When you access the Display Configuration Setup from the Chart Setup Wizard the Display Configuration Setup window appears with no existing display This allows for a clean slate approach to creating a chart display as opposed to an editing approach Channel and alarm configurations do not change with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled Normal Edit To explain editing a configuration we make use of an example where changes are desired for Chart 1 In the following figure Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the mouse cursor The Display Configuration Setup box then changed allowing you to see specific channel types such as volts only or to Show all Types as in the example From this setup box you can add or delete charts and channels You can e hold down the Shift key and use the cursor to select several consecutive channels for addition or deletion e hold down the Ctrl key and use the cursor to select several non consecutive channels for addition or deletion o double click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels double click on a selected channel to remove it from the sele
129. T 1 OUTPUT 07 U11X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 A PRINT A IF MID A 5 1 1 THEN PRINT The ChartScan s CH 1 is now in an Alarm condition ELSE PRINT The ChartScan s CH 1 is not in an Alarm condition END IF IF MID A 11 1 1 THEN PRINT The ChartScan s CH 2 is nowin an Alarm condition ELSE PRINT The ChartScan s CH 2 is not in an Alarm condition END IF END IF WE ND Using the IEEE 488 SRQ with Alarms using ALAR2SRQ BAS D 8 The following program ALAR2SRQ BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the alarm system of the ChartScan and then use the IEEE 488 Service Request signal to asynchronously service the event Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned WHILE AND 4 O Wait for Ready PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The Personal488 IEEE 488 driver and interface card provides a means for QuickBASIC to asynchronously service the IEEE 488 SRQ interrupt through its ON PEN GOSUB command When an SRQ is detected by the Personal488 interface program control is automatically vectored to
130. T 1 OUTPUTO7 H17X Will calculate offsets for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage of 50 0 mV PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 G17 1X Calibrate negative gain for TC for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage of 50 0 mV PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 G17 1X Calibrate positive gain for TC for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply temperature of 90 0 C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 J1 2 90 0X Calibrate cold junction offset for channel 1 on card 1 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 EX End Calibration Mode A 26 958296 ChartScan User s Manual E Error Status Query EXECUTION SYNTAX Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following error codes E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO E004 Channel configuration error E008 Calibration error E016 Trigger overrun E032 Open T C or Range Error E128 Command conflict error DESCRIPTION When an error has occurred the ERROR indicator light on the front panel of the unit turns on Error Status Query E is used to determine the present error condition After execution of the Error Status Query command the unit responds with one of the following error codes E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC
131. TB Read U1 N A Status Byte SPOLL Register Chart Mask Registers Command Type Register Access Read Write Clear Event Status Clear See Enable Note Service Request Clear See Enable Note Note The mmm defines the contents of the register to be written ChartScan Users Manual 958296 C 13 Theory of Operation The following figure shows the general operation and relationship between the status reporting and mask registers Each register is part of a hierarchy of registers where operations on higher registers will affect the contents of lower registers in the chain This hierarchical approach provides the ability to have varying levels of status reporting The lowest levels give general status information while the higher levels give more details of the particular events in question At the lowest level in this chain is the Status Byte Register This register may be accessed real time by the controller via a SPOLL IEEE 488 only command This allows quick response of certain critical operational status conditions contained in the Status Byte Register STB However since this register is the lowest register in the chain every other status register in the system either directly or indirectly has access to the STB register via the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the STB register This gives these other status registers the ability although not detailed to quickly report their status to the controller The Event Status E
132. USER S MANUAL ChartScan 1400 Portable Data Recorder ChartScan 1400 483 0901 rev 5 0 Measurement Computing 10 Commerce Way Norton MA 02766 508 946 5100 ANAC AA A Fax 608 946 9500 info mecdaq com 372188B 01 www mccdaq com ChartScan User s Manual Warranty Information Contact Measurement Computing by phone fax or e mail in regard to warranty related issues Phone 508 946 5100 fax 508 946 9500 e mail info mecdaqg com Limitation of Liability Measurement Computing cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product Copyright Trademark and Licensing Notice All Measurement Computing documentation software and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved No part of this product may be copied reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical photographic electronic or other method without Measurement Computing s prior written consent IOtech product names are trademarked other product names as applicable are trademarks of their respective holders All supplied IOtech software including miscellaneous support files drivers and sample programs may only be used on one installation You may make archival backup copies CE Notice Warnings Many Measurement Computing products carry the CE marker indicating they comply with the safety and emissions standards of the European Community When applicable these products have a Declaration of Conformity statin
133. UT 2 U PRINT U PRINT Waiting for 75 Full PRINT c CSRLIN SLEEP 1 PRINT 1 ARM SRQ RETURN ChartScan User s Manual Configure for High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode using BURST BAS BURST BAS configures ChartScan for the High Speed Single Channel Burst measuring mode sets up an acquisition waits for its completion and uploads the data in ASCII as well as posts it on the screen This program also stops in the event of a buffer overrun Establish communication with the DRIVER488 OPEN DEV IEEEOUT FOR OUTPUT AS 1 OCTL 1 BREAK PRINT 1 RESET OPEN DEV IEEEIN FOR INPUT AS 2 PRINT 1 TIMEOUT 5 PRINT 1 ERROR ON PRINT 1 FILL ERROR PRINT 1 TERM IN LF EOI Program the ChartScan to power on with Factory default PRINT 1 CLEAR 07 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 S1X Reset ChartScan and make sure it is ready CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 3 S 0 WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND Setup the ChartScan for burst mode and a sampling frequency of 20kHz PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 M 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 F 20000 0X Setup ChartScan to do a burst scan on channel 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 14x SLEEP 1 Program for 8 blocks of 256 samples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 YO 8 0X Program a trigger start on and a stop on count PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 T1 8 0 OX Start the bur
134. Uploading ChartView Main Window and Control Options fj Mouse t Arrow Keypads PageUp PageDown Keypads Note The bulleted list on page CV 4 relates to this table Group Select Ctrl G or or 14 Channel Selection YA or Start Charts and 8 or F5 Multiply x2 8 or Tab to Spacebar Indicators Pause Charts A or F7 Stop Charts 8 or F6 Scroll Faster Ye or Ctrl Z Present Value of Selected N A Channel Center Value at Chart Mid 8 or I or type in Line Units Division D or T or type in Vertical increment per one grid Ba box Chart Min Scale Value Grid From Chart Pull down Limit Line menu or Chart Setup Dialog Box Divide 2 8 or Tab to Spacebar Scroll Slower ag or Ctrl X Display Configuration Bor Pointer over chart and right click Current will be selected Channel Time Stamp hr min sec Thru Pull Down Menus Configuration only View File Data YA or Windows Pull down menu Status Message Box Time Division Chart Speed Ctrl Z Faster the Horizontal increment per Ctrl X Slower grid box Status LEDs Chart Display D Arm Acquisition 46 or Ctrl T Disarm Ye or Ctrl Y Print Charts A or Ctrl P Chart Max Scale From Chart Pull down Value Grid Limit menu or Chart Setup Line Dialog Box Double click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or zoom back out Right click to bring up the chart pop up display with the current g
135. Valid card IDs for use with ChartScan are 1 Card not installed 16 TC Volts card 17 High volts card Note This command can only be issued when all channels are in an unconfigured state If any channel is configured the system will issue a command conflict error in response to the U1 4 command Also see OC And C commands U15 Queries the product information The response to this command is the current product information including revision levels U16 This command queries the measuring mode parameters defined by the Set Measuring Mode M Set Burst Mode Frequency F and Set Averaging Weight W commands The response has the following form M modeF freqw wt ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 55 A 56 U17 This command computes and returns the root mean square RMS value of the last completed burst mode acquisition U18 Queries the acquisition states and various system flags The response nnn has the following integer form 000 lt nnn lt 255 The bit mapping of the response is as follows Ea eee oe Acquisition State 00 Idle no acquisition armed or acquired 01 Armed acquisition armed and may be acquiring pre trigger data 10 Acquiring post trigger data 11 Acquiring post stop data Timestamping 00 Timestamping disabled 01 Absolute timestamping enabled 10 Relative timestamping enabled Alarm Stamping 0 Alarm stamping disabled 1 Alarm stamping enabled Power up Setting 0 P
136. Viewer that will be accessed via the lt View File Data gt button r Data File Viewer Selected Data File Viewer Identifying the Selected Data File Viewer CV 18 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Arm Acquisition pE You can use the Arm Acquisition button to activate an acquisition When you click on this button the system is armed to begin collecting data by a recognized trigger as set in the acquisition setup dialog box Three cases are as follows 1 If there is no Pre trigger defined the Trigger option under the Event Configuration portion of the Acquisition Setup dialog box will determine when the Arm process is initiated Console Trigger Cancel Console Trigger Box 2 When a Pre trigger is defined the Arm process is initiated as soon as the Arm Acquisition is selected 3 Ifa keystroke is chosen as the trigger the Console Trigger dialog box will appear when the Arm Acquisition is selected Disarm Use the Disarm button to deactivate the data acquisition process at any point during an active acquisition The following confirmation dialog box will appear when this item is selected Disarm and Clear Data Fa data buffer You will lose any data that has not been uploaded AN This operation will end the acquisition and erase all the data in the Print Charts The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView s main window Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 19
137. With relative time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T2X Enable time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R3X Request all scan data in buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 400 01 05 5 0000001R 0234 20 0019 40 0001 4040023 60 Note The R in the above code is a reading separator which has been assigned with Query Terminator Q Note Time stamping is not valid in burst mode or when the output format is binary Additionally relative time stamping is invalid when attempting to use it in conjunction with continuous gap free acquisitions with two time bases B 16 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Alarm Stamping A For further monitoring and analysis of alarm conditions the states of the 32 alarm outputs can be stamped to scan in real time Alarm stamping can be enabled with the A 1 command and disabled with the A 0 command Refer to the A command description for further details An example of the A command follows Note Alarm stamping is not valid in high speed single channel mode burst mode Note If Digital Input Stamping is also enabled it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp A Without Alarm Stamping default PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A 0X Disable alarm stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A vee 0234 20 0019 4040001 4040023 60 W
138. YNTAX M mode Specify measuring mode Valid options for mode are 0 Line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode and 1 Single channel high speed burst mode DESCRIPTION The Set Measuring Mode M command selects one of the two internal measuring modes supported by the ChartScan 1400 units Normal Mode for Line Cycle Integration and High Speed Multi Channel applications Normal mode is the system default In this mode each channel is averaged over a selected number of samples as specified with the Set Averaging Weight W command As there are 32 samples per line cycle 32 64 128 or 256 samples will automatically enable line cycle noise rejection Thermocouples and DC Volts are averaged over the specified number of samples For AC Volts the root mean square RMS is computed over the specified number of samples High speed Single Channel Mode Burst mode is used to sample a single channel at a frequency specified by the Set Frequency F command The channel is sampled in blocks of 256 readings with the number of blocks specified by the Set Counts Y command Refer to Measuring Mode section of Appendix B for more detailed information EXAMPLES PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M 0X Select Line Cycle Integration High Speed Multi Channel Mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 W 32X Select number of samples 32 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 YO 10 0 Setup to read 10 post trigger scans PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 3 1X Enabl
139. a Buffer Allocation 236 6K B 2 958296 Location 0 High Low Last Data Acquisition Data Buffer Size of The High Low Last Data Size equals the E Total Channels in Scan multiplied by 20 The Acquisition Data Buffer Size equals the Memory Option Size minus the High Low Last Data Size ChartScan Memory Allocation ChartScan User s Manual Measuring Modes Overview You can select either of two scanning modes for ChartScan 1 Normal mode or 2 High speed single channel mode Burst Mode ChartScan Measuring Modes Average weight Application Setting 16 32 64 128 or Recommended for AC noise rejection 256 1 2 4 or8 Recommended for high speed multiple channel applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue High speed not selectable High speed single channel applications for AC and DC voltage post acquisition single channel waveform analysis In the Normal mode ChartScan samples channel data at 1 92 kHz or once every 520 83 us You can select the average weight number of samples to average to provide noise filtering as discussed later in this section In the High speed single channel mode ChartScan collects data in user defined multiples of 256 samples at a sampling frequency within the range of 38 5 Hz to 20 0 kHz Aside from selecting ChartScan s scanning mode and setting the mode parameters from ChartView software the
140. a Destination dialog box Data Destination Accesses the Setup Window for assigning the Data Destination and provides a means of configuring the Auto Re Arm feature see page CV 46 From the Data Destination dialog box you can directly access the Acquisition Setup and the Channels amp Alarms dialog boxes Bar Graph Analog and Digital Meters This section pertains to channel data display screens windows or dialog boxes other than the main chart screen ChartView s main window After a brief discussion and illustration of each meter type commonalties to these three types of meters are presented These common areas include Toolbars Pull Down Menus and two special Pop Up Menus one for configuring the meters and the other for replacing a represented channel with another Note The acquisition to disk has a higher priority then the updating of Charts Meters and the Reading column Therefore data is displayed as soon as the acquisition task is satisfied As the scan rate is increased the acquisition to disk task will take up more processor CPU time and the displaying of data will be updated as time allows If you select linear conversion mX b as the units for channel configuration you should expect a further impact on real time display performance The mX b conversion is discussed in the section Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Note The meter channels selected are independent of the group chart assignments Softwa
141. al Interfaces Appendix F ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes Appendix G ChartScan Error Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to ChartScan Appendix H Abbreviations CAUTION If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual or if specification limits are exceeded the function of the equipment as well as the protection provided by it may be impaired ChartScan User s Manual 959296 V vi 959296 ChartScan User s Manual Table of Contents 1 Unit Startup amp ChartView Tutorial 6 Calibration Introduction 1 2 Calibration Setup 6 1 Unit Startup 1 3 Using ChartView s Calibration Feature 6 3 ChartView Basic Concepts 1 11 Manual Calibration Without ChartView 6 6 Configuration Files 1 11 Calibration of Main Unit 6 6 Understanding Groups Charts and Calibration of Signal Conditioning Cards 6 11 Channels 1 11 Three Ways of Using ChartView 1 12 ChartView Tutorial 1 12 Software Sig coat ChartView 2 Operational Aspects amp Specifications ViewXL Basic Operational Features 2 1 Data Handling and Triggering 2 1 Software 2 2 Appendices Hardware 2 2 A API Commands Specifications 2 3 B Configuration Aspects for Programmers C Registers Data Formats amp Queries 3 Understanding the Hardware D ChartScan Program Ex
142. al conditioning cards are detailed Cespe in the user s manual for you data acquisition device The Channel ee 16 Information Region is located on the right hand side of ChartView s feof o 7 mac a main window The values displayed in this region are the real time values of the selected channel EM o 10 58 al e div By clicking on the up or down arrows by the channel selection box a 18 item 14 you can select one of a maximum of 4 channels that were Edi i assigned to a chart You could then observe the chart related aie AE information of the chosen channel You can also select a new channel for the information region by placing the cursor in or tabbing over to the Center or Units Div fields and then pressing PageUp or PageDown This is particularly useful when your main window has been re sized such that the channel selection boxes are not visible The following list identifies the various areas of the region 13 Chart Max Scale Value 17 Center Grid Limit Line Value at chart mid line 14 Channel Selection 18 Units Division Of chart s available channels Provides the vertical increment of one grid box 15 Multiply x2 19 Chart Min Scale Value Grid Limit Line 16 Present Value 20 Divide 2 Note The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than one chart group Multiple group applications ChartView Plus can be activated by use of a special code allowin
143. amples Front and Rear Panels 3 1 E Bus States Bus Lines amp Data Transfer Aspects Power Aspects 3 3 F ASCII Code Summary Changing the Voltage Setting 3 3 Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse 3 4 pow SITOr Messages Memory Configuration 3 4 7 a ree Expanded Memory Options 3 4 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable 3 6 Interface Configurations 3 7 RS 232 422 Interface Configuration 3 7 Ethernet Interface Configuration 3 10 IEEE 488 Configuration Option 3 12 Digital I O Lines 3 14 Logic Levels 3 14 Digital I O Port Pinout 3 14 External TTL BNC Connectors 3 15 4 Option Cards Signal Conditioning Cards 4 1 CSN14 TC P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs 4 1 CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards 4 3 CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors 4 4 CSN Relay Card for High Current Digital Output 4 5 5 CSN Exp Expansion Chassis Option Connecting the Expansion Chassis 5 1 Automatic Channel Assignment 5 3 CSN Exp Specifications 5 4 ChartScan User s Manual 959296 Vii viii 959296 ChartScan User s Manual Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 Introduction 1 2 Unit Startup 1 3 ChartView Basic Concepts 1 11 Configuration Files 1 11 Understanding Groups Charts and Channels 1 11
144. an error Note Because the Configure Channels C command is a deferred command the channel s will not actually be configured until the Execute X command is processed Since the configuring of channels takes a good deal of processor time as many Configure Channels C commands as possible should be placed on one command line This will avoid unnecessary processing time when configuring many channels Thermocouple Card Types For Troubleshooting purposes only not for normal operation These special types are valid only in degrees Celsius Thermocouple Normal Same as Without temperature Temp Temp Type Operation normal sensor adjustment i e sensor sensor operation raw A D input of the T C values values only but type only not linearized linearized without i e raw A D temperature input of the sensor temp adjustment sensors Assignable Channel Types 5 N 14 gauge N 28 gauge NA 10 N A 11 Volts Card Types High Voltage Card Types Volts Type High Voltage Normal Operation Type Range Normal Operation Range e Assignable Ch Types ii 12 13 14 28 24 25 26 A 22 958296 ChartScan User s Manual EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Set Data Format to Engineering Units degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C Clear current channel configuration PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 1 100 0 Configure channel for T C type J with low setpoint of 0 0 5 100 0 C high setpoint of 100 0 C and
145. and US all have user defined meanings and may vary in use between sessions or devices e DC4 is often used as a general stop transmission character e Codes used to control cursor position may be used to control print devices and move the print head accordingly However not all devices support the full set of positioning codes ChartScan User s Manual 889802 F 3 F 4 Decimal Values 00 to 31 ACG amp UCG Descriptions ASCII Control Codes 00 to 31 Addressed Command Group ACG Null NUL Space filler character Used in output timing for some device drivers Star of Header 60H Siar of Tot STX End of Tex ETH nd of Transmission EOT rauy ENQ Acknowledgement ACK Yes answer to questions or ready for next transmission Used in asynchronous protocols for timing Bal GEL Backspace 5 Horizontai Tab WT ine Feed LF Verica Tab WT Form Feed FF arrage Retum CR Shit Out 60 snin GI Negative Acknowledgement NAK No answer to questions or errors found re transmit Used in asynchronous protocols for timing 7 m O N 889802 ChartScan User s Manual Decimal Values 32 to 63 LAG Dec Hex Character Name Bus Message Listen Address Group LAG 32 2 lt space gt Space J Busaddresso0 s at Exclamation Point Bus address 07 ea 2 Quotation Mark Bus address02 3 NumberSign Bus address03 p36 a Dolerse B
146. and the higher level registers containing more detailed information about particular events In general the lowest level register the Status Byte Register STB contains information that may require more immediate action from the controller in that events contained in this register tend to be more time critical However as mentioned earlier other registers may access the STB via the ESB bit This allows any condition within the status reporting register hierarchy to have access to the STB and therefore Serial Poll and Service Request functionality The following is an example to show in brief how the status reporting register hierarchy works Notice that the clearing of the higher level registers cleared the bits in the lower level registers that were associated with the root cause of the condition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 NO X N16 X Configure ESB in the STB to be set when a Device Dependent Error occurs PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 MO X M32 X Configure SRQ when the ESB in the STB occurs A Device Dependent Error will now cause ChartScan to issue a Service Request SRQ to the controller When the SRQ occurs the controller may perform the following sequence to determine the exact cause of the Service Request PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 E X Query the ESC to determine the cause of the error PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the response INPUT A Screen shows E016 This is a calibration error PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U2X PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT
147. ands The Set Digital Outputs O command allows you to enter an output range and specify whether the output should be cleared logic false or set logic true This command will force the specified digital output to the specified condition A 1 will drive the corresponding digital output s high Conversely a 0 will drive the corresponding digital output s low Each digital output line will drive 5 standard TTL loads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltages Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to 0 3 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground EXAMPLE PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 0 X Get the current state of the digital outputs banks PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Screen shows 0128 255 065 024 LINE INPUT 2 N PRINT N PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 00 999 76 234X Set Banks 1 3 and 4 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 0 X Get the current state of the digital outputs PRI NT 1 Screen shows 0000 255 076 234 Note that Bank 2 did not change LINE INPUT 2 0 PRINT O A 42 958296 ChartScan User s Manual P Program Trigger Times Channel Deferred SYNTAX Pstart Set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition configured for start stop and or stop on absolute time where start andstop are in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes
148. ands Order of Execution A 5 Command Summary A 6 Command Reference A 11 Command Description Format A 11 The Commands A 11 TriggerOnCommand A412 A 13 A 13 K A 14 T A 15 FR A 16 iE A 17 J A 18 A 19 A 20 c A 21 C SelectCard A4 A 25 A 26 A 27 A 28 A 31 A 32 H Calibrate Channel Offset_ A 33 d SetScaninteval A 1 Digital Input Stamping A35 Page Calibrate Cold Junction Offset A 36 Enter Calibration Mode A 37 Set Trigger Level A 38 Set SRQ Mask A 39 A 40 R gt a AHP RIR Oy Ri y Nh L QC z D gt N S A 48 A 49 T User Status V A 57 A 58 E S QI A 59 Y et Counts or Select Blocks A 60 O1 or Oo ChartScan Users Manual 958696 A 1 Command Syntax Commands are identified by the following syntax formats e A single letter A through z e A single letter A through z followed by a pound sign e Anat sign e An asterisk followed by a single letter A through z In addition the commands are governed by the following syntax rules Case Sensitivity Commands may be entered in upper or lower case For example A1 1X is interpreted the same as al 1X Spaces White space which consists of all ASCII values of 32 and below and includes the space tab new line and carriage return characters is generally allowed anywhere between commands and command arguments However white space is not allowed in the middle of
149. annel calibration see Chapter 6 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Apply negative precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 G17 1 Calculate gain for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply positive precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 G17 1 Calculate gain for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 EX End Calibration Mode A 32 958296 ChartScan User s Manual H Calibrate Channel Offset Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis is chan DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Channel Offset H command is used to calibrate the correction offset constants for a given slide in card The channel offset values are necessary in order for the internal firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels This command will take the parameter chan and calculate the offsets based on the present channel input voltage Note To achieve correct results 0 0 mV must be present at the desired channel prior to performing the command The 0 0 mV value is obtain
150. artScan User s Manual Using the event status register command U0 X we now wait until the acquisition complete event which includes the stop event WHILE E AND 1 lt gt 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U0X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 E WE ND PRINT The Acquisition is now complete Before reading the data the F command is sent instructing the ChartScan to return the data in a binary format where every value will be 2 bytes in length This command could have been issued anytime after the initial reset and stays in effect until the unit is reset again or another F command is issued PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 FO 1X During or after the acquisition has been completed the internal buffer can be queried for the amount of data available for transfer The U6 command will return the trigger block number the current scan number the current read pointer the trigger time date stamp the scan number where the stop event occurred the stop time date stamp the scan number of the end of the trigger block and the block complete flag This example uses the last parameter in the return string as an indicator of how much data is available to transfer to the controller QuickBASIC s MID function extracts 6 characters from the string U starting at character 8 Query the ChartScan for the of scans available in the Buffer PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U PRINT U UA MIDS US UA VAL UA
151. assis connector 1 of 4 L O o Thermocouples l i1 EIEE J at 0 C i E E 23 j2 os 24 a a DO LW 45 o By 2 oie i a e TE i 6 ate A pa 17 he J Plg at i eo 0 Nottie thop eS p Ee g 6 l a a ee MA 242 a Si Sai J op J A A HES H eE C Ig AAS i 0 9 L N e lt oJ E at 2 Jo ASIN ball Q salle ils fea SSO p 4E Cju oe 0 i ji ars E n Cold Cell 1S 0 ma al Simulator for 0 C m 6 o oD Connection Box Not part of Cold Cell lt U Type Copper Shorting Plug 1 of 4
152. ates charting is in progress This indicator is useful when charts are scrolling at a very slow speed Disk Indicates ChartView is writing to disk Buffering in Indicates the data acquisition instrument is storing scans that are not being saved to disk Instrument Uploading Indicates data in the instrument is being uploaded to the PC Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 7 Chart Pop up Menu Right click on a chart to bring up the chart pop up menu Click on Properties to access a Chart Properties dialog box CV 8 ChartView l ChartView iol x File Chart View Acqure Data Window Device Setup 4 t AT TP WAM SOPRA Riera ea saber Ea e Edit current channel ey 2 MN Zoom chart 2 Grids Scroll rate e 49 5033 Center r Clear chart 2 Gif i di aed ong E P l AS 13 5555 eide j The Chart all a amp timestamp f Fes lines Properties dialog E Be tox atone yout ash fn C Off w CHa fi h C configure the z v Main Timestamp visible oe G Absolute Bii os I operating mode of i ipa seje C Relative Restore defaults fees 3 000 C selected chart Sunt aS p a poe dh a Pant e 50 0014 Genter an ged apep nee J EEEE Appi bo 43 702 SG idiv i 1 sec div Initializing Chatting Disk Buffering in Instrument Uploading ChartView Main Window with Chart Pop up Menu and Chart Properties Dialog Box When
153. ation of ChartView In an actual application a review such as this provides you with a chance to correct configuration errors gt 20 Device Interface Check the Interface and Status via the Device pull down menu gt 21 Channel Configuration Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Channel Configuration Dialog Box Access this box through the Setup pull down menu gt 22 Acquisition Parameters Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration Dialog Box This box can be accessed through the Setup pull down menu 1 16 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual 3 gt 23 Data File Parameters Check Data File Parameters These parameters can be set from the Data Destination Dialog Box accessible from the Setup pull down menu and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible from the Data pull down menu 6 Optional Save Configuration File Although the updated Chartvw cvw file will automatically save upon Exit there may be times when you want to manually initiate a save This will help you save time if an error occurs that may corrupt your configuration You may create a new configuration file by using an existing one and making the necessary changes In actual applications use the File pull down menu to manually save configuration files if this option is desired Note The cvw file contains all setup information Setup information includes cha
154. ator ASCII Control Code TTL GET Group Execute Trigger bus command UCG GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus GS Group Separator ASCII Control Code UNT GTL Go To Local bus command Us o GUI Graphical User Interface VDM H W Hardware VT o o O Talk Address Group bus command Take Control bus command 0 Q a K Nn lt Transistor Transistor Logic Universal Command Group Unlisten bus command Untalk bus command Unit Separator ASCII Control Code Virtual DOS Machine Vertical Tab ASCII Control Code ChartScan User s Manual 958296 H 1 H 2 Note 958296 ChartScan User s Manual
155. ator h11 as specified with the Set Query Terminator Q command Note If the specified channel or a range of channels is not currently defined in the scan group as configured by the Channel Configuration C command a conflict error will be flagged EXAMPLES PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 16 1X Configure channels 1 16 for T C Type J PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Fl 0X Set format for engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R 16X Get the last reading for channel 16 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Screen shows 0103 20 channel 16 is 103 2 C LINE INPUT 2 R PRINT R PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R 1 4X Get the Last readings for channels 1 4 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Screen shows 0003 70 channel 1 is 3 7 C 0005 60 channel 2 is 5 6 C 0010 20 channel 3 is 10 2 C 0024 40 channel 4 is 24 4 C LINE INPUT 2 R PRINT R ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 49 S Set Real Time Clock System Immediate SYNTAX Set the unit s internal real time clock where t i me is in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year S Query St i me as defined above DESCRIPTION The Set Real Time Clock S command is used to set the unit s internal real time clock The time argument follows the same format as the standard time date stamp input format as specified in the Data Format section of A
156. ave occurred Its bits and the event that set them are as follows Bit No Event 0 Acquisition Complete 1 Stop Event 2 Query Error 3 Device Dependent Error 4 Execution Error 5 Command Error 6 75 Limit Exceeded 7 Power On Set Clear Information Set when acquisition operation has been completed An acquisition is complete when the acquisition device has finished the current acquisition The bit will be cleared when a new acquisition is configured through the T command Set when the pre trigger count specified in the trigger configuration by the T command has been satisfied This bit is cleared when a new acquisition is configured either through the Trigger Configuration T command or when the unit is rearmed via the auto rearm mode Set when the controller has attempted to read from the acquisition device when a no response is present or pending or b a response has been lost because the controller has sent a new query before reading the response to a prior query Set when a conflict error has occurred A conflict error is generated when a command cannot execute correctly because it would interfere with other commands or settings Set when one of several errors has occurred during the execution of a command Set when a command syntax error is detected Set when the Acquisition Buffer has been filled to at least 75 of its capacity The bit is cleared when the amount of data in the Acquisition Buffer fa
157. c Options Setup Type Group Setup Chart Setup Channel Setup Simple 1 group only Up to 16 charts 1 channel per chart 1 group only Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Up to 64 groups Up to 16 charts per group Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Moderate and Advanced modes are only available with activation of ChartView Plus Note Once your chart setup is complete you can always go back and edit the setup cA Display For the purpose of our tutorial complete the following steps Note that these steps are catered to ChartView Plus Comments regarding standard ChartView are presented in brackets gt 5 Verify that the Advanced tab under Automatic Chart Creation is selected Simple must be used for standard program a Group 1 3 gt 6 Choose 2 for the number of groups Standard program is limited to 1 group 3 gt 7 Choose 3 for the number of charts 3 gt 8 Choose 4 for the number of channels 3 gt 9 Click Automatic Chart Creations Create Charts At this point your chart appears on the Main Window PLEA Chart 2 3 gt 10 Click on the Display Configuration button item 7 see figure on page 1 9 HEA chart 3 Though you usually won t do this at this point this act permits you to see a ee a representation of your configuration and permits you to make changes You should end up with a configuration display of two groups each with 3 charts and each cha
158. cal amp Electronic Engineers CA Not Controller Active mode IFC Interface Clear line SC O Not System Controller mode IOCTL Input Output Control A D Analog to Digital ist Bus Device Individual Status ACG Addressed Command Group Acknowledgement ASCII Control Code Listen Address Group bus command ACK LED Light Emitting Diode Analog to Digital Converter IF o o Line Feed ASCII Control Code Application Program Interface ILLO Local Lock Out bus command ASCII American Standard Code for Info Interchange LSB Least Significant Bit ATN Attention line My Listen Address BEL Bell ASCII Control Code MSB Most Significant Bit BS o Backspace ASCII Control Code MTA My Talk Address Controller Active mode N U Not Used Cancel ASCII Control Code NAK Negative Acknowledgement ASCII Control Code CCL Character Command Language NDAC Not Data Accepted line CJC NRFD Not Ready For Data line Bus Command interpretation NUL Null ASCH Control Code Carriage Return ASCII Control Code NV RAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory Cold Junction Compensation CTS Clear To Send line DAV Data Valid line DC1 Device Control 1 ASCII Control Code Parallel Poll Unconfig bus command DC2 Device Control 2 ASCII Control Code REN Remote Enable line Parallel Poll Configure bus command Parallel Poll Disable bus command DC3 Device Control 3 ASCII Control Code DC4 Device Control 4 ASCII Control Code DCD Data Carrier Detect li
159. can Enable Disable main unit calibration Note that this pushbutton does not exist on early production units Early production units use micro switch 9 on the DIP switch instead of a calibration pushbutton Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed information regarding calibration BNC Trigger input for initiating and or stopping acquisition with TTL input signal equipment with ChartScan acquisition DB50 Connector inputs RS 232 422 DB9 Serial port for operation at remote distances from controlling computer Supports various baud Connector rates using RTS CTS or XON XOFF handshaking When ChartScan is configured for RS 232 serial communications this port can be used to connect ChartScan to a Net232 ethernet RS 232 converter for ethernet operations Refer to the Net232 User s Guide for ethernet related information Used for selecting RS 232 or RS 422 and respective communication parameters i e handshaking parity and Baud Rate Also allows for section of IEEE 488 and address settings An IEEE 488 interface card is required for IEEE 488 operations Interface Card Slot For installing the optional IEEE 488 interface card Note that RS 232 serial interface is the default and is possible with or without an interface card LED Indicators See previous table LED Indicators Chassis Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Power Aspects Changing the Voltage Setting Based on your order your ChartScan system was set a
160. ccess the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD by using the lt View PDFs gt button located on the opening screen Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software iv ChartScan User s Manual Manual Layout Chapter 1 Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial provides information to get your ChartScan system up and running The chapter includes installation steps basic concepts regarding the ChartView software program and a ChartView tutorial to quickly familiarize you with the out of the box software Chapter 2 Operational Aspects and Specifications Chapter 3 Understanding the Hardware discusses several hardware related aspects of the ChartScan 1400 including the front and rear panels power and the voltage selector switch device memory three types of communication interface digital I O lines and the unit s two external TTL BNC connectors Chapter 4 Option Cards discusses the signal conditioning card options and the high current CSN relay card option The chapter includes the specifications for each card Chapter 5 CSN Exp Expansion Chassis discusses the CSN Exp expansion option which provides a means of adding up to 64 additional analog channels to the ChartScan system The chapter includes connection instructions channel assignment information and specifications Chapter 6 Calibration explains how to manually calibrate the master chassis and option cards Software ChartV
161. cellation code and your modem phone number The Cancel Code pull down list provides three common code options Instead of using a code from the list you can type in the desired code Note that the device DIP switch settings must match those entered in the text boxes RS232 Setup RS232 Setup Comm Port isd Comm Port Commi tsi Baud Rate fiscoo o Baud Rate fiscoo ti tC Parity Noe i sstst t sSY Parity None ti it is sS YS HandShaking Rts ciS o HandShaking RTscts o Modem No X Modem Yes z JV Use Cancel Call waiting Enter cancel code below Comm Port Baud Rate Parity Handshaking Modem Cancel Codes for Call Waiting Software Reference x Cancel Code Phone Number rod fi 555 555 1234 Cancel Cancel 1 16 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 None Odd or Even None or RTS CTS No or Yes 70 70 1170 or type in other acceptable code 988992 ChartView CV 27 Setup Network Setup Network is a purchased option that provides a means of configuring systems that have a Net232 Pataki crab Ethernet RS 232 Converter For details regarding 2 eee ae the Net232 refer to the Net232 User s Guide p n 1037 0901 A copy of the guide is shipped with the Sn EE RECN FY ner A Net323 device Network Interface IP Address Upon selecting Setup Network the Network Addie ofthe T127 Jooo foo foo Interface Configuration dialog box will ap
162. ces are to be if at all synchronized with the internal scan intervals 1 command Likewise it may allow the acquisition to re enable itself with the same configuration after the initial acquisition has been terminated ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 51 1 The first parameter st art defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to begin acquiring scans This event is referred to as the Start Trigger When the unit has recognized that a Start Trigger has been encountered it will begin acquiring scans at that point The first of these scans the Start Trigger scan will be time date stamped for later reference Also when the Start Trigger is recognized the Triggered Bit 02 of the Status Byte will be set and the TRIGGER light on the front panel will turn on Setting the start parameter to 0 will disable the acquiring of scan this may be performed at any time during or after an acquisition The st art parameter will automatically be set to 0 upon the termination of an acquisition unless the re arm flag is set to 1 Note If the trigger start event is level or alarm at least one pre trigger scan must be programmed to initiate scanning in order for the event to be recognized 2 The second parameter st op defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to stop acquiring scans This event is referred to as the Stop Trigger When the unit has recognized that a Stop Trigger has been encountered it will s
163. ch channel in the scan channel can optionally have a high and low alarm level and hysteresis associated with it ChartScan alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of desired limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on ChartScan back panel The following example demonstrates how to assign a J type thermocouple to channels on a CSN14 TC P signal conditioning module plugged into ChartScan PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 C 1 16 1 X Continuous channels 1 16 with JTC Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A CSN14 LV T B or S Configuring Low Volts Channels When the CSN14 LV T B or S signal conditioning module is used ChartScan measures voltages providing a programmable range per channel To configure the channels on a CSN14 LV T B or S use the Configure Channel C command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module Channels not included in the channel scan do not have to be configured The following table highlights channel types for the CSN14 LV T B and S signal conditioning card Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A Volts DC Volts AC The t ype parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a low volts channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an ac
164. ch immediately chooses the digital output line which is being referred to An example of a deferred command is Set Data Format F which determines the input and output format used for channel data when x is interpreted As deferred commands are interpreted their desired effects are recorded in internal temporary registers As additional deferred commands are interpreted their effects are added to these registers possibly overwriting earlier effects Finally when X is interpreted the temporary registers are examined in the execution order described below If two deferred commands that do not affect the same function are received before the Execute x command they take effect in the execution order described below If a deferred command is sent multiple times within a command line the last occurrence of the command will take precedence Note that a command line is terminated by the x For example if F1 1 F1 3X is sent the data output format will be as specified by the F1 3X command The F1 1 command is overridden and never takes effect If an error is detected during command processing commands are ignored up through and including the next execute command Thus any immediate commands after the error and all deferred commands are ignored For example the command line T1 1 0 00216 0 25 255AAT3 7 K20 X containing the error AA only executes the 00 because it is an immediate command that occurred before the error The deferred commands T1 1 0
165. cquiring Pre amp Post Trigger Data at the Same Rate using FAST ACQ BAS The following program FAST_ ACQ BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan for fast acquisition then bring the values into the controller after the acquisition is complete From a logic standpoint the difference between this and SLOW ACQ BAS is that this program reads blocks of data instead of one scan at a time This method is usually more efficient in case of fast scan intervals Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 10 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned 0 WHILE AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type T thermocouples and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 2X The Y command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states In this example 50 scans are taken while in the pre trigger state 100 while in the post trigger state and 200 while in the post stop state The post trigger count is only vali
166. cquisition Buffer at a programmed scan rate it is necessary to complete the following four steps 1 Configure each channel with the desired type 2 Select the scan intervals 3 Select the acquisition parameters 4 Select the trigger parameters Once the steps have been completed ChartScan is armed and waiting for the trigger Once the trigger is satisfied ChartScan begins collecting scans and storing them in the Acquisition Buffer Reference Note If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Command and Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples 958296 ChartScan User s Manual PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure master channels 1 4 with Type JTC PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 100 01 00 0 00 00 01 0X Configure normal timebase to 1 minute acquisition timebase to 1 second PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Y100 1100 0X Set pre trigger scan count to 100 and post trigger to 1100 scans PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X Configure start event to trigger on command and stop event to stop post trigger count TRIGGER LED should pulse PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger the acquisition Acquisition scans should now be collected unti l 1100 post trigger scans have been collected TRIGGER LED should be on Channel Configuration Configuring a channel is the process of describing the channel transducer to ChartSca
167. criptions 1 Turn On All Channels Alt N 2 Turn Off All Channels Not Assigned to Charts Alt F 3 Turn On Off Channel Readings Alt R 4 Print Entire Channel and Alarm Setup Alt P The following table indicates message and pull down menu aspects of the Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Message and Pull Down List Aspects Message Pull Down List N A ENABLE or DISABLE N A CHOOSE TYPE gt ENTER LABEL MAX 8 LETTER CHOOSE UNITS gt ENTER DESIRED LOW LIMIT ENTER DESIRED HIGH LIMIT Hyst ENTER DESIRED HYSTERESIS 10 Alarm SELECT AN ALARM A Yes indicates the item has an associated pull down list from which a selection can be made Column CH On Reading Type Label Units Low High 062248 ele Pt TCH NA 2 On ENABLE or DISABLE 3 Reading NWA 4 Type CHOOSETYPES 5 Label ENTER LABEL MAX 8 LETTER 6 Units CHOOSE UNITS 7 low ENTER DESIRED LOW LIMIT 8 High ENTER DESIRED HIGH LIMIT 9 Hyst_ ENTER DESIRED HYSTERESIS 10 Alarm SELECT AN ALARM The pull down list selection or copy paste process are useful for making multiple channel configuration changes within a column You may double click within a cell to make your way through all the possible selections The selections are repetitive in other words you will eventually advance to the same selection with which you started The following text provides mor
168. ct the channel readings in a binary format rather than the default ASCII format This is inherently faster than ASCII format but the data must be deciphered after it is collected to yield temperature values Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper Status is returned WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 2X The Y command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states In this example 400 scans are taken while in the pre trigger state 100 while in the post trigger state and 200 while in the post stop state The post trigger count is valid since the stop event set by the T command will be set to Counted later in the program NT 1 OUTPUT 07 Y400 100 200X The command sets the time between scans in hours minutes seconds format The ChartScan can have two separate scan rates one that is used in the post
169. cted channels list CV 12 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Display Configuration Setup Ea Or Group Number of charts in 3 the selected Group a Group Name Group sis Display Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration Note When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels listed lower in the display list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels higher in the list those that were added first Display Configuration Setup Ej EAP Display Group 1 Channel Type Show All Types Available Channels Selected Channels CH2 Add gt i CH3 Ch4 _ lt Bemove _ lt Bemove CH5 CHE CH Note IF you add more than one CHE channel to a Chart Channels that CHG appear lower in the Selected CH10 Channels list will have a higher CH11 precidence that those at the top of CH12 the list Type fos Units Peo Adding Channel 2 to Chart 1 Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel In the following figure Channel 1 of Chart 1 Group 1 was selected resulting in a new screen image From this screen you can edit the channel setup Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 13 Display Configuration Setup Ej Deselect All Channels OK L0H HOFF Select all channels ofthe same type Se
170. d scan configuration triggers alarms and digital I O operation Appendix C Registers F ormats amp Queries provides information regarding registers data formats status and event reporting and other operation related factors Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control Appendix E Bus States Bus Lines and Data Transfer Aspects provides reference material regarding bus states bus lines and data transfer DIO lines in relation to IEEE 488 and Serial Interfaces Appendix F ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes Appendix G ChartScan E rror Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to the unit Appendix H Abbreviations Reference Note D For users of Net232 Ethernet RS 232 converters additional API commands can be found in the Net232 User s Guide part no 1037 0901 These additional API commands pertain to ethernet operations Appendices 958296 A A ii ChartScan User s Manual Appendix A API Commands Contents Command Syntax A 2 Case Sensitivity A 2 Spaces A 2 Multiple Parameters A 2 Command Strings A 2 Execute Command A 2 Fixed Formats A 3 Conflict Errors A 3 Command Interpretation A 3 Immediate amp Deferred Commands A 3 Deferred Comm
171. d and the use of the End or Identify EOD line can be changed with the Q commands If ChartScan is configured to trigger on Talk requesting a status report U command will not cause the unit to trigger The following table outlines information available through U commands See the Command Reference section for details and examples U Commands and Descriptions Causes ChartScan to return a fixed length status message string The status message shows the current options in use for each command Causes ChartScan to return a decimal number from 000 to 255 This number is the decimal equivalent of the binary information on the digital input lines on the rear panel card edge digital I O connector Returns information in the Calibration Status Register Returns system settings similar to invoking a combination of the following query commands F I L P Q S T Y Returns high low last register data in the current data format for each channel defined by the C command such as the high reading the high time stamp the low reading the low time stamp and the last reading Returns the same information as U4 but resets the current high low for all channels Returns the following current trigger block information the trigger block current read scan in block current write scan in block trigger time date stamp scan that stop occurred scan number that end of acquisition occurred and block completed flag U7 Returns the channels that ha
172. d in the Acquisition Buffer and there are 19 865 total scans in the buffer It also shows the current read pointer at the 100 scan in the Ist trigger block and that their are 351 scans in this trigger block 101 250 i e 101 scans from 100 to 0 plus the 250 scans from 1 to 250 To retrieve all the scan data within the buffer PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R3X Request all scan data in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows 4 channels x 19865 scans 79460 readings PRINT A 0234 20 0019 4040001 40 0023 60 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000000 0000000 9999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Notice that the Buffer Status String is null indicating that the Acquisition Buffer is completely empty For more information on using the R command refer to Appendix A 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Configuring Alarms ChartScan can produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of user defined limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on ChartScan s rear panel To use alarms the channels in question must be part of the channel scan The alarms will become active and monitored only after an acquisition has been configured and armed and only at t
173. d relative time stamp formats are provided below Note that the 2h digit format can not be printed EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1X Enable absolute time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T2X Enable relative time stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 TOX Disable time stamping Format Examples of Absolute and Relative Time Stamping Absolute Time Stamping Relative Time Stamping ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for 3 p m 2 min amp 5 secs after hour July 9 1997 14 hours 30 minutes 10 days ASCII format 15 02 05 000 07 09 97 ASCII format 14 30 00 000 00000010 2h Timelncrement __ 00 00 00 00 or 09 61 Milliseconds for ASCII Milliseconds for ASCII Microseconds for 2h digit Microseconds for 2h digit low gt high low gt high 00 00 00000010 0A 00 958296 ChartScan User s Manual A Assign Alarm Output Set alarm condition where c hans is the channel s to assign to the digital output hans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where chan lt max orfirst last fora range of channels where first lt last lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 put is the digital output number with which to associate the channel s where 0 lt out put lt 32 LA Query channels assigned to digital output lt lt ut DESCRIPTION The Assign Alarm Output A command may be used to assign a particular channel or range of channels alarm conditio
174. d to Charts will automatically re enable 1 e returned to an ON state b channels that were not assigned to Charts but were set to ON prior to selecting Burst Mode will not return to the ON state automatically c the channel that was selected for Burst Mode will remain in the ON state unless turned off by the user Measuring AC Voltage or AC RMS Voltage Introduction When someone talks about measuring AC voltage they are usually talking about measuring AC RMS which is the effective periodic value of the voltage for one full cycle RMS Root Mean Square is the square root of the average of the squares of the signal being measured ChartScan MultiScan and NetScan can use multiple channels to measure AC RMS voltages but are restricted to the use of one channel when measure actual AC voltage at 60 cycles The following questions and answers should help to clarify this point Question 1 Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle waveforms with ChartScan MultiScan or NetScan Answer No Measuring a 60 cycle or 50 cycle waveform with ChartScan MultiScan or NetScan requires the use of High speed single channel Burst Mode While in this mode only one channel can be measured See related questions 2 and 3 CV 44 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Question 2 How do I measure a 60 cycle waveform using just one channel Answer To measure AC you must sample at a rate fast enough to see every cycle line Multiplying the
175. d to the option place multiple files into multiple worksheets e When enabled a worksheet is created for each file and each worksheet is renamed with name of the file excluding the file extension e When disabled not enabled all files are placed on the same worksheet separated by a blank row The number of rows that an Excel spreadsheet s a gered can have is determined by the version of TE 55 7 5 39757 Microsoft Windows being used Make sure that M 4 gt Fh chartyoooo you do not exceed the limits as described in the Excel documentation for your version of Windows Ready File Information in Excel Worksheet Using the ViewXL Program API The ViewXL Add In exposes several methods that you can call from your own Excel Macros Before you can use the Add In you must perform the following steps Standard l I Formatting o a0 40 Chart 1 Make the Excel Visual Basic toolbar visible This is accomplished by Clipboard right clicking in a blank area on the Excel Menu or Toolbar space Control Toolbox When the pop up menu appears check the Visual Basic selection Drawing as indicated in the figure at the right Exit Design Mode External Data sl eh ae i Forms 2 With the Visual Basic toolbar visible click the lt Visual Basic Editor gt rete button PivotT able Reviewing a Worddart DagviewsLc Quick Math ov ViewsL Visual Basic Editor Selecting Visual Basic 3
176. d when the stop event set by the T command is set to Counted This application does not use Counted so this parameter of 100 is ignored PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 Y50 100 200X The command sets the time between scans in hours minutes seconds format The ChartScan can have two separate scan rates one that is used in the post trigger state and one that is used in all other states This example sets up both scan intervals to 0 1 seconds 10 Hz PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 100 00 00 1 00 00 00 1X The T command sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition In this example the start event is a rising level of an input channel as specified by the L command The stop event is a falling level of an input channel as it passes through the level specified by the L command The auto rearm flag is set to 0 off so that the ChartScan will not re arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete The synchronization flag is also off so the ChartScan will not re synchronize itself to the trigger point when the start event begins When the ChartScan encounters the X command it will be armed and start the collection of the pre trigger data ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 5 D 6 The L command in this example specifies the trigger channel as channel 1 at a level of 20 degrees with a hysteresis of 0 degrees The L command is relevant only when the start or stop event is a channel level PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 L1 20 0 0X T4 5
177. data from a simulated instrument with no actual hardware concerns CV 28 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Device Status gt Instrument Accesses the System Inventory dialog box l System Configuration memory TC Volts TCAVolts TC Volts TCAVolts TCAVolts TC Volts TC Volts TC Volts Refresh System Inventory Dialog Box Alarms Brings up selection list for Status Log configuration and Log Enable Status Brings up the Alarm Status dialog box which shows the current state of each alarm The alarm state appears as ma either a 1 or 0 the 1 being digital High and the 0 f 0 1 0 C o 1 fo 2 0 1 2 fo fo fo fo being digital Low 0 A one for one correlation between AIG AY A Ao AO olA the alarm number and channel can only occur if each 17 32 Device Interface Instrument Invento Alarms Status Instrument Error Status og Ernane Instrument Realtime clock Calibration Log configuration EIFS channel of a 32 channel or less system is assigned to a dedicated alarm number Alarm Status Dialog Box Log configuration Alarm logging is a feature of ChartView Plus only Alarm Logging allows you to monitor the Alarm states of the instrument and save selected information to a file whenever any of the states change Alarm logging is implemented by periodically polling the instrument the time interval betwe
178. der Use data destination Set data destination cell mport existing Files tions bout Ip ViewXL Menu BIg als x The ViewXL menu gives you access to all of the Add Ins features The first six menu items are also available from the ViewXL Toolbar Reference Note Refer to the Toolbar section beginning on page vxl 3 for a description of the functions that can be accessed by both the Toolbar and the pull down Menu Import Existing Files Brings up the Import Files dialog box Normally ViewXL gets data from an acquisition performed by the connected data acquisition server application e g ChartView or DaqView This is an alternate way of selecting data files for viewing in the Excel workbook Reference Note For detailed information refer to page vxl 6 Import Files Options Brings up the Options dialog box The ViewXL options settings are made from the Options dialog box From there you can select among other options the desired data acquisition application Reference Note For detailed information refer to page vxl 4 Options About Brings up the About dialog box This displays copyright and version information about the Add In Help Displays the Help File vx 2 ViewXL 989092 Software Reference Toolbar 989092 The ViewXL toolbar provides access to the Add Ins most frequently used features These features and a few others are also available from the ViewXL
179. directory of the CHARTVIEW directory This directory has additional examples for serial users Although written in QuickBASIC the program logic and the ChartScan device dependent commands apply to all languages and computers The first group of examples uses the IEEE 488 bus through the Personal488 interface to communicate with the ChartScan Each one of these programs begins with a short preamble that opens the driver and substantiates communications After the driver is opened commands are issued to the driver through character strings in quotes QuickBASIC s PRI NT and I NPUT commands are used to communicate with the driver The driver commands used most commonly are ENTER OUTPUT and SPOLL e ENTER gets data from the selected device The syntax of the ENTER command is ENTERaddr where addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument To bring the data into a language variable the QuickBASIC NPUT function must be used right after the ENTER command e OUTPUT sends data to the selected device The syntax of the OUTPUT command is OUTPUTaddr out data where addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument and out data the string of characters to send to the device e SPOLL is an abbreviation for a Serial Poll that retrieves an 8 bit status response from the selected instrument The syntax of the SPOLL command is SPOLLaddr where addr is the IEEE 488 address of the instrument Right after the SPOLL command the QuickBASIC
180. dows based graphical user interface approach to obtaining data collection and display Although ChartScan 1400 can acquire temperature readings at a rate of 147 channels sec you may also program the unit to acquire data at specified time intervals using the hh mm ss t format For the ultimate in flexibility you may also program separate pre trigger and post trigger sample rates As an example ChartScan 1400 can be programmed to sample data once per hour and then sample once per second when channel 2 reaches 70 C An interface card can be plugged into ChartScan 1400 unit through a slot on the unit s rear panel When the only interface desired is RS 232 no interface card is needed and the card interface port is shielded with a removable protective cover Statistics such as High Low and Last are available for each channel for data reduction In addition up to 32 alarms may be programmed using the programmable high and low limits for each channel 1 2 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual Unit Startup The basic Startup Steps are I Inspect the System II Install the Software HI Check and Install Hardware 1 Verify the Correct Voltage Setting 2 Verify the Correct DIP Switch Setting 3 Install the Signal Conditioning Card s if applicable 4 Install the IEEE 488 Interface Communications Card option if applicable 5 Connect the optional CSN Exp Expansion Chassis if applicable IV
181. dware Ill Check and Install Hardware Depending on your order your ChartScan 1400 unit may not require all the steps under this heading Ifa step does not apply to your unit simply go on to the next one 1 Verify Voltage Setting Based on your order your ChartScan 1400 system was set at the voltage indicated on the sticker located on the rear of the unit near the power switch Verify that the voltage value indicated on the sticker matches the voltage of your intended AC power supply If you need to change the voltage selection refer the section of Chapter 3 entitled Power Aspects Changing the Voltage Setting ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 3 2 Verify DIP Switch Setting The DIP switch is located on the lower right corner of ChartScan 1400 S rear panel The recommended settings are indicated in the following figures and table Refer to Chapter 3 if you desire to use other RS 232 configurations or if you wish to use the IEEE 488 interface option For ethernet use of ChartScan 1400 make sure the unit is configured for RS 232 serial communications then refer to the Net232 User s Guide p n 1037 0901 Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton If you have an early production unit refer to the right hand DIP switch illustration RS 422 RS 232 RPSEBPEES RRBBEFETE 7 8 4S GS a Bea COMM H S PARITY SERIAL CAL COMM H
182. e CD s lt View PDFs gt button 988992 ChartView CV 47 Chart Setup Wizard Introduction Chart Setup Wizard is a feature of ChartView and ChartView Plus The feature allows you to set up your initial chart display configuration using an automated method or manually create a new display configuration The following points are important in regard to the Chart Setup Wizard e You can edit the chart display by accessing the Display Configuration Setup dialog box from the Chart pull down menu or by clicking of the Chart Setup button in the main window toolbar This method does not use the Chart Setup Wizard and does not reset your chart display configuration setup e Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset your chart Display Configuration Setup It will not reset your Channel and Alarm configuration e Chart Setup Wizard as described in this text covers the expanded setup applications available with ChartView Plus The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than chart group e Expanded applications ChartView Plus can be activated by use of a special code available from the factory Please consult your service representative for more detailed information Activating the Chart Setup Wizard from the Chart pull down menu will result in the following dialog box and warning Hew Display Setup AN This operation will reset your Display Setup i Cancel The Chart Setup Wizard window a
183. e channel configuration dialog box Chart channels and or use meters while acquiring data to disk Prior to using ChartView for charting and or meter use while simultaneously acquiring data to disk you need to configure a display and or meter as well as configure the acquisition Note that the channels from the display setup are automatically enabled You can enable additional channels from the channel configuration dialog box for the data acquisition to acquire more data however these additional channels will not change your display setup or the channels being monitored In other words you can acquire data from channels which you do not monitor ChartView Tutorial This tutorial is intended to help you gain a good understanding of ChartView The tutorial is based on an initial startup with no configuration file present ChartView allows you to operate in one of four Device Interface modes IEEE 488 RS 232 422 NetWork or Simulated Instrument The tutorial makes use of the Simulated Instrument mode This mode provides a means of running ChartView and inspecting its features without hardware concern Note that you can change the interface mode at anytime during a configuration setup The tutorial makes use of the Simulated Instrument mode Note that both the IEEE 488 and Network modes require the use of additional hardware as discussed elsewhere in this manual e Anarrow symbol 3 followed by a number is used throughout the t
184. e ALL HLL data PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 S X Now Get the current time PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT A Screen shows 13 20 00 1 03 24 97 PRI NT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4X Now again query the HLL settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the response I NPUT A Screen shows PRI NT A 0980 20813 20 01 700 03 24 9740959 20813 20 09 300 03 24 97 0975 80 0260 70813 20 29 500 03 24 9740245 605813 20 00 400 03 24 97 0257 60 0047 50513 20 51 700 03 24 97 0051 10513 20 09 100 03 24 97 0049 80 0047 50813 20 51 700 03 24 97 0051 10513 20 09 100 03 24 97 0049 80 0015 70813 20 01 200 03 24 9740008 20813 20 17 300 03 24 97 0010 40 In example 2 notice that issuing the U5 command caused the High and Low values and their associated Time Date Stamps to be reset ChartScan User s Manual 958296 C 3 Example 3 Example shows how to read only the Last readings PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO0 0 Q1 1 0 0 OX Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure four channel no setpoints Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Just get the Last channel readings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last reading for channel 1 I NPUT A Screen shows PRI NT A 0950 30 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get Last reading for channel 2 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0250 60 PRINT 1 ENTERO7
185. e Group sis Adding a Chart to Group 1 Change the number of charts per group if desired Change the group name if desired Click on a group to see the chart s assigned to the group In the above example there is one group with one chart Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart A screen similar to the following will appear Display Configuration Setup E Display Et el Group 1 Channel Type Show All Types Available Channels Selected Channels CH1 Add gt CH3 CH5 lt Remove Note IF you add more than one channel to a Chart Channels that appear lower in the Selected Channels list will have a higher CH11 precidence that those at the top of thelist Assigning Channels to Chart 1 of Group 1 988992 Software Reference Software Reference 9 Choose channels for the selected chart With ChartView Plus you can select up to four overlapping channels per chart With the basic ChartView program you are limited to one channel per chart There are four methods of adding channels These are as follows Note Note 10 In the display area on the left hand side of the screen click on a channel to check the channel s configuration and to re configure the channel if desired The Display Configuration Setup Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left hand mouse button then click the Add button Repeat for each channel to be added D
186. e Set Digital Outputs 0 command may be used to force any of the 32 digital outputs separated into four 8 bit banks on the unit to a certain setting The Bank to Digital Output mapping is as follows Bank Digital Output 01 08 09 16 17 24 25 32 Each argument bankn represents the desired bit mapping for the corresponding bank of digital outputs The argument is a decimal number which when converted to binary format is the desired settings for that bank of digital outputs For example an argument of 201 for bank2 would be interpreted in binary as 11001001 with 1 as active high and 0 as active low This would affect the digital outputs of Bank 2 as follows Bank 2 Digital Outputs 9 10 f 111213141516 J J Note The setting of a bank will force the digital outputs to the specified setting regardless of the current state of the digital outputs such as if an alarm has been assigned to the output If it is desired to not affect a certain bank maybe because it is being used for alarm outputs a value of 999 can be used for the argument for that bank This will effectively mask off that bank from being updated There are 8 digital input lines and 32 digital output lines available on a rear panel DB50 connector The digital output can be controlled either automatically via the alarm settings or manually using the Set Digital Outputs O command To determine the digital output state use the User Status U comm
187. e a a Set the internal clock of the unit 1 01 93X PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 P01 00 00 0 Set start 1 00 am and stop 2 00 am 01 01 93 02 00 00 0 01 01 93X acquisition times PRINT 1 OUTPUT07 T11 11 0 0X Configure for start stop on Absolute Time ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 43 EXECUTION SYNTAX 1 Query the present configuration or mode of the command preceding the DESCRIPTION Most commands have a corresponding Query command formed by appending a question mark 7 to the command letter Query commands place their responses into the output queue until the controller retrieves them They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command When appropriate the response from a Query command is in the form of a command string which if it were executed would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the Query was executed For instance the response of the User Terminator Query V X command is in the following form Vval where O lt val lt 255 This response is in the form of the Set User Terminator V command and if it is sent to the unit it would set the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the Query was issued Query responses are always fixed length strings in a pre defined format Any number of Query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that responds with only the information of interest for a given ap
188. e and low volts card for units with subminiature plugs CSN 14 LV T Low volts card with removable screw terminals CSN 14 LV B Low volts card with BNCs CSN 14 LV S_ Low volts card with safety jacks CSN 14 HV S High volts card with safety jacks Each scanning module fits into the metal shielded chassis The chassis insulates the cards from noise and maintains a constant internal temperature CSN14 TC P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs The CSN14 TC P card contains 16 differential input channels each of which may be configured as any thermocouple type or as a milli volt input Temperature values may be returned in units of C F K R or mV This signal conditioning card contains subminiature plug type connectors There are no user configuration switches or jumpers on the CSN14 TC P card
189. e been powered on for at least one hour With all covers in place allow the main unit and calibration equipment to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour Place the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton on main unit rear panel in the enable indent position to enable writing to RAM Note to ChartScan users Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel as indicated in the NetScan figure page 6 2 If the calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and new password This enables the calibration mode Type U2X to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode Insert banana plugs of shorting option shorting bar or 3 linked plugs into V V and GND binding posts of calibration card This short circuits the analog backplane HI and LO voltage inputs and GND see previous figure Calibration Card and Two Shorting Options Type H0X The Trigger LED will flash indicating that offset calibration is in progress When flashing stops the chassis offset calibration is complete Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occ
190. e before proceeding Allow at least 2 hours warm up for the Cold Cell ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 19 6 20 Calibration a b c If the calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and current password This enables the calibration mode Type U2X to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode Enter commands similar to those in the first two columns in the following table This example is for a T C card in slot 1 and a Type 3 T type thermocouple The table on the preceding page provides additional channel numbers to use as they apply to your system Enter 3 3 0000 0X After each calibration enter U2 X 6 3 0000 0X then observe U128 indicating no errors J 11 3 0000 0X 14 3 0000 0X Note The number after the J is the channel number the next number is the thermocouple type and the number preceding the X is the temperature in C Thus J3 3 0000 0X means Calibrate cold junction offset for channel 3 type 3 T type thermocouple at 0 C Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error V132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range V144 Invalid password U160 Invalid com
191. e channels 1 3 for Type J thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger unit and collect scans PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M 1X Select Single Channel High Speed Burst Mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F 10000 0X Set sampling frequency 10 KHz PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 YO 4096 0 Set count to take 1 MB s worth of samples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 26X Select channel 1 for reading 250 Volts AC samples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger unit and collect scans A 40 958296 ChartScan User s Manual N Set Event Mask System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register ESE where mas k is in the form of the number nnn such that000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed from the following conditions 000 Clear event mask 016 Execution Error 001 Acquisition complete 032 Command Error 002 Stop Event 064 Buffer 75 Full 004 Query Error 128 Power On 008 Device Dependent Error N Query the Event mask DESCRIPTION The Set Event Mask N command directly sets the Event Status Enable ESE Register ESE conditions in turn determine which Event Status Register ESR conditions are enabled to generate the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the Serial Poll Status SPS Register Multiple ESR bits can be enabled simultaneously by issuing Set Event Mask N commands
192. e chart s high and low end values items 13 and 19 and possibly an automatic change of the units div item 18 Aside from using the center spinner controls to change center you can change the center value by placing the mouse cursor in or tabbing over to the field and then either typing in the desired value or using the PC keyboard up and down arrow control keys CV 6 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Units div The units in units div 18 can be C F K R mV or V The division referenced is one vertical grid In the example above for Channel 1 each vertical grid increment represents 10 58 C per division Changing the units division spinner controls will result in an automatic adjustment of the max scale and min scale values items 13 and 19 Aside from using the units div triangular controls to change the value you can change units div by placing the mouse cursor in or tabbing over to the field and then either typing in the desired value or using the PC keyboard arrow control keys Status Indicator Region i 34 50 Lon 02 45 1 sec i diy Loo 02 30 Loo 02 35 Loo 02 40 Charting Ga D Initializing ei Charting C Disk a Buffering in lrstrurniert Uploading The status indicator region of the Main Window located along the bottom of the window consists of the following items 21 Scrolling Time 23 Chart Speed Time Div 22 Status Message Box 24 Status LEDs Scrolling Time Scrolling Time 21
193. e controlling computer they are erased from ChartScan s buffer The acquisition buffer is a FIFO i ee First In First Out buffer In other words the oldest data to be Block 2 written into the buffer is the first data to be read from the buffer when a read operation is performed The buffer may be broken up into one nese 3 16000 Scans or more trigger blocks A trigger block is comprised of pre trigger scans optional a trigger point post trigger scans a stop event and rigger 1 Bea S Trigger post stop scans optional These components constitute a trigger an acquisition and each may be of variable length Block 5 8000 Scans block in the internal memory of the unit Each trigger block defines Trigger blocks are allocated sequentially and the scans within the Trigger Blocks are written and read sequentially In other words it is not possible to randomly access a Trigger Block or a scan within a trigger block When a read operation is performed the scan that is read is the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block currently defined foe The figure represents a sample acquisition buffer with 5 trigger ample Acquisition ee each oe ree see of scan data i Re ETE Trigger Block Organization Each Trigger Block in the buffer has an associated trigger block descriptor used by internal processes for Acquisition Buffer maintenance Since the trigger block descriptor does take up memory it will have an indirect af
194. e detail regarding the channel and alarm configuration parameters The number preceding the text refers to the column number with 1 being the left hand column and 10 being the right hand column of the Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box CV 38 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Channel Configuration Columns 1 Channel CH This column serves only as a channel number indicator The channel number cannot be changed from this column 2 On The On column allows you to enable a channel for data collection When a cell or block of cells in this column is selected a selection box will appear that allows On to enable or Off to disable the channel Double clicking a cell in this column toggles the channel s enable status Clicking the Make All Channels Active button enables turns all channels on Clicking on the Make All Channels Inactive button disables all channels turns them off with the exception that channels assigned to charts can only be turned off from the display configuration setup 3 Reading The reading column displays the scanning device input readings The column is activated and deactivated by clicking the lt Turn On Off Channel Readings gt button button 3 in the preceding figure Unless you are using the simulated instrument mode the column s values are real time channel values from the instrument This column will update the readings as fast as the computer will allow N
195. e ethernet provided it is configured for RS 232 serial communications and it is properly connected to a network via a Net232 ethernet RS 232 converter For detailed instructions refer to Net232 User s Guide part number 1037 0901 3 10 Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual IEEE 488 Interface Configuration Option The IEEE 488 interface option is intended for digital communication with IEEE 488 compliant computer platforms as well as IEEE 488 compliant platform independent configurations Data is transmitted parallel as opposed to serial The IEEE 488 option allows for up to 15 devices to be connected to one bus with a total bus length of up to 20 meters Allowable cable distance between devices is up to 2 meters Message transactions are hardware handshaked This section describes the configuration for ChartScan that will be commanded through the IEEE 488 bus when using ChartScan s IEEE 488 interface option To use this option an IEEE 488 interface card must be installed in ChartScan s interface slot and the rear panel DIP switch must be properly configured for IEEE 488 Note that all IEEE 488 bus devices including ChartScan when the IEEE 488 interface option is used must have an IEEE 488 bus address The micro switches 4 through 8 on the rear panel DIP switch can be used to assign an IEEE 488 address Switch setting are discussed in IEEE 488 Configuration presented shortly IEEE 488 Pinout GND SRO NDAC DAV
196. e used for Channel Data Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format if it is specified Channel Data is defined as data originating from the High Low Last HLL Registers or the Acquisition Buffer The commands that initiate Channel Data output are the R R U4 U5 and U13 commands However Channel Data may also be output as Engineering Units and Counts Data output formats for command queries will follow the same rules as data input formatting As in the case of data input formats all readings output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is specified However there are only 3 command queries which need to follow the F command format in this fashion They are C L and U8 command queries Note It also should be noted that readings are only converted to the specified engineering units if the associated channel type is a channel that supports those engineering units For example if the specified channel is a volts channel and the engineering units is 0 C the reading will be interpreted as volts not a temperature in C Note When Binary formats are specified the HLL Scan and Block terminator do not apply The following table shows the effect of the Set Data Format F command on readings input output formats for the commands and queries over which it has control Refer to the Data Format section of Appendix C for more examples Reading Formats Engineering Units Counts High Byte Low Byte Low B
197. eady Scan Available Message Available MAV Event Status Register Bit ESB Service Request Bit SRQ Buffer Overrun ey k P All bits in the serial poll status byte register are cleared by either a R command which returns the ChartScan to its power up default conditions or a read of the serial poll status byte register via the Status command U1 The ESB in the Serial Poll Status Register is also cleared by these operations The Command Error Execution Error and Device Dependent Error are also cleared with an Error Query E command Bit Description Location DI01 Alarm DI02 Trigger Detected DI03 Ready DI04 Scan Available DIO5 Message Available MAV DIO6 Event Status Register Bit ESB DI07 Service Request Bit SRQ DIOS Buffer Overrun ChartScan Users Manual Set Clear and Descriptive Information Set when the acquisition system has sensed a valid alarm condition The alarm is cleared when the alarm condition no longer exists Set when the acquisition system has detected the trigger condition and will be cleared when the acquisition is complete or the trigger has been reconfigured Set when the acquisition system is ready to process another command It is cleared when the system is processing a command line This bit should be examined with a serial poll prior to issuing a new command line This allows any detected errors to be traced to the specific command line containing the error If all the setup
198. eation Create Charts button in Chart Setup Wizard s main window After selecting this option you will be using the Display Configuration Setup dialog boxes to create a display from scratch 1 e using a clean slate approach This is method is detailed with an example in the section Manually Creating a Display beginning on page CV 15 CV 50 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Overview Software Reference Overview vxl 1 Program Requirements vxl 1 Installation of ViewXL Add in vxl 1 Menu vxl 2 Toolbar vxl 3 Using the ViewXL Program API vxl 8 An Example Macro vxl 9 ViewXL API Definition vxl 11 ViewXL is a Microsoft Excel Add In that provides setup and data acquisition for personal computers running 32 bit versions of Microsoft Windows The features of Excel and the selected data acquisition server for example ChartView or DaqView combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool ViewXL e Augments Microsoft Excel with data acquisition capability e Automatically converts data to engineering units e Allows multiple data acquisitions obtained using auto rearm to be placed into multiple worksheets e Can import data from previously acquired data files Once the ViewXL add in is installed a ViewXL toolbar and related menu appear in Excel These provide all configuration and data acquisition controls With ViewXL you can obtain automated reports by taki
199. ed by placing a short across the applicable channel Chapter 6 Calibration provides illustrations of various channel shorts After the command has been issued the precision voltage source must remain at its value at least until the trigger LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results Refer to Chapter 6 for more information calibration EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Connect short across applicable channel PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 H17X Calculate offsets for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 EX End Calibration Mode ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 33 Set Scan Interval Acquisition EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where hor m and acq are the normal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form hh mm ss t where hh is hours mm is minutes is seconds and t is tenths of a second 1 Query scan interval selection DESCRIPTION The Set Scan Interval 1 command is used to set one of the following two distinct scan intervals The first is the normal scan interval used when the unit is collecting scans before the start trigger has occurred or after stop trigger has occurred Scans in these two regions are called pre trigger scans and post stop scans respectively The second is the acquisition scan interval used when t
200. ee 1 No connection N A TXD 2 2 RXD RXD 2 2 RXD 2 Receive Data RxD Input a PORAT 3 Transmit Data TxD Output CTS 5 5 GND GND 5 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS RTS 7 7 RTS 4 No connection N A RTS 4 ETA 8 CTS CTS Soe ae 8 CTS 5 Ground Ground Interface Wiring Diagram 6 No connection N A 7 Request to send RTS Output 8 Clear to send CTS Input 9 No connection N A ChartScan to PC Connection RS 232 DB9 Male Cable DB9 Female Pin amp Signal Wiring Pin amp Signal ChartScan Connection RS 422 DB9 Male Cable Wiring Pin amp Signal 1 ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 9 Serial Port Pin Connector Signals for RS 232 422 Applications RxD Receive Data Negative Input This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS 232 or RS 422 device The serial data received is expected to match the word length baud rate stop bits and parity configuration of the particular port The signal is low true RxD Receive Data Positive Input This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS 422 device only The signal is high true TxD Transmit Data Negative Output This pin transmits serial data to an RS 232 or RS 422 device The serial data received is sent with the word length baud rate stop bits and parity configured for the particular port The signal is low true TxD Transmit Data Positive Output This pin transmits serial data to an RS 422 device only The signal is high true CTS Clear To Send Negative
201. eeeeeeeeeeees Configure and arm an acquiSition 2 eceeeeeee eee ee esters View real time display of channel data via the Main Window Save data tor ASK o A eE nets E iia ten ane ae anh etre Launch an independent data viewing application Use remote RS 232 communications by attaching the acquisition device to a modem configured for Auto Answer Main Window See Display Configuration beginning on page CV 12 and Chart Setup Wizard beginning on page CV 48 See Setup Window beginning on page CV 37 See pages CV 29 CV 37 and CV 40 See Data Destination page CV 46 See Acquisition Setup Dialog Box page CV 41 See Main Window beginning on page CV 4 See File page CV 20 and Data Destination page CV 46 See View File Data page CV 18 See Device page CV 27 While using this chapter refer to the Main Window figure and its associated control option table as needed Because of the graphic aspect of the window you should be able to develop a good understanding of the program s capabilities and associated operating techniques within a very short time The following comments apply to the figure and table on the following page e In regard to the control option table presented on the facing page the symbols 8 mouse amp arrow keypads B Page Up Page Down keypads and spacebar are control options that allow you to tab to a field and make changes with the specified control
202. ees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure channels 1 4 as T C type J PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 100 00 01 0 Configure scan interval 00 00 00 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Y100 1000 50X Configure acquisition counts PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 NO N2 X Configure Event Status Register Bit ESB to be set when pre trigger count is satisfied PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 8 0 0X Configure acquisition start trigger is Trigger On Q command stop trigger is Counts 0 Wait for the pre trigger count to become satisfied WHILE AND 32 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL07 I NPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 NO N1 X Configure ESB to be set when acquisition is complete 0 Wait for the acquisition to become complete WHILE AND 32 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL07 NPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Get Buffer Status String PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve the response INPUT A Screen shows 0000001 0001151 0000100 10202 20220047247 93700001000 O22 3230202047247 937 00001050701 Indicates that 100 pre trigger scans were acquired 1000 post trigger scans were acquired and 50 post stop scans were acquired A 60 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix B Configuration Aspects for Programmers Reference Notes Q If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Commands and Appendix D ChartScan Program Example
203. el configuration PRI Ag a C1 16 1 C17 2 Send channel configuration 1 i ll PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4 Get HLL for the new channel configuration ERROR light turns ON PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Instruct the unit to execute its command input buffer Now the unit has its new channel configuration PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 E X Find out what caused the error PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve Error response INPUT A Screen shows E128 Conflict Error due to fact that no channels were configured C is a deferred command when the U4 was executed U4 is an immediate command ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 59 Y Set Counts or Select Blocks Acquisition EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Ypre post When in Normal mode of data acquisition set acquisition counts where pr e stop is the pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and st Op is the post stop count When in High speed single channel mode burst mode set c ount where count is the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Query current acquisition count selections DESCRIPTION Normal Mode When in Normal mode for data acquisition the Set Counts Y command can be used to select a pre trigger post trigger and post stop count to define the size of the acquisition The pre trigger count cannot exceed the memory size but the post trigger count can If the post trigger count exceeds the memory size it is the responsibility of the IEEE 488 cont
204. eld represents the location in the current read block that the end scan occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer unless a post stop count is specified Y command in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event Pointer by the value of the post stop count e Block Status This field represents the status of the current read block If the current read block is not yet completely written then the value of this field will be 00 If the current read block has been completely written and has terminated normally the value will be 01 If however the current read block has prematurely terminated because of user intervention the value will be 02 Note Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se The trigger block numbers referred to in the U6 examples in Appendix C are relative to the read and write blocks respectively U7 Returns the input channel to digital output channel assignments in the form A Achan output for each channel that is currently assigned to a digital output U8 Reads the current configuration settings for each channel configured in the unit Th
205. en polls is about one second With this in mind be aware any event that could trigger an alarm lasting one second or less could be missed and not logged Alarm Log Configuration E Alarm Log File Folder E PROJECT SSCHAR Ts Filename ALARMS LOG i Bone Alarm Log Options M Time Alarm ID I Alarm States Saecmcenecmacens con secesuemcnseenssned T b Show Single Alarm z Delimiter Character P Glenn Ehanmmel W Date Alarm Log Configuration Dialog Box Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 29 From the Alarm configuration dialog box you can define the information that will be saved in the log file Options include the Time and Date when the state change occurred the Alarm number the Channel s that tripped the alarm along with the current reading and the state of the alarm itself or all alarms either 1 or 0 Additionally you can define the character that is used to separate the information in the file This is useful if you want to read the file into a program that presents the information in a tabular format such as Microsoft Excel By using combinations of option settings you can define how the alarm log file is filled If you choose not to save Alarm ID s Alarm numbers in combination with saving All Alarm States your Alarm file will be saved with one line of text each time an Alarm state change is detected during polling The line will contain the optional Time and Date and 32 digits one for each a
206. ent section Meters Configuration Menu Configuration Note For Digital Meters Configure the Digital Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the digital meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection etc Refer to the section Configure Meter Settings for more detail CV 34 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Meter Toolbars The toolbars for the three types of meters are identical with exception that the Digital Meters toolbar does not have a Reset Peak Hold button item C in the following figure Control View SLE Meters Toolbar Buttons Item Name Function A Start Starts meters B Stop Stops meters C Reset Peak Hold Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly Indicator adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters D Stay On Top Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows Push pin Print Sends the meter s display image to connected printer Rows x Columns Opens a small menu with row x column arrangement options Example When the number of meters is 6 the grid options will be 6x1 3x2 2x3 and 2x4 with the first number being the number of rows If you then select 3x2 you will have 3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row G Number of Meters Specifies the nu
207. ents Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge 1 Turn off the power disconnect the analog cables the power line cord and then all other test cables from the interface 2 Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and slide top cover plate free of ChartScan unit Remove the expansion chassis if applicable Memory Module Reserved for Second JP201 Memory Module p A O O Oro Microprocessor Board Not all components shown 3 Locate memory SIMM sockets JP201 and JP202 on the microprocessor board This board is mounted vertically near the center of the ChartScan unit Remove the 256 KB module from JP201 5 Install the applicable memory option according to the following table Memory Option JP201 JP202 CSN MEM1 1 MB Insert a 1MB module CSN MEM4 4 MB Insert a4 MB module CSN MEM8 8 MB Insert a4 MB module Insert a 4 MB module Note For re assembly first reconnect the AC power line next reconnect the analog terminals and then any other cables prior to reapplying power to the entire system 6 Carefully reassemble the ChartScan unit ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 5 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable ChartScan s constants for chassis calibration and the calibration password are stored
208. er On Reset R command During initialization ChartScan 1400 self test performs the following steps e Checks for errors at power up e Checks the flag in the NV RAM to determine if it should power up with factory default settings or a user defined configuration e Loads appropriate registers with corresponding values in NV RAM e Checks a flag to see if alarms should be enabled at power up and if so enables them e Loads channel configuration registers e Loads program sequencer with appropriate channel configurations e Resets computations processor to begin acquiring scans The self test takes approximately 5 seconds to complete after which ChartScan 1400 is ready for normal operation 1 6 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual VI Connect Channel Signal Inputs Connect channel inputs to your signal conditioning cards Each signal conditioning card can support up to 16 Channels With use of the expansion chassis you can have up to 8 signal conditioning cards Depending on the type s of cards used your connections will be made via one or more of the following screw terminal mini plug BNC or safety jack type input connector ChartScan 1400 has eight digital input lines and thirty two digital output lines available on the rear panel DB 50 connector CAUTION _ Do not exceed the 0 0 to 5 3 volts levels described above Exceeding these levels may damage the ChartScan 1400 un
209. erred Deferred Deferred Deferred Immediate Deferred Immediate Deferred Immediate Immediate Immediate Immediate Deferred Immediate O K p x rT HE Set Query Terminator Query Card Data Read Buffered Data Read Last Readings Set Real Time Clocks Set Trigger Configuration User Status Set User Terminator Deferred Set Averaging Weight Deferred Execute Immediate Set Counts Deferred QC lt Type TriggerOnCommand Deferred Flush Acquisition Buffer Immediate Clear Channel Configuration Deferred Restore Factory Settings Immediate Change Calibration Keyword Immediate Adjust Calibration Card Pots Immediate Power OnReset_ Immediate Power Up Settings Immediate Time Stamping Immediate Assign Alarm Output Deferred Alarm Stamping Ceeferred Configure Channels Deferred Select Cards Immediate _Set Relay Make Time Deferred End Calibration Mode Immediate Error Status Query Immediate Set Data Format Deferred Set Burst Mode Frequency Deferred Calibrate Channel Gain Immediate Calibrate Channel Offset Immediate Set Scan Interval Deferred Digital Input Stamping Immediate Calibrate Cold Junction Offset Immediate __ Enter Calibration Mode Immediate Set Trigger Level Deferred SetSRQMask_ Deferred Set Measuring Mode Deferred Set Event Mask Deferred Set Digital Output Immediate Prog
210. ersion number and copyright information Authorization Opens up the Authorization Dialog g Authorization Box From here you can enter a code to enable all ChartView features Enter Authorization Code Featue OV Status Enter the following code to enable all ChartView Pi Disable Chart icy Disable features C3523 D FA6COA Trial period expired Apply Cade Ok Star aW bap inal Authorization Dialog Box Exit Exits the ChartView program CV 20 ChartView 988992 Software Reference When ChartView is started for the very first time there is no default channel configuration file In this case a ChartView Startup dialog box appears providing you with the following four choices Retry Select Device Load File and Exit Program After choosing Select Device a Select Interface dialog box appears allowing you to choose IEEE 488 RS 232 Network or Simulated Instrument For ethernet operation Network must be selected as the device interface Note NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 selection Select Interface Interface Chart View Startup Device Interface No interface selected C EEE 488 C RS 232 C Simulated Instrument Load File Exit Network After the selection has been made when ChartView is shutdown the selected interface device and all channel configuration settings will be automatically saved in a default configuration file Upon the next sta
211. ervals to 1 second 1 Hz PR NT 1 OUTPUT 07 100 00 01 0 00 00 0 3X The T command sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition In this example the start event is an character sent by the controller and the stop event is also an character The auto rearm flag is set to 0 off so that the ChartScan will not re arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete The synchronization flag is also off so the ChartScan will not re synchronize itself to the trigger point when the start event begins When the ChartScan encounters the X command it will be armed and start the collection of the pre trigger data NT 1 OUTPUT 07 T1 1 0 0X The next four lines prompt you to hit a key to trigger the ChartScan When a key is hit the character is sent which is the system s start event NT The ChartScan is collecting pre triggered data and is ready for a trigger PRINT Press a key to trigger the start of Acquisition WHILE I NKEY WEND PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 X While in the post trigger state our application will first check for a scan to be available by serial polling the device and comparing the response with an 8 If a scan is available the R1 command tells the ChartScan to send the oldest scan to the controller ENTER requests the response data from the device QuickBASIC s INPUT command places the retrieved data into the variable READINGS PR
212. ess than or equal to the programmed scan rate then the maximum trigger latency is equal to the programmed scan rate If the scan time is greater than the programmed scan rate the maximum trigger latency is equal to the scan time Trigger Overrun A trigger overrun condition exists if more than one trigger start event or more than one trigger stop event occurs during one trigger acquisition This is flagged and notification is given but no other action is taken The trigger overrun bit in the Error Source Register ESE is set The user may query with the E command the Error Source Register to determine if a trigger overrun has occurred ChartScan User s Manual 958296 C 21 Buffer Overrun ChartScan s internal buffer will wrap around if the controlling computer cannot read the data out of the buffer before it is completely full This situation is called buffer overrun It prevents new data from being lost and keeps the scan rate consistent but it also overwrites the oldest data Although registered as an error depending on the application a buffer overrun may be a part of normal operation For example if a ChartScan unit with 256 Kbytes of memory was configured to scan 16 channels at a one minute interval the buffer would fill and an overrun would occur in about 5 6 days Regardless of how long ChartScan is left unattended after that point it will always maintain the newest 5 6 days of scans There are two cases of buf
213. est is performed each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power up is initiated by the power switch or the Power On Reset R command LED Indications of Error Conditions Error Condition LED Indicators ALARM TRIGGER SCAN ERROR General Hardware Failure O O ON f Flash ROM Invalid for Flash U22 COMM2 ROM Checksum Error for ON Flash ROM Checksum Error for ON Flash Non Volatile RAM Error Dynamic RAM Error Interprocessor COM Error Configuration Error ee ONS O Error Status Query E is used to determine the present error condition After execution of the E command ChartScan will respond with one of several possible error codes as indicated below E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC due to a command syntax error E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO A command parameter was out of range or missing E004 A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with the card type installed E008 A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately calibrated E016 A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger state or when a non expectant trigger event occurs E032 An Open T C Error or Range Error occurs when the hardware c
214. f the cards as part of the system select a number from the range 101 108 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C 0X Select chassis PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 QC X Read chassis calibration factors PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT 2 A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C 5X Select the card 5 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U12X Read back the time date that card 5 was last calibrated PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT 2 A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C 105X Select the card 5 in order to read back the calibration factors as part of the system PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 QC X Read back the system calibration factors of card 5 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT 2 A Note In the above example an expansion chassis is being used thereby allowing an additional 4 card slots Note Card 5 will typically be located in slot 5 however if the optional relay card is used card 5 will be located in slot 6 and signal conditioning card use is limited to 7 cards instead of 8 A 24 958296 ChartScan User s Manual D Set Relay Make Time data where make is the number of 520 833 microsecond intervals DESCRIPTION O O DESCRIPTION The Set Relay Make Time D command allows the user to increase the delay between closing a relay and reading valid channel data The system powerup default is make 6 3 125 milliseconds If common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar reading inaccuracies can result This inaccuracy is due to
215. face users to use a different read command than IEEE 488 interface users The status byte register contains the following active bits Bit Location DIO1 LSBit DIO2 DIO3 DIO4 DIOS DIO6 DIO7 DIOS MSBit 128 Value Description Alarm Trigger Detected Ready Scan Available Message Available Event Status Register Bit ESB Service Request Bit Buffer Overrun All bits in the serial poll status byte register are cleared by either a R command that returns ChartScan to its power up default conditions or a read of the serial poll status byte register via the Status command U1 The ESB in the Serial Poll Status Register is also cleared by these operations The Command Error Execution Error and Device Dependent Error are also cleared with an Error Query E command ChartScan Users Manual 958296 C 17 Bit Location DI01 DI02 DI03 DI04 DIOS DIO6 DI07 DI08 Description Alarm Trigger Detected Ready Scan Available Message Available MAV Event Status Register Bit ESB Service Request Bit SRQ Buffer Overrun Set Clear and Descriptive Information Set when the scanning device has sensed a valid alarm condition The alarm is cleared when the alarm condition no longer exists Set when ChartScan has detected the trigger condition and will be cleared when the acquisition is complete or the trigger has been reconfigured Set when ChartScan is ready to process another c
216. fect on some user defined processes For instance the 75 limit condition and the buffer overrun condition will occur on a fewer number of scans as the number of trigger blocks increases A trigger block becomes defined when the configured trigger start event occurs Once the start event occurs the data within the trigger block including any pre trigger data is available to be read even though the trigger block may not yet be complete Scan data is read and written to the trigger block in a FIFO fashion As the controller requests buffered scan data ChartScan supplies the oldest available scan Once the scan is supplied it is no longer available There is no mechanism which allows jumping around in the buffer or going back to a scan that had already been read by the controller Reading the oldest scan automatically advances the read pointer in the current trigger block so that the next scan if acquired is immediately available Since scans are written into the trigger block sequentially the trigger scan may appear at any location within the trigger block ChartScan will automatically convert these physical scan locations to logical scan locations where the trigger scan is always oriented at location 0 The placement of the trigger scan at the origin facilitates the quick interpretation of the read pointer and gives a frame of reference for other locations within the trigger block All trigger block pointers are relative to the trigger scan From thi
217. fer Function v me h y output channel nk x input channel j m slope Cancel b y intercept Alarm Configuration Columns 1 Low Limit Set alarm low limit 2 High Limit Set alarm high limit 3 Hysteresis A hysteresis value can be set for each channel to avoid a chatter problem 4 Alarm You can assign one alarm number 1 to 32 to a channel Any number of channels can be assigned to the same alarm number A given digital output will be set true 1 1f at least one of the common channels assigned to a single alarm enters an alarm state CV 40 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Acquisition Setup Dialog Box The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file The Acquisition Setup dialog box can be accessed in one of three ways a clicking on the Channel Configuration button item 8 in Main Window figure b clicking on the Acquisition Setup tab from the Channels or Data Destination dialog boxes c using the Setup pull down menu and selecting Acquisition ChartScan NetScan and MultiScan have two modes of data acquisition these are e Normal mode e High speed single channel mode burst mode The mode is selected from the lower left hand portion of the dialog box The follow
218. fer overrun One when only one trigger block is in the buffer and secondly when multiple trigger blocks are in the buffer If a buffer overrun occurs it may be detected by querying the Status Byte STB by either a SPOLL IEEE 488 only or a ULX command IEEE 488 or RS 232 1 IEEE 488 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S IF 8 and 128 128 THEN PRINT Buffer Overrun Occurred ENDI F 2 IEEE 488 and RS 232 PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 U1X PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT 2 S IF S and 128 128 THEN PRINT Buffer Overrun Occurred ENDI F Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block When only one trigger block is in the buffer a buffer overrun will erase the entire pre trigger If the controller was reading pre trigger data from the buffer the next scan read will be the trigger point If no pre trigger was configured or the pre trigger has already been read a buffer overrun will only erase the oldest scan in the buffer If the scan being erased is currently being read the contents of the read scan will be in error If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read operation any further reading must be considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued This can be done by either resetting the buffer with a B command and or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks When more than one trigger block is in the buffer a buffer overrun will erase t
219. fies the terminator which will follow each scan that is output when a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data this terminator will be used to terminate each scan as it is output to the interface This will be true except for the last scan in the block In this case the trigger block terminator will be used to terminate the scan and the block The only query command which requests Acquisition Buffer data is the Read Buffered Data R command block This argument specifies the terminator which will follow each trigger block that is output when a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data this terminator will be used to terminate each trigger block as it is output to the interface This terminator will be in effect during Read Buffer Data R commands It should be noted that the last scan in the trigger block to be output will be terminated by the defined trigger block terminator rather than the scan terminator Each of the above four arguments may be defined with one of the following terminator types where USER is the user defined terminator corresponding to the numeric ASCII value val as defined by the Set User Terminator V command Terminator Type IEEE 488 _ Serial po None None po CRLF EOI TCR ULF po RR po R O f LF CRT EE Ce f FECR gt ee R a E a es Se eee po SERV EON USER po 0 j U
220. file when done converting No Ovensvnte existing files when converting data Ask r Timestamps N Add timestamps to ASCII Text files Note fF the tigger date is not known timestamps will be shown as time relative to the trigger point Data File Viewer JeZView Selected Data File Viewer Cancel File Converter Preferences The File Converter Preferences box provides a means of selecting the file format s that you want to convert the data files to The box offers choices in regard to whether you want a source data file to be deleted upon the completion of a file conversion and whether or not you want to allow existing files to be overwritten without first prompting you that such an overwrite is about to take place In addition to selecting file formats the File Converter Preferences box allows you to add timestamps to ASCII Text Files and on an unrelated note to select a Data File Viewer The view applications are independent of ChartView and are installed separately The application that is selected here is the one that ChartView will attempt to access when you click the lt View File Data gt button from ChartView s main window toolbar j N Reference Note ez View applications include eZ PostView eZ Time View and eZ FrequencyView Users of these applications should refer to the Post Acquisition Data Analysis User s Guide PDF The document can be viewed directly from the data acquisition CD by using th
221. fset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 PGA 3 Gain for positive input PGA 3 Gain for negative input PGA 3 Offset 00000 1 00000 PGA 4 Gain for positive input PGA 4 Gain for negative input PGA 4 Offset gt 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used 00000 1 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used CJ 00000 00000 00000 00000 10 07 23 6 12 23 97 Time and Date last modified Temperature Sensor 4 Offset Temperature Sensor 3 Offset Temperature Sensor 2 Offset Temperature Sensor 1 Offset Refer to the Select Card C command for selecting chassis card only or card chassis information EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C 5X Select card 5 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 QC X Read back the card 5 information NPUT 1 A PRINT 1 A ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 47 R Read Buffered Data Buffer EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Rtype Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where t y pe is the type of data request being made Valid options for t ype are 1 Read the oldest scan currently residing in the acquisition buffer 2 Read the oldest complete trigger block currently residing in the acquisition buffer and 3 Read all the scan data that currently resides in the acquisition buffer IR Query the contents of the data buffer DESCRIPTION The Read Buffered Data R
222. g up to four overlapping channels per chart Regardless of whether you are using the basic ChartView program or ChartView Plus there is a maximum limit of 16 charts per group Multiply and Divide Buttons In addition to reading channel values you can increase or decrease the size of the selected channel s chart This is accomplished with the Multiply 15 and Divide 20 push buttons The Multiply push button effectively increases the size of the selected channel s chart by a factor of two while automatically adjusting the chart s high and low values items 13 and 19 Aside from clicking on the Multiply Divide controls you can use your keyboard spacebar to control this feature once the button 15 or 20 is selected Selection may be with mouse or by tabbing over to the control Making changes to a channel s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of the other channels with the following exception Holding the keyboard s control key down while adjusting either spinner for center item 17 or spinner for units div item 18 causes the parameter change to apply to all channels displayed for the chart not just the currently selected channel display This feature applies to the spinners and keyboard up and down arrow keys but not to the text input Center Control The Center control item 17 changes the value of the selected channel s chart centerline Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of th
223. g which specifications and operating conditions apply You can view the Declarations of Conformity at www mecdaq com legal aspx CE Information page Cautions Notes and Tips Refer all service to qualified personnel This caution symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage under noted conditions Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment damage This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti static mats and wrist straps ESD protective bags and cartons and related procedures This symbol indicates the message is important but is not of a Warning or Caution category These notes can be of great benefit to the user and should be read In this manual the book symbol always precedes the words Reference Note This type of note identifies the location of additional information that may prove helpful References may be made to other chapters or other documentation Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure or help to clarify an issue Tips may include additional
224. gger block is still being acquired the value of this field will be 00 If the current trigger block has been completely acquired and has terminated normally the value will be 01 If however the current trigger block has pre maturely terminated because of user intervention the value will be 02 Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se Trigger block numbers are relative to the read and write blocks respectively The current trigger block always refers to the trigger block that is currently being read For example the current read trigger block is always trigger block 1 Conversely the current write trigger block is always the value of Blocks Available in the Buffer Status String With this in mind look at the following example a of Buffer Status String response The following table describes the fields for the U6 response when the acquisition buffer is empty For ease of reference the previous figure has been repeated 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 r Ya ji a S a 0000000 0000000 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Time Date Time Date Acquisition Buffer Interrogation Example of Buffer String when the Acquisition Buffer is Empty Field Response Implication l 0000000 No trigger blocks available 2 0000000 No scans are available 3 0999999 The current read pointer is undefined 4 00 00 00 000 The trigger time stamp is undefined 00 00 00 5 0999999 The stop event po
225. gs up a configuration pop up menu see Bar Graph Meters figure item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu Note that Meter 3 CH3 in the above figure shows Peak Indicators near the pointer as well as a trend indicator in the upper right hand corner of the meter The items in this window are as follows A Start C Reset Peak Hold E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu These items are discussed in more detail following the description of the Digital Meters Configuration Note for Analog Meters For Analog Meters configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection adding peak hold indicators etc Refer to the section entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 33 Digital Meters Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Digital Meters window to display several channels in numeric format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time KA Chart iew Digital Meters OF x Control View 1 CH1 el Q 40050
226. h MINh SECh TENTHh MONh DAYh YEARh PRINT MID STR VAL LOWS 4 5 32767 44 1 8 HOURI MINI SECI TENTHI MONI DAYI YEARI PRINT MID STR VAL LAST 4 5 32767 44 1 8 END IF NEXT i WE ND ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 13 Using Auto Rearm to Capture Multiple Trigger Blocks using BLK ACQ BAS The following program BLK_ ACQ BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the ChartScan for auto rearm which rearms the unit for another trigger event as soon as the present acquisition has been completed Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper Status is returned WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 2X The Y command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states In this example 1000 scans are taken while in the pre trigger state 20 while i
227. han those before the trigger such as during alarm conditions ChartScan can be configured to start data acquisition on one of many trigger sources The Trigger Configuration T command is used to set the source of the trigger GET Talk etc the trigger start and stop event a pre trigger count and or post stop count if used the direction of the trigger source level if used rising or falling edge and whether the Auto Rearm flag is enabled If the Auto Rearm feature is in use the unit will immediately begin looking for another trigger event once a stop event and post stop event is detected If the feature is not in use a T command must be issued after a stop event before the unit can begin looking for a trigger However using Auto Rearm does not allow the user to change the trigger configuration between triggers the initial configuration will be used until Auto Rearm is disabled To disable Auto Rearm a T command must be issued with the flag set to zero Data will still be available after the T command is issued Refer to the Command Reference section for details In order for an acquisition to take place the unit must have a trigger event and can be assigned a Stop Event This allows different stimuli to begin and end an acquisition Note Ifthe trigger start event is level or alarm at least one pre trigger scan must be programmed to initiate scanning in order for ChartScan to recognize the event External TTL High or Low Level Sta
228. hartv0001 io chartvOO02 io Number of Channels 24 Channels Pa Sit vO Scans in file 100 Pretrigger Rate 1 818182 Drop Down List of Post Trigger Rate 1 818182 Previously Acquired Binary Files Pretrigger Scans 0 Timestamps Relate Channel Information Max Range 3276 7 Min Range 3276 8 Units C Using the Preview Option to View a File Summary The Acquisition Information panel see previous figure right side central section displays a summary of the selected file Included are the number of channels in the file number of data scans in the file pre and post trigger rates in samples per second the number of pre trigger scans and the type of time stamp information supported by the file Time stamp options are None Relative or Rel Abs for both relative and absolute Relative time stamps show the time interval between scans Absolute time stamps show a Date and Time associated with a scan Note For high speed acquisitions the one second resolution of Absolute time stamps may not provide any meaningful information 457 0913 rev 3 0 The Channel Information panel see previous figure right side lower section displays a summary of the channel selected in the channels list The summary shows the maximum and minimum range limits of the channel data and the channel engineering Units When the lt Import gt button is pressed the selected files are opened and read into the Excel workbook In regar
229. has the same effect on the unit as removing and re applying power All data in data buffers and configuration are erased Note Because the R command performs a full power on reset 3 or 4 seconds are required before you can communicate with the unit A total of at least 5 seconds is required before normal operations can take place The IEEE 488 bus commands Device Clear DCL and SDC do not have this effect They clear only the command input buffer the output queue and any pending commands Note Issuing the Power Up Default Settings S1 command and then power cycling the unit or issuing the R command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors for the unit and its slaves however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 RX Restore power on settings to the unit SLEEP 4 Wait 4 seconds to restore communication WHILE and 4 0 Keep checking the serial poll response of the unit until it is ready PRINT 1 SPOLLO7 meaning that bit 4 is asserted NPUT 2 S WE ND 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Power Up Settings System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Smode Specify power up configuration mode Valid options for mode are 0 Power up under last known configuration default 1 Power up under factory default configuration DESCRIPTION With the Power Up Settings S command specifying the mode to be 0 will cause the unit to load its la
230. hat the desired channel is shown If not select the desired channel In the above figure chart 2 is displaying two channels However since CH2 can be seen in the channel selection box it is the currently selected channel If desired we could select the other channel from the selection box at this point Note Compressed ChartView windows will not show 100 of the window s features If you do not see channel selection boxes in the ChartView main window simply use the mouse to expand the window until the channel selection boxes become visible or zoom the desired chart to make it occupy the full window Right click on the chart s display region In this example we are using chart 2 The pop up menu appears In the pop up menu select Edit current channel The Chart Display Configuration Setup dialog box will appear with the selected channel ready for reconfiguration following figure F Chart Display Configuration Setup Close EiT Display er g Group 1 HEA Chart 1 cE Chart 2 Data Type Category TCZolts Units JE Desc Type J TC Channel Settings Display Mode Trace Color Bue Y Max 3 0011 Y Center 9 5033 YMinf oo055 3 BRE f Units Full Scale C Units Division Units Division Chart Display Configuration Setup 988992 Software Reference Main Window Toolbar Each item in the toolbar with exception of Group Select 1
231. he keyboard up or down arrow key d using the page up or page down key If using a control option other than a you may need to select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard s Tab key until the meu select box 1s selected The name of the currently selected group appears in white on a dark background Start Pause and Stop Charts As their names imply these three buttons are used to start pause or stop the charts Pressing pause suspends chart scrolling but does not stop the charting process While pause is pressed the channel region of the main window will continue to display real time values Pressing pause a second time restarts the scrolling action Pressing stop causes the charting process to stop and instantly freezes the channel region at its present values This does not affect the acquisition Scroll Faster amp Scroll Slower i These buttons provide a means of speeding up and slowing the chart s scrolling rate also referred to as chart speed These two buttons do not affect the scan rates of the acquisition device The chart speed item 23 is indicated in the lower right hand corner of the main window as time div There are 14 possible chart speeds as follows 0 1 sec div 1 sec div 10 sec div 2 min div 30 min div 0 2 sec div 2 sec div 30 sec div 5 min div 1 hr div 0 5 sec div 5 sec div 1 min div 10 min div Display i fe Configuration ES The Display Conf
232. he main window to its previous multiple chart viewing status The restore feature can also be invoked by again double clicking in the chart region Allows you to turn the chart s grid limit lines items 13 amp 19 on or off If on you can have the grid lines appear as solid or dots Allows you to select an Absolute or Relative style of timestamp ChartView Toolbar w Toolbar W Timestamps amp Chartspeed W Statusbar Options A Y by Toolbar indicates the toolbar will be visible The absence of the VW indicates the visible toolbar option is not chosen and in this case will not appear on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select the toolbar option 988992 Software Reference Software Reference View continued Timestamps amp A Y by Timestamps amp Chartspeed indicates the options are selectable and Chartspeed Statusbar Options visible The absence of the Y indicates the timestamp chartspeed option is not chosen and therefor not visible on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select this option A Y by Statusbar indicates the Status Message Box and Status LEDs are visible items 22 and 24 page CV 5 The absence of the V indicates the status bar will not be visible on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select this option Option Settings Option Settings includes three separate dialog boxes accessible by tabs as indicated in the following screen capture
233. he oldest trigger block If the block being erased is currently being read the block read will be terminated and the read pointer will be advanced to the start of the next block If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read operation any further reading must be considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued This can be done by either resetting the buffer with a B command and or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Real Time Clock ChartScan has a programmable battery backed real time clock with a resolution of ImS The clock is initially set to Eastern Standard time U S The time and date are used to tag the trigger point in each trigger block and HLL register This data is incorporated into the Acquisition Buffer Open Thermocouple Range Error Checking ChartScan has built in facilities for detecting open thermocouple and range errors one in hardware and two in software e In hardware the thermocouple cards contain circuitry to detect open thermocouples e n software software detection routines exist to sense if the input a d maximizes and to detect if an input exceeds the linearization limits If an open thermocouple range error is detected the Error Status Register will be set denoting that this particular error condition exists The offending channel s can be determined by reading their values If a channel is in error its value will be
234. he pdf is included on your Data Acquisition CD rev 8 1 2 and higher A RS 232 to USB Interface Adapter Kit p n CA 232 USB KIT available from Measurement Computing is required for USB connection ChartScan User s Manual 949091 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 1 Introduction ChartScan 1400 is an easy to use advanced hybrid data recorder that combines the desirable features of common paper based strip chart recorders with the latest PC based data acquisition technology In addition to chart and spreadsheet displays the device can display data in any of three meter formats digital analog and bar graph ChartScan 1400 requires no external signal conditioning or use of multiplexers The unit can measure up to 64 differential input channels and can easily be expanded up to 128 channels with the use of an expansion module The unit is well suited for temperature and voltage measurements requiring channel to channel isolation This isolation is made possible by the use of individual relays on each of the 64 channels The unit provides 500 V isolation for voltage inputs and 200 V isolation for thermocouples The instrument scans at a rate of up to 147 channels per second and includes a single channel burst mode for digitizing waveforms at rates up to 20 kHz Measurements include isolated temperature from thermocouples DC volts AC volts waveforms ChartScan 1400 includes ChartView a software program which provides a Win
235. he programmed scan rate Note To enable alarm monitoring prior to the trigger event or to have an alarm condition serve as a trigger event you must first configure the acquisition with at least one pre trigger scan Alarm Set Points Each channel has an associated high and low set point Set points are defined as part of a channel configuration using the C command These set points create the envelope that constitutes the channel s normal operating range If the channel value goes above the high set point or below the low set point the channel is in the alarm state If any channel configured by the C command is in the alarm state a system alarm event is posted For example if the trigger source is on Alarm the alarm event would cause a trigger Digital Alarm Outputs If desired you can use an alarm event for a specific channel as a stimulus for a digital output signal TTL on ChartScan s rear panel This signal can be used to set off an audible alarm user supplied or to inform another device of the alarm condition Thirty two digital alarm outputs are available on ChartScan s rear panel Although analog input channels on the expansion chassis can be used to stimulate alarms no digital output signals are available on the expansion chassis Regardless of the number of expansion chassis connected no more than 32 digital alarm outputs are available The Assign Alarm Output A command may be used to assign alarm condition
236. he same and the data on the worksheet will be updated e Append to current worksheet Places data from all files end to end on the current worksheet Files are separated by a single blank row Make sure your versions of Windows and Excel are capable of supporting the number of rows of data that will be produced Import Files The Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files dialog box allows you to open and view data files that were previously acquired by one of the supported data acquisition software programs These include DaqView WaveView LogView ChartView Binary Personal DaqView DagExplorer and data files that were saved by the DaqCOM data acquisition component Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files Ea Help Import Exit Files Datatype Unknown i T Previews Semer vata kiles The Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files Dialog Box As it appears when ViewXL is running independent of a data acquisition application When the ViewXL Add In is running independent of a data acquisition application then the Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files dialog box opens with an appearance similar to that shown in the above figure You can use the Browse feature to locate data files that are accessible to your PC Simply press the lt Browse gt button select the desired file and then press the lt Open gt button Note The files listed are the data descriptor files Descriptor f
237. he switch 115 VAC Selected 230 VAC Selected Voltage Selection Switch shown in both possible positions 4 As indicated in the figure press down on the switch to change the setting from 115 VAC to 230VAC or to change the setting from 230 to 115VAC you press up on the switch 5 Replace ChartScan s cover plate and secure with screws 6 Add anew sticker or tag stating the newly selected voltage ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 3 Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse Fuse 1 2A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 105 125V power line or 1 4A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 210 250V power line CAUTION Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used Replace the AC power supply fuse as follows l 2 3 4 5 6 Turn ChartScan s power to OFF Open the fuse drawer on the rear panel Remove the fuse Ensure correct rating of replacement fuse Install replacement fuse If you changed the value of the fuse due to a new voltage selection replace the spare fuse with a fuse of the new value Close the fuse drawer until it snaps into place Fuse
238. he unit is acquiring scans after the start trigger has occurred but before the stop event has occurred Scans in this region are referred to as post trigger scans The norm and acq arguments represent the normal and acquisition scan intervals respectively The scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current unit configuration will allow This is referred to as fast mode Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying 00 00 00 0 as the argument for the desired scan interval When the I command is interrogated by the unit the unit will determine by examining its current channel configuration if it is capable of running at the desired interval If the unit determines that it is not capable of running at the desired interval it will automatically enable fast mode for the interval s in question It will also issue a Conflict Error to inform you that it is not running at the user specified interval The scan interval can be programmed from a 24 hour period to a 0 1 second period in increments of 0 1 second If a scan interval of zero is programmed the interval will default to fast mode Likewise if a scan interval is programmed less than the unit is capable of running at the interval will default to fast mode EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 101 00 00 0 Set normal scan interval to once every hour and 00 00 00 0X acquisition interval to fast mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 1 X Query the current scan intervals PRI
239. hod Using a T C Calibrator Simulator is not recommended due to possible transient effects which can cause erroneous readings T C Calibrator Thermocouple T C wire and subminiature plug connector T Type T C wire is recommended see required specifications on page 6 2 Note See figures Cold Junction Calibration Equipment Setup and Verification of Calibrated Temperatures The cold junction calibration applies only to thermocouple cards CSN14 TC P The figure on the next page Cold Junction Calibration Equipment Setup represents the setup for a T C card in slot 1 In this example channels 3 6 11 and 14 must be used for the cold junction calibration The following table indicates channel numbers applicable to the T C card in each of the eight possible card slots Unit S Main Chassis bottom slot Expansion Chassis Option 67 70 75 78 83 86 91 94 99 102 107 110 8 top slot 115 118 123 126 CAUTION when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause x Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note The Cold Cell Simulator in the following figure shows a special connection box attached to it This connection box which can be easily made is not part of the cold cell device 6 18 Calibration 959096 ChartScan Users Manual T Type T C Wire and subminiature plug T C Card in Main Ch
240. hould only be performed by a qualified metrology lab If necessary contact the factory for assistance The Enter Calibration Mode K command places the unit into Calibration Mode While in Calibration Mode the unit may be calibrated using any of the defined calibration commands In addition all other commands are valid during Calibration Mode However if the unit is not in Calibration Mode none of the defined calibration commands are valid and an error condition will be generated if any of these commands are issued The K command requires a pre defined keyword as a parameter This keyword must match the existing keyword definition in order to enter Calibration Mode If the keyword is not correct Calibration Mode will not be entered and no calibration commands will be processed Note If the keyword becomes lost or forgotten a new keyword can be issued with the K command Note Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed calibration instruction EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode with the keyword 12345 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U2X Check for keyword error PRINT 1 ENTERO7 I NPUT 2 C Get the Calibration Status Register IF C AND 16 THEN Is there a keyword error PRINT ERROR NVALID KEYWORD HALT If so stop execution ENDI F Connect short across applicable channel PRINT 1 OUTPUT10 H17X Calculate offset for card 2 Wait for command to complete Wait until trigger LED stops flash
241. how Trend Indicator 2 CH 2 a ae T Show Peak Hold Indicators 3 CH4 ou Limits All None Properties Cancel Apply A _None_ Meters Configuration Wenu Scale Limits amp Misc Dialog Boxes Meters Extension Dialog Box Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes Configuring a Meter 1 Bring up the desired meter group Bar Graph Analog or Digital Place the mouse cursor over the meter you desire to reconfigure 3 Click on the right mouse button A Meters Configuration Menu similar to that in the above figure will appear Note The Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters 4 Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu 5 Ifa dialog box is required for example to change a limit simply enter in the new value in the appropriate parameter box and press Apply or OK Pressing Apply implements your changes but keeps the dialog box open allowing you to make additional changes Pressing OK implements your changes and closes the dialog box The following table and the preceding figure serve as a quick reference to meters configuration CV 36 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Configure Meter Settings Function Descriptions JE Function Description Select Channel Select a new channel for display The selected channel will replace the one curren
242. hysteresis of 0 5 C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C33 34 11 Configure channels 33 and 34 for Volts type 100 mV range and no setpoints PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C65 2 Configure channel 65 for T C type K with no setpoints PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Execute the above configuration The unit is now scanning the above configuration PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U13X Get the last readings of configured channels PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 23 C Select Card Calibration EXECUTION SYNTAX C card Select the card from which subsequent QC and U12 interrogation will retrieve information Without optional Relay Card Valid options for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 2 3 or 4 Selects the card in corresponding slot of the main unit with 1 being the bottom slot and 5 6 7 or 8 Selects the corresponding slot on the expansion chassis with slot 5 being the bottom slot of the expansion chassis With optional Relay Card Installed installs in slot 1 Valid options for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 selects card in slot 2 2 selects card in slot 3 and so on with 7 selecting the card in slot 8 and no card 8 available DESCRIPTION Using the Select Card C command selecting a number from the range 1 8 for the parameter card will cause subsequent QC commands to return the calibration factors of the cards by themselves To return the calibration factors o
243. ice Request Enable Register The service request enable register controls which bits of the status byte register are to be reflected in the Request for Service and Master Summary Status bits of the status byte register As shown in the figure on page C 14 the bits of the status byte register are logically ANDed with the corresponding bits of the service request enable register The resulting bits are logically ORed together to form the master summary event status bit MSS in the status byte register and to control the request for service RQS bit in that register The service request enable register does not affect the status byte register it only affects the MSS and RQS bits of the status byte register The event status enable register is set and interrogated with the Mn command 958296 ChartScan User s Manual IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response The Serial Poll Status Byte is sent when a serial poll SPoll command is received over the IEEE488 bus from the active controller Although these bits are always set to indicate ChartScan s status they do not generate an SRQ on the IEEE488 bus unless the corresponding enable bit in the Service Request Enable SRE register has been set with the Mn command Below is a description of each bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte Register Bit Location DIO1 LSBit DIO2 DIO3 DIO4 DIO5 DIO6 DIO7 DIO8 MSBit Value o A N gt O 32 64 128 Description Alarm Trigger Detected R
244. iew discusses the ready to use Windows based data logging software that features a strip chart style graphical interface The various windows toolbar buttons and menu items are described and explained ViewXL discusses the ViewXL Microsoft Excel Add In The application provides setup and data acquisition for personal computers running 32 bit versions of Windows The features of Excel and ChartView combine seamlessly to form a powerful data acquisition tool Appendices Appendix A API Commands describes the entire command set for ChartScan Syntax parameters interpretation and error codes are explained Sections on the individual commands include their parameters types typical use related information and a sample program excerpt Appendix B Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation channel and scan configuration triggers alarms and digital I O operation Appendix C Registers Data Formats amp Queries provides information regarding registers data formats status and event reporting and other operation related factors Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control Appendix E Bus States Bus Lines and Data Transfer Aspects provides reference material regarding bus states bus lines and data transfer DIO lines in relation to IEEE 488 and Seri
245. igital input stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 21s 0234 20 0019 4040001 404 0023 60 036 000 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 35 J Calibrate Cold Junction Offset Calibration EXECUTION SYNTAX Calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation of the thermocouple signals where han is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt maxX where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 t ype is the thermocouple channel type t emp is the reference temperature currently being applied to the selected channel with the form nnn n in degrees C DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset J command is used to calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation of the thermocouple signals Each thermocouple input channel has associated with it one of these temperature sensors Although calibrated at the factory these temperature sensors are subject to component aging which may affect their accuracy over time The function of the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset J command is to allow the adjusting of the internal firmware to compensate for the affects of component aging Since there are 4 cold junction temperature sensors as
246. iguration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box This box will also be displayed if a Create Charts Manually is selected during use of the Wizard Chart Setup program b you select Setup from the Chart pull down menu c you right click on the chart region in ChartView s Main Window Note If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration the current group will be selected in the display configuration tree When you first click on the Display Configuration button a Display Configuration Setup box appears A display region shows the configured structure of the groups charts and channels From this box you can select the number of charts to be assigned to a specific group With the use of the mouse cursor you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing In addition to the text presented in the following sub sections Normal Edit and Manually Creating a Display you can refer to the following for related information In this chapter Chart Setup Wizard provides information on the use of Chart Setup Wizard for the set up of groups charts and channels A Reference Note For the very first display setup or when the configuration file has been deleted you will need to use Chart Setup Wizard Chart Setup Wizard information begins on page CV 48 The method you use to access the Display Configuration Setup window makes a difference When you use the toolbar button or the pull down menu s
247. igure channels and alarms the Data Destination dialog box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data select an Excel or binary format TXT or IOT respectively and to select optional Time Date and or Alarm Stamps to be included in the data if desired You can tab back and forth from each one of these dialog boxes to the other View File Data If a data file exists clicking the View File Data button will bring up an independent view program if such an application has been installed eZ PostView is an example of a view application If you have more than one view application installed you can select the one you want to access via the File Converter Preferences dialog box following figure The Converter Preferences dialog is opened from the Data Destination dialog box as discussed on page CV 43 a File Converter Preferences x Data File Ext Header File Subdirecton O ASCII Test Spreadsheet TT ASCII i DADISP DAT HEL DADISP 5 DASYLab DOF DASYLab OY MATLAB MAT DSC Matlab E Posiew lOT IO Postview E Srap M aster SMA DAT SoM 5 UFF 58 ASCII UNY UnvASCII gt Delete the source data file when done converting No Ovenvnite existing tiles when converting data Ask Timnestamnps i Add timestamps to ASCII Text files Note If the tigger date it not known timestamps will be shown az time relative to the trigger point This field indicates the Data File
248. iles contain information about their associated binary data files At this point it is the descriptor that you are selecting not the actual binary data file After selecting a compatible descriptor file select the data type of the file from the drop down list see the following figure Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files Browse Help Import Files Schan DSC Data type Unknown T Preview Unknown Chart view Davie Logview h pDagqview Wave view Server Bata Piles Dag loom DagExplorer Selecting a Descriptor File and a Compatible Data Type exists a possibility that an Unknown file may be identified as the wrong data type and 9 If you do not know the data file type you can select Unknown from the list However there produce undefined results vxl 6 ViewXL 989092 Software Reference 989092 If the ViewXL Add In is running while connected to a data acquisition application e g ChartView or DaqView then the lt Server Data Files gt button is enabled as indicated in the following figure This button brings up the File Open dialog that has been initialized to display the sub directory when the currently active acquisition application server stores its data files The Data Type selection is disabled and is preset to the data type of the running server Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files Ea Server Data Files Browse Help impart Exit Files Preview Data
249. ility Calibration Status Register CSR Indicates error conditions during calibration Error Source Register ESC Indicates general error conditions with the unit Event Status Register ESR Indicates special events that have occurred in the unit Status Byte Register STB Indicates critical operation events Mask Registers You can use the following two mask registers to configure the status and event reporting registers The mask registers are Event Status Enable ESE A mask for the Event Status Register ESR Service Request Enable SRE A mask for the Status Byte Register STB The status registers CSR ESC and ESR are Read Clear Only registers they may only be read and cleared by the controller The read operations on these registers is a destructive read This is because it clears the register as itis read These registers can only be written to by internal ChartScan operations The STB status register is a Read Only register it can only be read by controller The STB register can only be cleared or written to by the internal processes of ChartScan The mask registers ESE and SRE are Read Write Clear registers they can be written and cleared as well as read by the controller Register Chart Status and Event Reporting N Registers Command Type Write Clear _Register_ Access Read CSR Read Clear Calibration Status ESC Read Clear E E Error Source ESR Read Clear UO UO Event Status S
250. in an acquisition to 122 due to hardware constraints If noise resulting from AC voltage line pick up is not a problem you can set the system to average 1 2 4 or 8 line cycles per channel for faster scanning throughput high speed multiple channel application For example if the unit is configured to take 1 sample per channel it will scan 147 channels per second Note In regard to AC voltage measurements ChartScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle For this reason sampling weights less than 32 can yield incorrect results To use the Normal scan mode for high speed multiple channel applications when noise filtering is not needed use the M and W commands or use ChartView Example Select normal mode W 1 Select 1 sample over which to average Note The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following 2 4 or 8 Reading inaccuracies can result if common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar This is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between channels Settling time is defined as the time measured to a point at which a transient voltage value is within a specified percentage of the final voltage value Settling time is usually measured in nanoseconds To eliminate these inaccuracies the settling time can be increase with use of the D command as described
251. inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between channels To eliminate these inaccuracies the settling time can be increased using the D command as shown in the example below EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M 0X Select Normal mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 W 32X Select number of samples 32 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 D 12X Set Relay Make Time 12 6 25 milliseconds PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 YO 10 0X Setup to read 10 past trigger scans PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 360 1X Enable channels 1 360 for J type thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 TI 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Trigger unit and collect scans ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 25 E End Calibration Mode Calibration EXECUTION SYNTAX LE Terminate Calibration Mode DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation To use this command the unit must be in Calibration Mode The End Calibration Mode E command is then used to take the unit out of Calibration Mode Once this command has been executed the unit will no longer be in Calibration Mode and the Enter Calibration Mode command K must be issued to re enter Calibration Mode Chapter 6 Calibration contains additional information EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Apply precision voltage PRIN
252. information for the operation of a specific acquisition system is included in one line this bit also indicates when all processing is done and the X command is completed This ensures that the acquisition system is done processing all state changes before initiating any further activity Set when at least 1 acquisition scan is available in the acquisition buffer to be read Cleared when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read Set when the output queue is not empty It is cleared when the output queue is empty This bit reflects whether any command responses are still in the output queue Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status Register ESR ANDed with their equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable ESE register If this bit is set at least one bit in the ESR is set and has its corresponding enable bit in the ESE set The status command UO can be issued to read the ESR See the following for more information on ESR and ESE Set when the acquisition system is requesting service It is cleared when an SPOLL is performed Set if a buffer overrun occurs It is cleared when the buffer becomes empty by either reading out the contents of the buffer or performing a Reset B of the buffer 958296 Using Status Reporting Registers C 20 As mentioned earlier the status reporting registers are organized in a hierarchical structure with the lower level registers containing more general information
253. ing Apply precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUT10 G17 1X Calculate gain for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage PRINT 1 OUTPUT10 G17 1X Calculate gain for card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 EX End Calibration Mode ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 37 L Set Trigger Level EXECUTION Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed where han is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 evel is the level against which the readings are tested to determine if the level has been exceeded hyst is the hysteresis level Query the the current level settings DESCRIPTION The Set Trigger Level L command simply sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed The Set Trigger Configuration T command should be used to configure whether the level condition should be tested for going above the specified level or below the specified level Note This command is only valid for trigger start stop events of T4 and T5 The parameter level is the value which if exceeded by going above or below it as defined should generate a trigger event The parameter hyst is the hysteresis value that with level is used to test whether the level condition still persists The level condition will persist until the channe
254. ing figure represents a screen capture with normal mode selected Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup amp cquisition Setup Data Destination Event Configuration Trigger Channel Value 7 Stop Count from trigger Chan E Count 100 Value T Hyst D O Above Below Acquisition Parameters Scan Intervals Scan Courts 1 Pre trigger Eee hie See Oe feposteon Dogg Average weight J2 E Post T rigger o jo jo o C Use One Interval Mode t Normal High speed single channel Burst Mode Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Normal Mode The following figure depicts components of an acquisition The Trigger and Stop Points represent the entries described under the Event Configuration selection in the table on the following page Trigger Scan Pre Trigger Scans Post Trigger Scans Post Stop Scans a hm ee SS lt es v Time Scan Interval A Scan interval B Scan Interval A Stop Event Acquisition Example In the High speed single channel mode the Scan Intervals parameters section is replaced with a High Speed Setup parameters section with boxes for selection of Channel and Scan Rate as indicated in the figure under the heading Burst Mode Operational Issues on page CV 43 Software Reference 988992 ChatView CV 41 In the High speed single channel burst mode all ChartView display functions
255. inter is undefined 6 00 00 00 000 The stop event time is undefined 00 00 00 7 0999999 The end scan pointer is undefined 8 00 The current trigger block is not complete ChartScan Users Manual 958296 B 23 The following figures and table illustrate a case in which an acquisition has been triggered the stop event and end scan have occurred and the buffer contains several trigger blocks 1 2 3 4 6 T 8 W R D AT 0000007 0020567 00000100 12 01 43 100 03 01 97 00000100 12 25 01 300 03 01 97 00000250 01 Read Pointer Scan 100 As each scan is read the pointer p can D Trigger Scan Scan 000 Scan 047 Scan 048 Scan 100 Scan 101 Ca Pe Scan 150 o tee 4 Trigger Block 3 Block 4 Trigger Block 5 Trigger Block 6 Trigger Block 7 JN Pre trigger Scans Post trigger Scans Post stop Scans Time Time Acquisition Buffer Interrogation Trigger Block 1 Response 0000007 0020567 00000100 12 01 43 100 03 01 97 00000100 12 25 01 300 03 01 97 00000250 01l Date Implication Seven trigger blocks are available 20 567 scans are available The current read pointer is at scan number 100 negative 100 The trigger time stamp is defined as indicated The stop event pointer is defined as scan number 100 The stop event time is defined as indicated The end scan pointer is defined as scan number 250
256. ints and the setpoint hysteresis The minimum channel configuration required is a channel type assigned for a single channel or a range of channels The following text describes how to configure the possible channel types for each signal conditioning card accepted by ChartScan and the expansion chassis Alarms are covered later in this appendix ChartScan Users Manual 958296 B 7 CSN14 TC P Configuring Thermocouple Channels Begin configuring input channels by first specifying the channel type When the CSN14 TC P signal conditioning module is used 16 differential thermocouple inputs are provided In configuring thermocouple T C channels all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular T C type Support for B E J K R S T and N 14 and 28 gauge thermocouple types are standard The 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V volts types with and without range error detection are also supported Channel type can be defined using the Configure Channel C command for a single channel or a range of channels Channels not included in the channel scan do not have to be configured The following table highlights channel types for normal use of the CSN14 TC P signal conditioning card O e ee 8 N 14gage 9 N 28gage Thetype parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a thermocouple channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place In addition to channel type ea
257. ion will occur EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 T1 1 0 0X Configure an acquisition with both start and stop trigger being Trigger On command PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Start the acquisition SLEEP 10 Wait 10 seconds to collect data PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 X Stop the acquisition B Flush Acquisition Buffer Buffer The Flush Acquisition Buffer B command will flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer Upon execution of this command all data currently in the acquisition buffer will be deleted and is unavailable to be read This command should only be used when it is determined that the data in the acquisition buffer is no longer needed or may be corrupt Once this command is executed data in the acquisition buffer is irrevocably lost EXAMPLE PRINT 1 SPOLL07 Serial Poll the unit I NPUT 2 S Get the Serial Poll response IF S AND 128 128 THEN Check for Buffer Overrun PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 BX Data may be corrupt flush the acquisition buffer ENDI F 958296 ChartScan User s Manual C Clear Channel Configuration The Clear Channel Configuration C command will clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are configured After this command has been performed channel readings will be not be updated therefore no HLL or acquisition buffer updates will be performed until a new configuration is entered via the Configure Channels C command This command may be
258. ircuitry detects an open thermocouple or when the software detects the A D input has reached or exceeded its linearization E064 Custom Table Error indicates that a Custom Table has been inappropriately defined or has not been loaded properly This error usually occurs because Custom Table is out of memory or the inappropriate specification of the Set Table Entry Pointer W command E128 A Command Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other commands that have been issued or the current configuration This error usually occurs when a command is issued that cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit For instance if the Set Scan Interval 1 command is issued during an acquisition tstart 0 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 G 1 G 2 E G After execution of the Error Status Query most error conditions are cleared Error conditions may also be cleared by issuing a C lear Event Status U0 command to the unit The ERROR light will remain on until an E or UO command is executed to clear the error condition R eference Note If needed refer to Appendix A API Commands for additional information regarding E Error Status Query and U User Status commands 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix H Abbreviations pe bullet symbol and e g SC CA HT o o Horizontal Tab ASCH Control Code asterisk symbol unasserted e g SC Institute of Electri
259. iring and Uploading Acquisition Buffering Acquisition in Instrument and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Prior to acquiring data for saving to disk you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition window accessed through the Setup pull down menu of ChartView s Main Window or through use of the related icon button You can enable the desired channels and assign high and low alarm values from the configuration window Chart channels and or use meters while acquiring data to disk Possible Acquisition States Acquiring and Uploading Acquisition Buffering Acquisition in Instrument and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Prior to using ChartView for charting and or meter use while simultaneously acquiring data to disk you need to configure a display and or meter as well as configure the acquisition Channels from the display setup are automatically enabled You can enable additional channels from the Channel Configuration window for the data acquisition to acquire more data however these additional channels will not change your display setup or the channels being monitored In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not chart or monitor Some of the data acquisition scenarios pertaining to ChartView are as follows 1 Waiting for Trigger Buffer Acquisiton Device Computer System Data is received by acquisition device but not stored Selected channels can be viewed graphically in scrolling
260. is command returns the same information in as the C command except that it returns it for all channels which are configured U9 Read the Digital Inputs This command will read the current state of the digital inputs This function is performed by reading each of the eight digital inputs converting each input to a binary high is 1 and low is 0 and converting that aggregate binary 8 bit number into a decimal number The decimal number is then returned as the response nnn where it has the following form 000 lt nnn lt 255 U10 Queries the installed memory option This command will return the amount of memory installed in Kbytes The possible responses are 00256 256 Kbyte option 04096 4 Meg option 01024 1 Meg option 08192 8 Meg option U11 Queries all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints The response is CCC A CCC A CCC A where CCC is a channel number in 3 didgit format and A is the alarm state with 0 indicating not in alarm state and 1 indicating in an alarm state An example of a response in which channel 1 is the only channel in an alarm state is as follows 001 1 002 0 003 0 U12 Reads the last calibration time date stamp The response is the number sign to distinguish it from other time date stamps appended with the time date of the last calibration For example 12 31 01 20 04 24 93 U13 Queries the last scan read U14 Queries the card type Returns card ID for each card slot
261. is during this state in which ChartScan may be configured to collect Pre Trigger data This may be accomplished by specifying a non zero value for the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command The Pre Trigger count value coupled with the current channel configuration however cannot exceed the total amount of available memory If the Pre Trigger count is set to anon zero value ChartScan will begin sampling Pre Trigger data at the rate specified by the current normal scan interval via the Set Scan Interval command immediately after the Trigger Configuration T command is issued When the Trigger event occurs the Pre Trigger data portion of the Trigger Block will contain the most recent Pre Trigger scans The number of Pre Trigger scans collected will depend upon when the Trigger event occurs If the Trigger event occurs before the number of Pre Trigger scans collected at least equals the specified Pre Trigger c ount the number of Pre Trigger scans will be the number of scans collected to that point Otherwise the number of Pre Trigger scans will be the number specified by the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 11 If it is not desired to collect any Pre Trigger data while in the Pre Trigger state the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command may be set to zero Pre Trigger data may not be accessed while ChartScan is in the Pre Trigger state The Pre Trigger data f
262. is turned On or Off from the View pull down menu Time Stamp can be absolute real time or relative Absolute time is based on your computer clock whereas relative time starts at 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds and then continues timing in increments relative to the Chart Speed 23 The Absolute or Relative time stamp style is selected from the Chart pull down file Status Message Box The Status Message Box 22 informs you of the status of the data acquisition device Several sample messages appear below Sample Status Messages Attaching to device Trigger device Setting acquisition parameters Setting channel configuration Acquisition active Updating active Setting the acquisition parameters Acquisition active No updating Charting Waiting for trigger Chart Speed Chart Speed 23 consists of a time per division value that can be changed using the faster rabbit button or slower turtle button Fourteen possible chart speeds are as follows 0 1 sec div 1 sec div 10 sec div 2 min div 30 min div 0 2 sec div 2 sec div 30 sec div 5 min div 1 hr div 0 5 sec div 5 sec div 1 min div 10 min div Status LEDs ChartView s Main Window contains five virtual LEDs item 24 for conveying the state of the system Each of the five indicators is labeled on the main window These indicators are Initializing Indicates ChartView is configuring the data acquisition instrument Charting Indic
263. isplay configuration does not change the existing channel and alarm configuration It only changes how the chart groups charts and channels will be displayed was previously discussed see page CV 14 Display Configuration Setup Es mon orn aon EFF OF 10H IOFF cA Display a i El Group 1 Units Full Scale SEH Chart 1 C Units Div Type J Units IE Trace Color Blue Y Max 100 EB Y Center 50 al YMin 0 l Units Division 17 59 EB Select method of adjusting channel setup Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 988992 ChartView CV 17 Remember you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor Channel Configuration The Channel Configuration button brings up the Setup Window with one of three tabbed dialog boxes displayed Acquisition Setup page CV 37 Channel amp Alarm Setup page CV 37 or Data Destination page CV 43 The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file The Channels amp Alarms dialog box is used to conf
264. it in a way not covered by the warranty Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL loads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0 0 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to the connectors ground pins The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs inputs and grounds associated with the DB50 connector Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32 respectively As mentioned above outputs 1 through 16 can be used with a relay card option see note 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 EE d n 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 i Inputs i Grounds 7 Outputs DBS50 Pin Descriptions Output Pin Output Pin No Input Pin No ce oe 12 13 14 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 E a a Note 1 A CSN Relay is available for high current alarm output applications If used this card must be installed in the bottom slot of ChartScan 1400 S main chassis See page 1 4 for installation instructions For more detailed information regarding the card refer to the CSN Relay Card for High Current Digital Output section of Chapter 4 ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 7 VII Start ChartView Configure the System and Collect Data Note First time users should ski
265. ith Alarm Stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A 1X Enable alarm stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 1 es 10234 20 0019 4040001 404 0023 60 005 128 032 066 Alarm Codes 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 005 128 032 066 ae f 1 Convert from decimal number to 8 place binary 005 128 00000101b 10000000b 032 00100000b 066 01000010b 2 Align binary digits with alarms 1 through 32 as follows 00000101 10000000 00100000 01000010 87654321 i 16 32 31 26 25 Alarm Numbers p 32 alarms total 3 1 corresponding alarm ON 0 corresponding alarm OFF How to Decode Alarms ChartScan Users Manual 958296 B 17 Digital Input Stamping I Digital Input Stamping allows you to see whether a digital input was active or inactive at the time of the scan This is accomplished by a digital input ON 1 or OFF 0 code appended to the scan in real time Digital Input Stamping can be enabled with the 1 command and disabled with the 0 command Note that there are 8 digital inputs Note Digital Input Stamping is not valid in high speed single channel mode burst mode Examples of command follow Without Digital Input Stamping default PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 1 0X Disable digital input sta
266. ition 1 Connect a harness to the CSN14 HV S card and to the calibrator Refer to the following figure Twisted Pair to Hi V and S i A 100 pF Film Type f Capacitor E Twisted Pair to Lo V and S Banana Plug Solder Harness for CSN14 HV S Calibrator Voltage and Sensing Connections Harness and Connections for Gain Calibration of CSN14 HV S Card 6 16 Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual 2 Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each CSN14 HV S card see following table and verify with a digital multimeter Requirements for both devices are specified in Required Equipment Volts DC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Note In the slot columns the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding the X assigns the voltage value e g G1 20X means Calibrate Gain for channel 1 2 5 V 3 After each calibration type U2X and check for a return of U128 to confirm no errors Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 4 After completing the gain calibration of all cards t
267. ition Buffer to the Output Queue where it waits until the controller initiates transfer Note The request may will not be fulfilled if either 1 no channels are configured or 2 the amount of scan data requested is not available If either of these is true a Conflict Error will be posted The R1 and R3 commands require that at least one scan be available and the R2 command requires that at least one complete trigger block be available The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte STB Register can be used to determine whether or not the Acquisition Buffer is empty This bit is set when at least one scan is available in the buffer The Buffer Status String U6 command may also be used to retrieve more detailed information about the state of the Acquisition Buffer The following are simple examples to illustrate the uses and effects of all three R command types Note Although not mentioned prior to these examples the responses to all queries U6 R1 R2 etc can be configured with specific field separators and response terminators For detailed instructions on setting query terminators refer to the Q command description in Appendix D The R1 command will read the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block For instance PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000006 0020216 00000100 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 0
268. ition system Four of the columns On Type Label and Units allow blocks of cells to be selected and altered at the same time Clicking on one of these column headers selects the entire column When a cell is selected the message box reveals a note and often a related pull down list In the following figure the cell for channel Type has been selected This caused the CHOOSE TYPE gt message to appear along with the type pull down menu Depending on the column you can make changes to the information contained in the cell by either of the following methods e double clicking the cell with the mouse e highlighting the cell and typing in the new value or label e selecting from a list e using copy Ctrl C and paste Ctrl V functions Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 37 Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters 0K CHOOSE Ty PE gt J Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Alarm Configuration Channel Configuration ha 0n 00054 00 JJ JCH E 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 1 2 4O0n 00050 00 J CH2 cE 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 2 3 On 00054 40 J CH3 C 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 3 4 j n 00051 40 J CH4 E 3276 60 3276 60 is 6 470n 00053 20 J CHS C 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 Tejon 00053 80 J CHE E 327660 327660 ci J C z On 00050 00 CH 3276 60 3276 60 DAN EI Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Channel and Alarm Setup Button Des
269. l readings no longer exceed the level as specified Further in order to come out of the level condition the channel readings must not exceed the aggregate of the level and hysteresis values The format for the level and hyst arguments follow the rules for readings input defined under the Set Data Format F Command and in the Data Format section of Appendix C EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Set the engineering units format to be degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 L1 100 0 10 0X Set the level channel to be channel 1 at a level 100 0 C with a hysteresis of 10 0 C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 L X Read the current level setting PRINT 1 ENTERO7 The screen shows L001 0100 0 0010 0 LINE INPUT 2 L PRINT L PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 74 5 0 0X Set the unit to start on channel going above the level and to stop on the channel going below the level A 38 958296 ChartScan User s Manual M Set SRQ Mask System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Use the IEEE 488 Service Request SRQ mechanism to inform the IEEE 488 bus controller of certain conditions where mas k is in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed from the following conditions 000 Power on default mask value 008 SRQ On Scan Available 001 SRQOnAlarm 016 SRQ On Message Available 002 SRQ On Trigger Event 032 SRQ On Event Detected 004 SRQ On Ready 128 SRQ On Buffer Overrun M Query the SRQ mask
270. larm set to either O or 1 The left most digit is Alarm one and the rightmost is Alarm 32 Note that you cannot choose to save channel information if you have not checked the Alarm ID s checkbox The following example shows what the Alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected 1 21 10 PM 01 29 03 1 21 11 PM 01 29 03 1 21 13 PM 01 29 03 1 21 14 PM 01 29 03 00000000000000000000000000000000 01000000000000000000000000000000 11000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 If you choose to log Alarm ID s and multiple Alarm state changes are detected during a single poll multiple lines of text will be saved in the log file one for each alarm that had a state change By examining the optional Time and Date information you can identify which lines in the Alarm log are associated with Alarms that were detected during a specific polling event If you have Alarm ID s enabled you can also choose to log Channel information The channel information contains the channel label and the current reading associated with the channel The following example shows what the alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected 1 39 46 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 01 CH1 68 72 1 1 39 46 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 02 CH3 68 54 1 1 40 11 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 0O1 CH1 73 22 0 1 40 12 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 0O1 CH1 86 36 1 1 40 27 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 0O1 CH1 71 42 0 1 41 10 PM 01 29 03 Alarm 0O1 CH1 69 98 CH2 71 24 O0 mane Once an alar
271. lect method of adjusting channel setup aii Display EH Group 1 Units Full Scale C Units z Div Type J Units E Trace Color Blue Y Max 43 06 E Y Center 4567 gt Y Min 33 93 EB Units Division T242 E Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 ChartView and ChartView Plus data channels can operate in one of two modes Units Full Scale or Units Div The mode is selected by radio button Units Full Scale When Units Full Scale is selected as depicted in the above figure you can alter Y Max and Y Min These are the upper and lower limits of the channel as they will appear on the chart when the channel is selected When you change either parameter Y Center and Units Division are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units Division while Units Full Scale is selected You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its full scale setting across the chart Units Div When Units Div is selected you can alter Y Center and Units Div Y Center is the centerline value of the chart when the channel is selected Units Div is the vertical value of on chart grid increment When you change Y Center or Units Div Y Max and Y Min are automatically adjusted You can
272. lic Function vxlIsAcquiring As Boolean This function returns True if the Server is Armed and acquiring data Public Function vxlGetAcqFiles ByRef sArray As String As Boolean This function gets the names of the files that have been acquired by the Server If the Function returns True there are files that have been acquired The sArray argument is an undimensioned string array On return the array will be dimensioned and filled with the names of the acquired data files Note If the option to delete data files after reading them into Excel is checked the file names returned by this function call may have already been deleted The function can be used as follows Dim i As Integer Dim Array AS SEELAG If VIEWXL Interface vxlGetAcgFiles sArray Then For i LBound sArrray To UBound sArray Process Files sArray 1 Next EndIf Public Function vxlIsServerRunning As Boolean This function returns True 1f the Server is currently running Public Sub vxlUpdateViewXL This method synchronizes the ViewXL Menus and Toolbar with the current state of the Server This is not normally needed if an acquisition has been started from the ViewXL interface However if an acquisition has been started from the Server application this call can be used to update the ViewXL interface The following example demonstrates the use of this and other API functions Check if the Server is running If Not VIEWXL Interface IsServerRunning Then Beep a
273. lls below 75 of its capacity Set on power on or system reset R Event Status Enable Register The event status enable register controls which events if any are to be reflected in the status byte register As shown in the following figure the bits of the event status register are logically ANDed with the corresponding bits of the event status enable register The resulting bits are logically ORed together in the status byte register Note that the event status enable register does not affect the event status register it only affects the ESB bit of the status byte register The event status enable register is set and interrogated with the Nn command 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Status Byte Register eb ya a T Q oo b d E oO Cc DO Ww 0 O 2 amp D z T 9 Cc Cc O O x OF gt W 5 Qu gt LL 2 ov O Q o Oo OE O x Oo J 5 a NIO W AQ O o xt Event Status Register U0 amp Logical ANDed Event Status Enable Register Nn N Fa amp T gt Alarm 5 14 O Y oc 7 6 leselmav 3 2 1 o Status Byte Register AND OR Logical Relationship of Event Status Enable Register to Event Status and Status Byte Registers The acquisition device sets the Message Available bit MAV in the Status Byte Register to determine if data can be read by the controller This is the only status reporting register which requires RS 232 inter
274. lot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Note In the slot columns the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding the X assigns the voltage value e g G1 1X means Calibrate Gain for channel 1 50 mV 3 After each calibration type U2X and check for a return of U128 to confirm no errors Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error V132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range V144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 4 After completing the gain calibration of all cards type EX to end the calibration mode 5 Type U2X to confirm calibration mode is disabled A return of V000 confirms this Note You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following C 1X QC for slot 1 You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry similar to the following B to clear the buffer C1 1X to addresses the channel this example is for slot 1 channel 1 T1 1 0 0X X to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes X starts acquisition U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Note that X can be used to start or stop the acquisition ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 15 Gain Calibration of High Volts Ca
275. m Alarm Alarm Alarm State State State State Alarms and Set Points Set Point Hysteresis B 28 To avoid threshold transition problems a hysteresis value can also be programmed After the alarm set point is exceeded the signal must drop below the high set point or above the low set point by the hysteresis value before the alarm is reset For example assume a channel has alarm set points of 100 and 100 and a hysteresis of 10 In this case ChartScan would remain in an alarm condition until the set point fell below 90 or rose above 90 depending on which of the two set points triggered the alarm Unwanted Transitions High Set Point Relationship Between Alarm Set Point Hysteresis and Unwanted Transitions 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Digital I O Operation As shown in the DB50 pinout in the Installation and Configuration section ChartScan has digital I O pins for eight inputs and thirty two outputs see note The digital outputs can be controlled either automatically via the alarm settings or with programming using the Set Digital Outputs 0 command To determine the digital output state use the 0 command With the Set Digital Outputs 0 command you can output a byte for each output bank and specify which output bits should be cleared logic false or set logic true The 0 command will override the digital output states as set by the alarm condition Refer to the Command Reference section of this manual for details
276. m Allowable Input 25V rms Channel to Power Ground Isolation 200 V peak Channel to Channel Isolation 200V peak ChartScan User s Manual 959696 Option Cards 4 3 CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors The CSN14 HV S card contains 16 differential input channels and is for use with safety jack type connectors Each CSN14 HV S card is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of the following three programmable ranges GO GO CO CO GO GCG GE CG GCG GH CG CH CH CH GE GE a 2 5 volt 25 volt and 250 volt CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors Number of Inputs 16 differential programmable by channel for input range Input Connectors Safety Jack Voltage Range Accuracy and Resolution 2 5V 0 02 78 14 uV bit 25 V 0 02 781 4 uV bit 250 V 0 02 7 81 mV bit Digital Filtering Used for AC line cycle noise rejection Selectable off 1 256 samples in a binary count Temperature Coefficient lt 0 01 C Input Impedance 10 MQ typical Input Bias Curren
277. m log file exists log enable can be used to activate the logging process or to rl disable an active log A checkmark v preceding Log Enable indicates that the log is active No checkmark present indicates the alarm log has not been enabled Instrument Error Status ChartView Mo errors Brings up the Device Error Status dialog box This box lists existing error types including invalid command and channel configuration errors Cancel Device Error Status Dialog Box 988992 Software Reference Instrument Brings up the Device System Time dialog box Device System Time OOOO Realtime Clock You can adjust the time and date settings from Hous Min See ah his box m aj aaf a Month Day Year Set Time Date ush elas ee Device System Time Dialog Box Calibration Choosing this selection activates a calibration routine for a connected instrument This routine replaces an earlier independent application known as ScanCal Refer to the Calibration chapter for details 2etup Channels amp Alarms Ctrl b Acquisition Chrl L Data destination Channels amp Alarms Accesses the Setup Window for configuring channels and alarms From the channels amp Ctrl L alarms dialog box you can select the Acquisition Setup and Data Destination dialog boxes Acquisition Accesses the Acquisition Setup dialog box From the Acquisition Setup box you can Ctrl C select the Channels amp Alarms dialog box as well as the Dat
278. mand Verify calibrated temperature using one of the following three options Note related figure on following page Cold Cell Method Connect Cold Cell simulator to the T C card s 4 CJC reference channels and to the DC voltage calibrator as indicated in the following illustration figure a Adjust the calibrator voltage to match that of the desired test temperature using Voltage to Temperature Reference Tables Verify the channel readings match the test temperature for each of the four CJC reference channels Repeat verification for all T C cards Note The Cold Cell Simulator in figure a shows a special connection box attached to it This connection box which can be easily made is not part of the cold cell device Hot Cell Method Connect Hot Cell simulator to T C card s first CJC reference channel Adjust Hot Cell to obtain desired test temperature and ensure temperature is stabilized Observe channel reading to match test temperature Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels Repeat verification for all T C cards T C Calibrator Method see note Connect a thermocouple calibrator simulator to the first ChartScan or NetScan CJC channel in accordance with the calibrator simulator manufacturer s instructions Certain simulators will require the use of specific type T C extension wire to create a cold junction at ChartScan s or NetScan s input while other simulators require copper wire and reduce the output vol
279. mber of meters to appear on the screen A maximum number of 32 meters can be selected Meter Pull Down Menus The meters windows each have a Control and View pull down menu as indicated by the following figure The functions of these menus can also be implemented by using the toolbar buttons Start wid Number of Meters 1 1 Stop one Rows x Columns z3x 4 Reset Peak Hold Aon stay Un Top 4 Print D 16 32 Custom Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 35 Meters Configuration Menu A meters configuration menu lower left corner of figure will appear when you place the mouse pointer over a meter and click the right hand mouse button The menu allows you to access various dialog boxes for changing parameters for an individual meter or simultaneously for a group of meters The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below Note The Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters Scale Lirit Misc as Cancel High 100 Low 100 Mote These screen images have been condensed Format 0 0 lt gt Select Channel High 100 Low E 00 l set Scale e Meters extension is obtained a T by pressing More gt Show Peak Hold Indicator F Show Limits m Reset Peak Hold Indicator Pe a Meters Scale Limits Misc H T Show Trend Indicator S
280. menu A Note In Closing This completes the tutorial You may continue running ChartView in the simulated instrument mode and try various options to get a better feel for the program Remember while in the simulated instrument mode there are no ChartScan 1400 hardware concerns ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 17 Note 1 18 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual Operational Aspects and Specifications 2 Basic Operational Features 2 1 Data Handling and Triggering 2 1 Software 2 2 Hardware 2 2 Specifications 2 3 Basic Operational Features Basic features of the ChartScan 1400 which pertain to its operation include e Thirty two TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic digital alarm outputs and 8 TTL compatible digital inputs e Two programmable scan rates 1 a programmable scan rate for pre trigger and post trigger sampling and 2 a programmable scan rate for accelerated sampling on event detection e A built in real time clock that synchronizes the acquisition to the time of day and provides time and date stamping for trend analysis Time stamping may be in relative or absolute time e Standard RS 232 interface and optional IEEE 488 interface Connection to computer can also be made via a Hayes compatible modem e 256 Kbytes of memory expandable up to 8 Mbytes If your application must gather large am
281. mode via the pushbutton or DIP switch on older models as applicable 6 4 Calibration 959096 ChartScan Users Manual Calibration Procedure from the chassis using the ejectars Attach clip leads to fa ithe card as shown aa 4 Previous Step Calibration Procedure Dialog Box After the calibration is complete remember to re enable the calibration protection via the unit s pushbutton or DIP switch as applicable ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 5 Manual Calibration Does not make use of ChartView s Calibration Feature Password This section provides information and instruction for performing calibrations without the use of ChartView s calibration feature To perform a manual calibration the calibration mode must be enabled The Enter Calibration Mode K command enables calibration where key word is the five digit keyword or password currently configured for the unit Your scanning unit is shipped with a default password of 12345 This password can be modified by the Change Calibration Keyword K command once Calibration Mode has been entered Calibration mode is ended by executing the End Calibration Mode E command Attempts to execute calibration commands without entry into calibration mode will result in a calibration status error If the password is lost or forgotten a new password can be entered after enabling the calibration mode This mode is enabled by indenting the Calibrati
282. mping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A 1a ee 0234 20 0019 4040001 4040023 60 With Digital Input Stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 1 1X Enable digital input stamping Configure and start an acquisition Request the next scan in the buffer Retrieve it PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X PRINT 1 ENTERO7 INPUT A vont 0234 20 0019 4040001 4040023 60 036 000 The last six digits are the digital input stamping however the last three digits are not used and will always appear as 000 The following explains how to interpret the stamping codes Digital Input Codes 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 Hei ele as J 1 Convert from decimal number to 8 place binary 036 000 00100100 00000000 2 Align binary digits with digital inputs 1 through 8 as follows 00100100 00000000 Digital Inputs 87654321 Lo Not Used ON ON 3 Determine the status of the digital inputs as follows 1 corresponding digital input is ON 0 corresponding digital input is OFF Thus in this example digital inputs 6 and 3 are ON How to Decode Digital Inputs Also see Digital Input command in Appendix A B 18 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Acquisition Buffer A Description Tigger Block 1 10000 Scans Once scans are read from the buffer by th
283. n By doing so the configured channel becomes part of the channel scan ChartScan performs calculations on the raw voltage before supplying it to the controlling computer To perform such calculations ChartScan must know the transducer type ChartScan and its optional expansion chassis can each accept from 1 to 4 signal conditioning modules With eight modules possible each with 16 channels the system can scan up to 128 channels Note that the eight modules can be comprised of any combination of the following Signal Conditioning Modules Type Inputs Commector CSN14 TC P Thermocouple T C and K T E R S B and N or for Subminiature Plug Voltage 1 V 5 V and 10 V The modularity of ChartScan eliminates the need for synchronizing separate and possibly incompatible analog to digital A D measuring instruments or boards which is an important consideration because many temperature measurement systems require a combination of thermocouples and analog inputs ChartScan is capable of sensing the signal conditioning module types that are plugged into each of its four signal conditioning module slots as well as the four module slots of the expansion chassis If you attempt to configure a channel number that is of the wrong type or does not exist a channel configuration error will be logged in the Error Source Register Associated with each channel is the channel number and type and optionally the high and low alarm setpo
284. n Buffer and there are 20215 total scans in the buffer Furthermore it shows that the current read pointer is at scan 99 in the Ist trigger block and that there are 350 scans in this trigger block To retrieve that trigger block perform the following PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R2X Request the oldest trigger block PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows 4 channels x 350 scans 1400 readings PRINT A 0234 20 0019 4040001 4040023 60 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000005 0019865 00000100 02 15 34 100 03 24 97 00000100 04 51 10 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 Notice that there are now only 5 trigger blocks in the buffer and that there are only 19 865 scans in the buffer Also note that the current read pointer is at the beginning of what was the next trigger block That trigger block is now the current trigger block The R3 command will read all available data within the Acquisition Buffer For instance continuing with the previous example PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve it INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 0000005 0019865 00000100 02 15 34 100 03 24 97 00000100 04 51 10 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 5 trigger blocks currently define
285. n is currently configured ChartScan is usually configured to power up with the last known configuration from when the unit was powered down Last configuration power ups will also occur when a Power On Reset R command is used You can configure the unit such that it will always power up with the factory default configuration by issuing the Power up Settings S 1 command Note that issuing an S0 power up under last known configuration command causes the unit to power up under the last known configuration Note Configuring ChartScan to power up under the factory defaults or recalling the factory default settings will not affect pre existing calibration factors of the ChartScan or its slave units The following table lists the execution steps and effects when the ChartScan is configured to power up under the factory default configuration Step Command Effect C C C CSCSCisS mo o T Seta oat W ose OO mo o Teseo OO eo po eens 00 00 1 L1 0 0 Un configure level T0 0 0 0 Un configure acquisition triggering Set measuring mode to line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode F 20000 0 Set burst mode frequency to 20kHz WH Set sampling weight to 32 C 10 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Queries ChartScan provides many ways to query the unit for specific information Most commands have a corresponding query command which responds with the configuration or mode of a previously executed command In
286. n s to a particular digital output This command allows internal alarm conditions to be sensed by external devices via the 32 TTL level digital outputs located on the back panel of the unit To use alarms the channels in question must be part of the channel scan Once the channels are configured by using the C command and made part of the scan the alarms are active No trigger or timebase assignment is required Alarming is totally independent of buffered operations If it is desired an alarm event for a specific channel can be used as a stimulus for a digital output signal on the back panel of the unit by using the A command to assign the channel to digital output This signal can be used to set off an audible alarm or signal another device of the occurrence of the alarm condition To unassign a digital alarm condition use 0 which is the null output number Assigning the null output number to a channel s will disassociate the channel s from any digital output Thirty two digital signals are available on the back panel of the master unit Although analog input channels on the slave units can be used to stimulate alarms no digital output signals are available on the slave units Regardless of the number of slaves connected 32 external alarm signals are available A channel programmed with alarm setpoints will not generate an alarm unless it is over a setpoint when the scan occurs For example if a channel goes above then below an alarm thre
287. n the post trigger state and 10 while in the post stop state The post trigger count is valid since the stop event set by the T command is set to Counted NT 1 OUTPUT 07 Y1000 20 10X The command sets the time between scans in hours minutes seconds format The ChartScan can have two separate scan rates one that is used in the post trigger state and one that is used in all other states This example sets up the pre trigger and post stop scan intervals to 0 3 seconds 3 Hz and the post trigger interval to 0 0 which makes the units sample as fast as possible during the post trigger period NT 1 OUTPUT 07 100 00 00 3 00 00 00 0X PR PR The T command sets up the trigger parameters for the acquisition In this example the start event is the character issued by the controller The stop event is Counted The auto rearm flag is set to 1 on so that the ChartScan will re arm itself for another acquisition after this acquisition is complete The synchronization flag is also off so the ChartScan will not re synchronize itself to the trigger point when the start event begins When the ChartScan encounters the X command it will be armed and start the collection of the pre trigger data PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 T1 8 1 0X The Q command is used to set the buffer terminators for the data that is transferred to the controller Both the scan and trigger block terminators are set to LF linefeed PRINT 1 OUT
288. n unit calibration constants or changing the password the calibration mode should be disabled gt To ensure accurate measurements calibration must only be performed by authorized personnel gt Ensure that the ChartScan or NetScan system has been powered on for at least one hour prior to calibration CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Using ChartView s Calibration Feature For users familiar with the ScanCal calibration program please be aware that ScanCal is no longer provided as a part of product support Calibration functions are now integral to ChartView To access the calibration feature navigate as follows from ChartView s device pull down menu Device Select Status gt Calibration The Calibration Dialog Box will appear see following figure The dialog box contains an inventory of all instruments installed lEs Calibration X Intrumerit Inventory Beet 1400 W nn Select an item from the list and press the Calibrate button to start the procedure Slot 03 TCV ols Slot 04 Empty Slot 05 Empty Slot 06 Empty OOO Cwe Slot 07 Empty Slot 08 Empty ChartView s Calibration Dialog Box ChartScan Users Manual 959096 Calibration 6 3 If your data acquisition device interface i
289. nable ESE Register may be used to define which bits in the Event Status Register will be mapped into the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the STB The bits in the ESE represent an exact image of the bits in the ESR When a condition is set in the ESR its image bit is checked in the ESE If enabled the ESB bit in the STB is set The Service Request Enable SRE register may be used to define those conditions in the STB which will generate a Service Request SRQ The bits in the SRE represent an exact image of the bits in the STB accept for Service Request Bit When a condition is set in the STB its image bit is checked in the SRE If enabled ChartScan will generate a Service Request SRQ In the same fashion that the setting of events or conditions affects the lower levels of registers in the chain the clearing of events or conditions in the higher level registers will cause the clearing conditions in the lower level registers The following sections describe in detail the contents and operation of these registers More information on these registers can also be found in the Command Reference section under the M N U and E commands relating to these registers 958296 ChartScan User s Manual State Indicator Error Indicators Calibration Status Register U2 Refer to U2 Command Reference for A S definitions of indicators 2 t HE F o ou b 5 E F 8 EDO 2 c DD A cE O O 5 26 3 PS 5A A Oo ow O F
290. nce channel from the mX b equation to obtain a temperature differential as indicated in the following example Example A heated room has 2 thermocouples T1 for CH1 and T2 for CH2 with T1 being in the center of the room and T2 positioned at an outer wall If the outer wall is monitored to ensure a temperature within 2 F of the temperature indicated by thermocouple T1 then CH1 can be used as a reference channel such that its value will be subtracted from the actual value for channel 2 Assume the central thermocouple is reading 90 5 F and the outer thermocouple for CH2 is reading 89 0 F In this case we can use the equation so channel 2 s charted reading will not be of the actual temperature but will be the differential between CH1 and CH2 e g y mX b ref chan where y Channel 2 s charted value a temperature ap cial Input for Channel 1 and reference differential ee 90 5 F Input for Channel 2 b 0 X CH2 y mX b ref chan ref Chan CH1 Thermocouple 2 Channel 2 s charted value 1 x CH2 0 CH1 Channel 2 s charted value 1 x 89 0 F 0 90 5 F 39 0 F 1 5 F Spreadsheet and charted Channel 2 s charted value 1 5 F value for Channel 2 Note The reference channel feature is only available with ChartView Plus Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 39 Note When using a channel as a reference channel remember that lower numbered channels are calculated ahead of higher
291. nce it is a simple task to start ChartView when no configuration file exists This is described in the tutorial Understanding Groups Charts amp Channels When starting the program with no configuration file present a feature called Chart Setup Wizard 1s automatically activated to assist you with your setup To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you need to understand the relationship of Groups Charts and Channels Note ChartView ChartView Plus and Chart Setup Wizard are detailed in main ChartView section of this manual Group Group refers to a group of charts ChartView makes use ESP Display of one chart group ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups E depending on the capabilities of your PC but only displays data HEA Chart 1 from one chart group at a time Ior Chart Chart refers to display area which reflects real time S channel data values and can be scrolled at various rates One chart can display data from up to four channels In addition each chart will display real time information for a selected channel You can assign up to 16 charts per group Channel Channel refers to a signal channel You can have up to 4 channels assigned to one chart Channels will be displayed in units of C F K R mV V or in user defined units depending on the configuration and type of signal conditioning card used ChartScan 1400 S signal conditioning card options are discussed in Chapter 4 HE Chat 2
292. nctions are intentionally disabled Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remain functional When you select the High speed single channel mode a Warning message box appears as indicated in the following figure Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 43 High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode Enabled A WARNING 4 High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode is not compatible with any of the programs display functions Charts Meters and Channel configuration readings will be disabled while Burst Mode Is active You may however continue to acquire and upload data to disk This Warning Appears Prior to Enabling the Burst Mode e The Burst Mode channel will be the only channel enabled in the instrument This is regardless of the ON OFF status indicated on the Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet located on the Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Window e When using Burst Mode data saved to disk can still be viewed in a view application However the chart setup will only allow you to select the single channel previously selected in ChartView as the high speed Burst Mode channel Example If Channel 4 is selected as the High Speed Setup Channel in ChartView s Acquisition Setup and data is acquired and saved to disk then the only channel that can be selected for chart display is Channel 4 e When you switch operation from Burst Mode back to Normal Mode a channels that were assigne
293. nd is available to query ChartScan for the total number of channels in the system Note Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a ChartScan unit Note The rear panel of the expansion chassis contains no controls indicators input or output connections Connecting the Expansion Chassis A ribbon cable electronically connects the expansion chassis to the main unit No additional power or interface cables are required A set of mounting blocks and machine screws is used to physically connect the expansion chassis to ChartScan Perform the following steps to install an expansion chassis WARNING Before connecting an expansion chassis to ChartScan power down ChartScan and disconnect the unit from power In addition power down and disconnect all devices from the system Failure to do so could lead to personal injury or death CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a ChartScan unit ChartScan User s Manual 959696 5 1 1 Ensure the ChartScan is not connected to any power source 2 Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and on side of unit and slide top cover plate free of ChartScan Note that this plate will be reused as the cover plate for the expansion chassis 3 Using
294. ndow This window displays several channels in a dial gage format To activate the display select the Start button in the meter toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page CV 33 Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Digital Meters window to display several channels in numeric format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page CV 34 If a data file exists this selection will bring up an independent view program if installed eZ PostView is an example of a view application If you have more than one view application installed you can select the one you want to access via the File Converter Preferences dialog box The Converter Preferences dialog is opened from the Data Destination dialog box as discussed on page CV 43 988992 ChartView CV 25 Convert Existing You may find that you need to convert data files from one format to another to make them Files acceptable for viewing in your intended view application If so you can use the Convert Existing Files selection to bring up a window similar to the following From the window you can search for a file select it then convert it from its present format to another Clicking the lt Format gt button lower righ
295. ne Device Clear bus command DDE Dynamic Data Exchange DEL Delete ASCII Control Code DIO Data Transfer I O line DLE Data Link Escape ASCII Control Code DLL Dynamic Link Library Ring Indicator line Record Separator ASCII Control Code Revised Standard e g RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 485 Request for Service bit Resistance Temperature Device Request To Send line System Controller mode Secondary Command Group Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Direct Memory Access Small Computer System Interface Selected Device Clear bus command Shift In ASCII Control Code Shift Out ASCII Control Code Start of Header ASCII Control Code DMA DMM Digital Multimeter DSR Data Set Ready line DTR Data Terminal Ready line EM _ End of Medium ASCII Control Code ENQ Inquiry ASCH Control Code Serial Poll Disable bus command EOI End Or Identify line EOL End Of Line terminator Service Request line RTD RTS SC SCG SCPI SCSI SDC SI SO SOH __ SPD __ SPE Serial Poll Enable bus command SRO EOT End of Transmission ASCII Control Code STX Start of Text ASCII Control Code ESC Escape ASCII Control Code SUB Substitute ASCII Control Code ETB End of Transmission Block ASCII Control Code SYN Synchronous Idle ASCII Control Code ETX End of Text ASCII Control Code Te Thermocouple FCC Federal Communications Commission TAG Form Feed ASCII Control Code Ter File Separ
296. ne initially selected For example from the Set Scale dialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits Show Limits display as well as select Misc to Show Trend Indicator and Show Peak Hold Indicators You can use the Simulated Instrument mode to familiarize yourself with various meter configuration options Setup Window The Setup Window is used to configure channels setup acquisition parameters and assign data destinations and configure the Auto Re Arm feature The Setup Window contains three tabs Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup and Data Destination Once in the Setup window you can access an inactive dialog box by clicking on its related tab The three tabs remain visible regardless of which dialog box is active Access the Setup window using one of the following methods e Use the Setup pull down menu on ChartView s main window and select the desired dialog box Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup or Data Destination e Double click the Channel Configuration button item 8 main window figure then click on the appropriate dialog box tab Channel amp Alarm Setup Dialog Box The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box consists primarily of a configuration spreadsheet The dialog box allows you to configure the input channels and displays them Each row shows a single channel and its configuration The number of rows may vary depending on the number of channels present in your acquis
297. neering Units of the F command is ignored 0 Rankine Binary High Byte Low Byte 2 Data Input Formats The Data Format F command determines the format of only some of the data input from the controller Input data comes in the form of command parameters from the controller All commands and data sent to ChartScan are in ASCII although the engineering unit may vary The command parameters over which the F command determines their format are the high low setpoints and the hysteresis parameters for the Channel Configuration C command and the Set Trigger Level L command These are the only command parameters over which the Data Format F command has control These command parameters cannot be issued in binary format If binary format is specified by the F command these parameters will be interpreted as Engineering Units These parameters will always be interpreted as Engineering Units as currently defined by the Engineering Units argument of the F command except when the Counts format is specified When the Counts format is specified these parameters are interpreted as Counts For additional information see the command reference section Note If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format the Engineering Units parameter of the F command is ignored Examples PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Interpret C and L command parameters as Engineering Units Degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Fl 1X Interpret C and L command
298. nel Configuration Window Access this window through the Setup pull down menu Acquisition Parameters Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration window This window can be accessed through the Setup pull down menu Data File Parameters Check Data File Parameters These parameters can be set from the Data Destination window accessible from the Setup pull down menu and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible from the Data pull down menu Using the Run Dialog box to specify a configuration file is very efficient By using this method and various configuration files you should find that managing systems with more than one acquisition device is relatively simple With the use of a portable PC you can quickly interface with a specific acquisition system The pull down menus and numbered areas represented in the previous figure and table are detailed in the main ChartView section To start the charts scrolling push the Start Charts and Indicators button item 2 In addition to viewing the data as charts you can select the Windows pull down menu to select one or all of the following e ChartView Analog Meters e ChartView Digital Meters e ChartView Bar Graph Meters The meter type data displays along with the charts can be on your computer screen at the same time They can be re sized and repositioned as desired Analog Digital and Bar Graph meters are detailed in the ChartView section of this ma
299. nel items are listed in a separate table following the illustration ALARM ON when an alarm has occurred The indicator remains ON until the alarm condition clears ae OFF when no alarm condition exists Flashes when ARMed waiting for a trigger is ON continuous when triggered is OFF when data collection is finished Trigger is also turned OFF by IEEE DCL or SDC SCAN ON when ChartScan is storing a channel scan in its internal buffer SEND ON when transmitting data to the serial interface for RS 232 operation only RECEIVE ON when receiving data from the controlling computer for RS 232 operation only command for more information position depressed OFF if power is not present Power Switch LED Indicators 44 4 G4 g 4 Interface Card Slot of A G m a ga Power Fuse Chassis Calibration TTL Output Alarms amp Digital I O RS 232 DB9 Connector Holder Ground Enable Disable Trigger In DB50 Connector Connector ChartScan Rear Panel Item Description Power Provides a means for connecting ChartScan to one of two voltage supplies Connector 105 125V or 210 250V The connected power supply must agree with that selected by ChartScan s internal slide switch described later in this chapter Turns power ON or OFF Chassis Ground A single point grounding node for but not limited to thermocouple shield termination Calibration Pushbutton used to enable disable the hardware protected portion of NVRAM during ChartS
300. ng advantage of the Software Components concept For example you can embed an Excel spreadsheet object into a Word document When the spreadsheet object is activated it gives you access to ViewXL In this case the Word document holds all text as well as an embedded Excel worksheet object The Excel worksheet object holds raw and calculated data and graphics Double clicking on the Excel worksheet object in Word can access ViewXL allowing the user to efficiently prepare a statistical report This compound document allows you to collect configure analyze graph and annotate data with a just a few clicks of a mouse button Program Requirements ViewXL requires the following software e A data acquisition server application such as 32 bit ChartView or DaqView that can implement the View App Interface standard e Microsoft Excel 2000 or later e 32 bit Microsoft Windows Operating System Windows 2000 or Windows XP Installation of ViewXL Add in 989092 ViewXL is a standard Microsoft Excel Add in It is installed by selecting the Excel Tools Add Ins menu item If ViewXL does not appear in the list of available add ins press the Browse button and then select the ViewXL xla_ file When the Add In appears in the list click the check box next to ViewXL to enable the program 457 0913 rev 3 0 Menu aw Views Help J ah Configure 8 Arm Disarm a fi Load configuration Ev Use data hea
301. nizing equipment with ChartScan ChartScan can be programmed to trigger on a rising or falling TTL level Any TTL level signal gt 2 2V Hi lt 0 8V Lo may be used as a trigger pulse A trigger pulse may also be used to generate a Service Request Note that the TTL Out is a LS TTL compatible output 0 4 mA sourcing 8 mA sinking When a scan is logged into the acquisition buffer after the actual scan the TTL output signal is pulsed for 100 ms Refer to the following trigger timing diagram TTL Output 7 00 ms See Enlargement x A TTL Output l l mS to 100 ms Scans Start of Channel Scan Pre Trigger Scans Post Stop Scans Scan Duration 20 ms to 2 secs Typical Trigger Timing Diagram ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 15 Notes 3 16 Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Option Cards Signal Conditioning Cards 4 1 CSN14 TC P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs 4 1 CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards 4 3 CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors 4 4 CSN Relay Card for High Current Digital Output 4 5 Signal Conditioning Cards ChartScan and its expansion chassis can each house a quantity of 4 signal conditioning cards 8 total for a possible 128 channels The signal conditioning cards can be varied using any combination of the following 5 types CSN 14 TC P Thermocoupl
302. nnel Channels will be displayed in ESI chat 2 units of C F K R mV V or in user defined units depending on the BF croup 2 configuration and type of signal conditioning card used With ChartView Plus ES chart 1 you can have up to 4 overlapping channels assigned to one chart a Chart 2 Ea Chart 3 Three Ways of Using ChartView CV 2 You can use ChartView to e chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk e acquire data with no charting or meter use e use charting and or meters while acquiring data to disk Chart channels and or monitor with meters with no acquisition of data to disk Acquisition State Waiting for Trigger Prior to charting channels on ChartView s Main Window you need to configure a display in regard to groups charts and channels This aspect of configuration is performed through Chart Setup Wizard discussed in the following text or through a Chart Setup window accessed through the Channel Configuration button on ChartView s Main Window In addition to charting channels you can monitor selected channels via digital analog and or bar graph meters Meter discussion begins on page CV 31 of this document A detailed discussion of configuring Meters begins on page CV 36 Note Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time ChartView 988992 Software Reference Software Reference Acquire data with no charting or meter use Possible Acquisition Scenarios Acqu
303. nnel information alarm configurations and acquisition configuration information 7 Optional Check the System Inventory and Device System Time Check the System Inventory and Device System Time via the Status selection from the Device pull down menu In an actual application if the System Inventory and Device System Time configurations were acceptable you would proceed to Arm an Acquisition by clicking the Arm Acquisition button item 10 page 1 9 or by using the Arm Acquisition selection in the Acquire pull down menu Start Charts 3 gt 24 Push the Start Charts and Indicators button item 2 page 1 9 Charts will begin scrolling More detailed information pertaining to the charts and the ChartView Main Window appear in the main ChartView section of this manual ChartView Main Window section In addition to viewing the data as charts you can select the Windows pull down menu to select one or all of the following e ChartView Analog Meters e ChartView Digital Meters e ChartView Bar Graph Meters gt 25 Select the Windows pull down menu and try each meter option Push the triangular play button of each meter specific toolbar to activate that meter Meters and charts can be on your computer screen at the same time They can be re sized and repositioned as desired Analog Digital and Bar Graph meters are detailed in the main ChartView section Note that a post acquisition viewing program is also selectable from the Windows
304. not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while Units Div is selected You can change Y Center and Units Div by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Div Mode will maintain its units per division scale setting across the chart The channels in the display will be enabled and will appear in ChartView s Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart for ChartView Plus applications and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time It is important to understand that other channels those not in the display setup maintain their existing configuration status They are not affected by the edit of the configuration display You can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor CV 14 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Manually Creating a Display For ChartView Plus users if you plan to have a chart setup that is not weighted evenly 1 e different numbers of channels per chart and different numbers of charts per group you may want to manually setup your chart display from scratch
305. nstance any option that can range up to 65 535 always returns five digits so zero would be returned as 00000 In the following command descriptions leading zeros are included They are not however required when entering the command Conflict Errors Some combinations of commands and parameters can be sent to the unit that are out of range for a particular configuration or inconsistent with other commands For instance specifying a Scan Interval I command to less time than the unit can acquire scans results in a conflict error PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 992 100 00 00 0 00 00 00 0X A conflict error lights the ERROR indicator LED on the scanning unit and returns an E4 when queried with the Error Query E command Some conflict errors result in a default value for a conflicted command For instance in the example above the scan interval defaults to the fastest possible scan interval for the number of defined channels Command Interpretation As commands are received by the unit they are interpreted in the order in which they are received Some commands are immediate which means they immediately take effect Other commands are deferred and have no effect on device operation until the Execute x command is interpreted Immediate amp Deferred Commands The immediate and deferred commands applicable to ChartScan 1400 are listed in a table on the following page An example of an immediate command is Set Digital Outputs On whi
306. nual 1 10 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual ChartView Basic Concepts An understanding of the following basic concepts will help you master ChartView more quickly and should be understood before proceeding with the tutorial Configuration Files ChartView makes use of one or more user transparent configuration files Configuration files maintain information regarding various aspects of your setup serving as an initialization file for subsequent ChartView startups These files can be recognized by their cvw extensions When you run ChartView for the very first time there will be no configuration file However a configuration file will be generated and be saved automatically after each use of the program ChartView uses Chartvw cvw as a default configuration file This file maintains a location for ChartView configuration information including e Device Interface Mode e Hardware Configuration e Channel Settings Channel Enable Disable On Off Type Label Units Alarm Settings Limits Hysteresis Setting e Acquisition Configuration e Data Storage Settings YUYUUUY The configuration file ensures that when you restart ChartView it will be in the same state upon your last exit This means that the Chartvw cvw file will be an updated copy of the configuration file you are using at the time you exit ChartView It is not catastrophic if a configuration file is deleted si
307. number of cycles by 10 will provide an adequate sampling rate For example for 60 Hz you should sample at 600 samples sec and for 50 Hz you should sample at 500 samples sec To obtain these sample rates with ChartScan MultiScan or NetScan use the High speed single channel Burst Mode Question 3 Can I measure multiple channels of 60 cycle AC RMS voltage with ChartScan MultiScan or NetScan Answer Yes providing the amplitude of the signals falls within the range of the card For example if your amplitude was 120V you would need to use a high voltage signal conditioning card Note that the CSN14 HV S card has a high range of 250V To measure multiple channels of 60 cycle AC RMS or 50 Hz AC RMS in Europe perform the steps in the following section Measuring AC RMS Measuring AC RMS The following steps pertain to measuring AC RMS voltage 1 Determine the peak voltage of the input signal 2 Based on the value from step 1 select the appropriate VAC option This is done in ChartView s Channel and Alarm Setup window see following figure CHOOSE TY FE 250 VAC Channel Configuration LIVAC A A 3 i Ha Jon 250 VAC CH Y D t j n 250 VAC CH2 y 10 2 3 On 250 VAC CH3 y 10 4 On 250 vac cH4 y 10 H5 C 3276 60 327 Choosing A Voltage Type Note The range of 250Vwas obtained with a CSN14 HV S card 3 In the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box set the Average Weight to 32 Ac
308. of Main Unit Required Equipment Shorting bar or 3 linked banana plugs see following figure Calibration Card installed in bottom slot slot 1 of the main unit CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note Grounding circuit white is only partially shown Actual grounding circuit is on reverse side of the board Use shorting bar or shorted banana plugs to short V and V to ground Ground Line see note Binding Post E S V GND V S 1 of 7 Shorting Bar V GND V 3 Banana Plugs on 3 4 Centers on 1 8 x 1 2 x 2 Copper Bar 3 Shorted Banana Plugs Calibration Card and Two Shorting Options ChartScan Users Manual 959096 Calibration 6 7 6 8 Calibration 10 Ensure the main unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it If a signal conditioning card is in slot 1 of the chassis remove the card Install Calibration Card into Slot 1 bottom slot of the main unit CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment hav
309. ogic Levels 3 14 Digital I O Port Pinout 3 14 External TTL BNC Connectors 3 15 Reference Notes gt The signal conditioning cards and the CSN Relay card options are detailed in Chapter 4 gt The CSN Exp Expansion Chassis is discussed in Chapter 5 gt If you plan to connect the ChartScan 1400 to a network through a Net232 Ethernet RS 232 converter refer to the Net232 User s Guide part no 1037 0901 Front and Rear Panels Front Panel ChartScan s front panel can have up to four sets of connectors one set for each signal conditioning card used The front panel contains no switches or other types of control Each connector row is dependent upon the type of signal conditioning card used A wide variety of combinations is possible The card options are discussed in Chapter 4 ad a E TC Volts Scanning Card CO a Ya e E a ee eE with Mini Plugs A m a SOO ROO ROOM COR COR a a a OOM a G a a E Low Volts Scanning Card with Removable Screw Terminals P O000000000000000 imne 99 Lovor rign vots scanning cara O O O O QO O OO O with Safety Jacks ChartScan F ront Panel One of Many Possible Set ups ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 1 Rear Panel 3 2 ChartScan s rear panel contains several items including a set of LEDs for status indication The LED indicators are described in the following table Other rear pa
310. ollecting scans before the start event has occurred or after stop event has occurred These two regions are called the pre trigger scan and the post stop scan respectively e Second is the acquisition scan interval This scan interval is used when ChartScan is acquiring scans after the start event has occurred but before the stop event has occurred This region is referred to as the post trigger scan The command is used to set these two scan intervals For example the following command 100 00 10 0 00 00 00 1 would set the scan interval to once every 10 seconds and set the post trigger scan interval to once every 0 1 seconds As mentioned earlier the scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current configuration will allow This is referred to as fast mode Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying 00 00 00 0 as the argument for the command for the desired timebase interval For example the following command 100 00 10 0 00 00 00 0 will set the normal scan interval to once every 10 seconds and the acquisition scan interval will be set to fast mode The two scan intervals may be queried any time via the software command Pretrigger Trigger Post trigger Post stop Scans Scan Scans Scans Scan Interval A Scan Interval B Scan Interval A Stop Event occured before interval B Scans amp Scan Intervals B 10 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Acquisition Configuration Introduction To
311. om the calibrator to the calibration card Use a precision digital multimeter to verify voltage accuracy 6 Type G0 91X The Trigger LED will flash indicating that gain calibration is in progress When flashing stops the chassis gain calibration is complete 7 Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occurred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error V132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range V144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 8 Type EX The calibration mode is disabled 9 Position the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton in the non indent disable position Note to ChartScan users Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel as indicated in the NetScan figure page 6 2 10 Remove power from the main unit and all connected devices 11 Remove the calibration card from the chassis You are now ready to calibrate the signal conditioning cards as described in the following sections of this chapter
312. ommand It is cleared when the unit is processing a command line This bit should be examined with a serial poll prior to issuing a new command line This allows any detected errors to be traced to the specific command line containing the error If all the setup information for a specific ChartScan operation is included in one line this bit also indicates when all processing is done and the X command is completed This ensures the unit has completely processed all state changes before initiating any further activity Set when at least 1 acquisition scan is available in the acquisition buffer to be read Cleared when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read Set when the output queue is not empty It is cleared when the output queue is empty This bit reflects whether any command responses are still in the output queue Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status Register ESR ANDed with their equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable ESE register If this bit is set at least one bit in the ESR is set and has its corresponding enable bit in the ESE set The status command UO can be issued to read the ESR See the following for more information on ESR and ESE Set when ChartScan requests service It is cleared when a SPOLL is performed Set if a buffer overrun occurs It is cleared when the buffer becomes empty by either reading out the contents of the buffer or performing a Reset B of the buffer Serv
313. ommand is sent to the unit This is also referred to as Invalid Device Dependent Command IDDC error N064 Buffer 75 Full Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when the unit has determined that the acquisition buffer is at least 75 full N128 Power On This condition is set whenever unit is first powered up or a R is issued EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 NO X Clear the Event Status Enable ESE Register PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 N X Read the Event Status Enable ESE Register PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Computer screen shows N000 LINE INPUT 2 N PRINT N PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 NIN2X Set enable ESB setting on pre trigger count satisfied or acquisition complete PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 N X Read the Event Status Enable ESE Register PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Computer screen shows N003 LINE INPUT 2 N PRINT N PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M32 X Set SRQ on Event Detected ESB SRQ will now be generated when pre trigger count is satisfied or the acquisition completes ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 41 0 Set Digital Outputs SYNTAX Set any of the 32 digital outputs Separated into four 8 bit banks to a specified setting where bankn forn 1 2 3 4 is an argument in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 when converted to binary format represents the desired settings for the 8 bit bank 10 Query current state of digital output DESCRIPTION Th
314. on Enable Disable Pushbutton After pushing in the button execute the K command to change the existing password For more information refer to the Hardware Protected RAM section on page 6 2 Disable writing to RAM after successfully changing the password by setting the rear panel s Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton to the disable non indent position EKarly production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position Mode Indicator To denote whether or not calibration mode has been activated bit 7 in the Calibration Status Register will be set after a valid K command has been executed This bit is cleared by the E command see E Command in Appendix A You can verify the register status by the U2 command A response of U128 indicates that the unit is in the calibration mode U2 in the command reference section Appendix A contains details regarding this command Command Active Indicators 6 6 Calibration Since the calibration commands require a few seconds to complete bit 6 in the Calibration Status Register will be set and the trigger LED will flash to indicate that a calibration command is active When these indicators are off a subsequent calibration step can be started 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Calibration of Main Unit Offset Calibration
315. ond column F M Remove unused worksheets Timestamps M Enable Timestamps Display Absolute Time IF Available Display Relative Timestamps Multiple Data Files Place in muktiple worksheets ppend to current worksheet ViewXL Options Dialog Box Software Reference Y Enable Server file conversion This option enables the post acquisition file conversion for the specified format type such as ASCII and DADISP If the option is not checked then the post acquisition file conversion process is disabled Y Display data after acquired If checked the data acquired by the data acquisition application such as ChartView or Daq View is automatically read and displayed in Excel Checked 1s the default setting for this option Un check this option if you want to acquire data without automatically loading it into Excel V Delete server data files after reading into Excel Check this option if you want the Add In to automatically delete the server data files after they have been read and displayed in Excel Y Clear spreadsheet cells when inserting data Check this option if you want ViewXL to automatically clear the worksheet before displaying new data V Span worksheets beyond column Check this option if you want to control the number of columns of data that can be viewed in a single worksheet Example You have an acquisition that contains 24 channels of data Check the Span worksheets beyond column
316. onfiguration and or acquisition Refers to those commands which affect general system functionality Execution This item refers to the point in time which an interpreted command is executed The defined Executions are as follows Execution Definition S O Immediate Indicates that the command will be executed immediately upon successful parsing of the command and instrument parameters Deferred Indicates that the command will be saved and executed later after successfully parsing and performing an Execute X command The Commands The following pages presents the API Command Reference for ChartScan The API Commands have been arranged in alphabetical order by command syntax with the and characters preceding the alphabetical characters and with preceding the letter Q ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 11 Trigger On Command SYNTAX Triggeruponreceiptofan S O The Trigger On command will start or stop the acquisition accordingly when the start or stop arguments of the Set Trigger Configuration T command is set to 1 trigger on The T command is used as a trigger source and follows the same rules as other trigger sources as defined by the T command The command is valid only when an acquisition is configured where either the start and or stop event is defined as the Trigger On command If this command is issued when the acquisition is not configured for stop and or start Trigger On command an error condit
317. only needs to be triggered If their are no trigger blocks available Blocks Available will be 0000000 2 Number of Scans Available This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6 command was issued It should be noted that pre trigger data is not available to the user until the defined trigger event has taken place This total represents the total number of scans available across all trigger blocks in the acquisition buffer If their are no scans available in the buffer Scans Available will be 0000000 3 Current Read Pointer This field represents the current position within the current trigger block This pointer is relative to the trigger point which is always oriented at location 0 If pre trigger scans are being read the Current Pointer will be less than 0 Likewise if post trigger scans are being read the Current Read Pointer will be greater than 0 If the current scan to be read is the trigger scan the Current Read Pointer will be 00000000 If the Current Read Pointer is undefined its value will be 0999999 4 Trigger Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the trigger event occurred for the current trigger block This field takes on the same format as other time date trigger stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the trigger event has not occurred this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Stop Event Pointer This field represents the location in the curren
318. ontrol Upload Scans Until Done Window w Upload Data During Acquisition Hiat Upaad letra Upigad Stare Unti Tane Enables ChartView to retrieve scans from device memory as data becomes available The acquisition is active Aborts the upload Stops ChartView s transfer of data from the instrument to disk This feature is used in cases where an instrument has already scanned data or is currently scanning data while not connected to a computer 1 e ChartView was not being used for real time data collection Later when a computer is connected to the instrument the Upload Scans Until Done selection enables ChartView to access the device memory and then upload the data The upload will continue until all of the scanned data has been obtained by ChartView Bar Graph Meters Analog Meters Digital Meters View File Data Software Reference Window Bar Graph Meters Analog Meters Digital Meters View File Data Ctr Convert Existing Files Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Bar Graph window This window displays several channels in bar graph format To activate the display select the Start button in the meter toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page CV 32 Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Analog Meters wi
319. or Bar Graph Meters For Bar Graph Meters configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection adding peak hold indicators etc Refer to the section entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail CV 32 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Analog Meters Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Analog Meters window This window displays several channels in a dial gage format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time ee Chat View Analog Meters IOJ x Control View gt i 0 030000 4 wiley 0o00 U4 yh ty 04 i E Nooo a a _ 1 080000 1 0eooOD 2 __ e 1 CH3 C 0 046818 AICHS mw 0 031212 Hoon Nooo 1050000 4 yihey 0050000 1050000 4 EELEE 0050000 ra 2 ra fai T ai a m a nooo 0 4000 nooo 0 015481 FICHE 0 015451 Analog Meters Shown with 4 Meters Selected for Viewing Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu not shown A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brin
320. or a particular Trigger Block is not made available to be read until the specified Trigger event occurs There are two ways to determine if the unit is in the Pre Trigger state 1 Visually check the TRIGGER LED If it is flashing then the unit is in the Pre Trigger state 2 Query the Status Byte STB register and check the Triggered Bit If the Triggered Bit is not set and the acquisition has been configured then the unit is in the Pre Trigger state When the specified Trigger event occurs ChartScan exits the Pre Trigger state and enters the Post Trigger state The Trigger Configuration T command has a synchronization parameter s y nc that allows you to specify if the Trigger point is to be synchronized to the Pre Trigger normal scan interval If sync is set the Trigger point will occur on the next tick of the Pre Trigger normal scan interval Otherwise the Trigger point will occur at the point at which it is detected For example assume a sync setting with a Pre Trigger of 10 scans and a sample rate of 1 scan per minute If a Trigger event takes place 20 seconds after a scan a recorded Trigger point will happen on the next scan 40 seconds later 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Continuous Gap Free Acquisition with Two Timebases ChartScan can be configured to have different timebases for its Pre Trigger and Post Trigger states The system can be configured such that when the Trigger condition is met ChartScan will switch from
321. ot reset relative timestamps to 00 00 00 Restore all chart properties Synchronizes the charts and resets them to the default settings Grids are turned on and aligned with other timestamps are off the scroll rate of 1 sec div is selected and the limit line option is turned off Synch all charts timestamps This feature synchronizes charts but does not alter their settings The feature is used to align all chart grids and timestamps Main Timestamp visible A checkmark appears by this selection when it is enabled and a timestamp will appear just above the LED section at the bottom of the ChartView window When disabled the checkmark disappears and no main timestamp will be visible The Main Timestamp visible actions have no bearing on the timestamps for individual charts 988992 Software Reference e Properties Selecting Properties from the pop up menu accesses a Chart Properties dialog box The box allows you to change the selected chart in regard to the following Properties of Chart 2 Ea ES Grids _ 5 croll rate 2 OFF fi sec div Limit lines Off C Solid C Dots Restore defaults OK Cancel Apply Chart Timestamp Off Absolute Relative Properties Dialog Box Turn grid lines on or off Turn the chart s timestamp on or off and choose absolute or relative as the type of timestamp Absolute timestamps make use of real clock time Relative times
322. ote The spreadsheet cannot be altered while the channel Readings column is enabled 4 Type A block of cells in this column can be selected for convenience of single type selection Double clicking a cell will select the next available type 5 Label The Label column identifies the input channel by descriptive name The label is used when selecting a channel in the trigger and chart selection lists The label column automatically uses the channel number as a default You can change the label to any alphanumeric designation not exceeding eight characters Each label used must be unique specific to its designated channel 6 Units Cells in the Units column are dependent on the Type selected and automatically change when the type is changed An example is that of temperature units being replaced by volts units when changing from a thermocouple type to a volts type If the channel ts configured for Temperature the units automatically change to C default at this point you have the option of selecting a different engineering temperature unit F K and R Note that the mX b equation discussed in the following text is typically not used for temperature readings since temperature data will be linear However you can use the equation in temperature applications for example setting b to 32 in order to watch deviations from freezing point when temperature is in F In addition with ChartView Plus you can subtract a refere
323. ou must perform the following steps 1 Set the first parameter of the Counts Y command to 1 If more than one transition cycle is desired enable the Auto Rearm flag of the Trigger Configuration command If this is done each transition cycle will be stored in its own Trigger Block within the buffer 2 Set the timebase intervals for each event using the Timebase Interval command Specify the two trigger events via the Trigger Configuration T command ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 13 The following graph shows how the above application would be organized within the buffer Using this method continuous data may be collected as long as the application program can read data out of the buffer before the buffer overruns If the buffer overruns the data read may not be continuous TRIGGER BLOCK 1 TRIGGER BLOCK 2 A Level Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Time Trigger Event Stop Event Trigger Event Stop Event Buffer Organization with Gap Free Acquisition Post Trigger State The Post Trigger state is the period between the occurrence of the trigger event and the occurrence of the stop event While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated at the post trigger scan rate During the Post Trigger state the unit will collect Post Trigger data at the rate specified by the acquisition scan interval specified by the Scan Inte
324. ouble click on the channel in the available channels list to add in the selected channels list to remove Hold down the keyboard s Shift Key and use the left hand mouse button to select a block of consecutive available channels up to 4 then click the Add button Example CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 Hold down the keyboard s Ctrl button and use the left hand mouse button to select up to 4 available channels these can be non consecutive then click the Add button Example CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 as in the previous figure You can also remove channels in a similar manner by highlighting a channel s in the Select Channels box and then clicking on the Remove button In the previous figure CH7 in the select box is highlighted Clicking the Remove button would delete the channel from Chart1 When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels that are listed lower in the display list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels higher in the list those that were added first Window will appear similar to the following figure Note This screen contains two radio buttons for selecting the method of adjusting the display mode and channel setup It is the same screen discussed in the sub section Editing an Existing Display Configuration From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale or Units Div Each method Changing the d
325. ounts of data options are available for expanding the standard 256 kB of memory to 1 MB 4 MB or 8 MB Readings may then be transferred at greater than 300 Kbytes per second over the IEEE 488 bus or up to 9 600 baud using its standard RS 232 serial port Though the RS 232 serial interface is always available with ChartScan an interface card must be used for IEEE 488 applications e Capable of channel expansion up to 128 channels with the use of a CSN Exp expansion chassis Data Handling and Triggering Built in memory 256 Kbyte RS 232 interface included Time amp date stamping included Digital inputs 8 Programmable alarm outputs 32 Digital trigger input included Analog trigger input included Trigger on time of day included Pre trigger scan rate Programmable Post trigger scan rate Programmable ChartScan User s Manual 968492 2 1 Software Included Software ChartView ViewXL ChartViewXL PostView LabView Driver Hardware 16 Channel Signal Conditioning Cards Optional Low voltage with removable terminal block input module CSN14 LV T Low voltage with BNC input module CSN14 LV B Low voltage with safety jack input module CSN14 LV S Isolated TC voltage with plug type input module CSN14 TC P Isolated high voltage with safety jack input module CSN14 HV S Cables and Additional Hardware Options CA 7 3 Shielded IEEE 488 cable 6 ft CA 47 Computer to ChartScan Cable PC AT XT serial port 9 amp 25
326. ower up as last configured 1 Power up using default configuration Acquisition Block Available 0 No acquisition block available 1 Acquisition block available U18 Bit Mapping EXAMPLES Refer to the EXAMPLES section for each of the following commands Change Calibration Keyword Configure Channels Select Card Set Data Format Enter Calibration Mode Set Query Terminator Execute Set Counts 958296 ChartScan User s Manual V Set User Terminator EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Vval Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value Val isin the range 0 to255 Query the present user terminator value DESCRIPTION The Set User Terminator V command is used to set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value is in the range 0 to 255 The User Terminator may be used by the Set Query Terminator Q command to specify a user defined terminator for any of the defined terminator types or as a reading separator for the Read Buffered Data R command EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q1 0 1 1 1X Set the reading separator flag ON PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Data format is engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V44X Set the User Terminator to be a comma PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 4 1X Configure channels 1 4 as T C type J PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 100 00 01 0 Configure scan interval 00 00 00 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 YO 1000 0X
327. p output values have the same ASCII format as Time Date with exception of the fourth value For Time Date stamp the value is mss milli seconds where 000 lt mss lt 999 An example 01 25 20 600 2 28 99 20 6 seconds after 1 25 AM on Feb 28 1999 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Scan Interval Scan Interval formats have the following ASCII format hh mmss t An example 01 02 03 5 Scan interval of 1 hour 2 minutes and 3 5 seconds Binary Data Format Only High Low Last HLL register and acquisition output data may be in binary format Binary formatted data can be output in either highbyte lowbyte or lowbyte highbyte format Time Date Stamp If binary format is selected the High Low Last register values will also include time date stamps When outputting the High Low Last registers for either highbyte lowbyte or lowbyte highbyte the time date stamp will have the following format hms t MDY where each letter is a byte represented as follows m rows m months m minutes gt days rs seconds re tenths A typical High Low Last will have the following binary format each letter is a byte of data HHhmst MDYLLhmst MDY1 where HH is high LL is low and is last Counts Data Format The Counts data format is a format that is characterized by an ASCII integer number from 32676 to 32676 that represents a compensated or raw value as it would be interpreted from the A D converter This val
328. p H04 Data Carrier Detect amp H08 Data Set Ready amp H20 Hexadecimal amp Decimal Values Hex Value QuickBASIC amp H80 amp H40 amp H20 amp H10 amp HO8 amp H04 amp HO2 amp HO1 Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Bus State IEEE 488 Bus Command Data Transfer DIO Lines ATN is asserted 1 5 4 3 2 1 Device Clear Group Execute Trigger amp H08 Go To Local amp H01 Listen Address Group amp H20 3F Local Lock Out amp H11 My Listen Address My Talk Address Parallel Poll Config Parallel Poll Disable amp H07 Parallel Poll Unconfig amp H15 Second Cmd Group amp H60 7F Selected Device Clear amp H04 Serial Poll Disable amp H19 Serial Poll Enable amp H18 Talker Address Group amp H40 5F Take Control amp H09 Unlisten amp H3F Untalk amp H5F Hexadecimal amp Decimal Values Hex Value QuickBASIC amp H80 amp H40 amp H20 amp H10 amp H08 amp HO4 amp HO2 amp H01 Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ChartScan User s Manual 889802 E 1 ee O O O OQOOOOOOOOOOOOOO O O OOKO aOOmMa nma OOOO O OJIN O O O OGOGO aOOmMaOnmMma Oma OOOJ O OY a KS O0 gt OODOY gt 09V OQO gt E 2 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix F ASCII Code Summary Decimal Values 00 to 63 ACG UCG amp LAG Box Items Hexadecimal Value 41 65 Decimal Value A Bus Message 01 in center ASCII Character Addressed Command Group ACG 00 00 01 01 02 02
329. p this step and return to it after reviewing ChartView Basic Concepts and completing the ChartView Tutorial Note The configuration file discussed in this section will not be present during your first start of the program Use the ChartView icon in Windows to start the ChartView program ChartView will run using the latest configuration file This is a file which is automatically saved upon exiting the program The configuration file contains all setup information including that pertaining to channels alarms and acquisition configuration When ChartView opens using a configuration file the programs main window appears on the screen as indicated in the following figure 1 8 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual l Chart View Simulated Instrument File Chart View Acquire Data Window Device Setup 11 12 Grr Il ia E psd a he x A F ATT r3 o 9 z om E PO PEN PE EEND CE PEED CES PERN PES OEO CETS OEN CET PERO CE OED CEES CES CETE PERN CE EEG CENT See A oes ES OTS E ETT DEE T Cries Cone Cee ETT S ETT OES Cee tees ET TOES SET E Samed See ba eppi na a L aiaee aL 50 0014 A L S E Mere T eres ees eee Cees Cec ees EA es eee TE ET eens ey rere emery Oe E mers ET ere 1E ait EN BAA A BAA UN AA G penser se Ga DA snares eens AAA G Caa GS GA GAAS aA GAA 1 28 Aue PRENA N Charting o O Initializing Charting OC Disk OC Buffering in Instrument
330. pe Harness for CSN14 LV T cards see note Banana Plug Type Harness CSN14 LV S cards see note Type U Subminiature Plug Harness for CSN14 TC P cards see note Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter see required specifications on page 6 2 Note The four types of harnesses are illustrated later in this section With exception of the type of harness see following figure the gain calibration procedure is identical for each of the following cards CSN14 TC P CSN14 LV S CSN14 LV B CSN14 LV T ZN Reference Note For gain calibration of the CSN14 HV S card refer to the section entitled gt Gain Calibration for High Volts Cards beginning on page 6 16 CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain and the signal conditioning cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards for gain CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an
331. pear following figure but only if the option has been Net 232 Serial Output Port Settings authorized COM Patt Net232 Port 2 NetScan 1500 x Baud Rate fhs20 Parity None O YS HandShaking RTscrs The Serial output port of the external Net 232 adapter must be configured to match the Serial input settings of the Scan Instrument OK Cancel Network Interface Configuration Dialog Box If no authorization code was previously entered an Internet Options message will appear as in the upper image of the following figure Clicking the lt Enter Code gt button on this message box brings up the Authorization box following figure lower image After entering C3523DFA6COA and clicking the lt Apply Code gt button you will be able to access the Network Interface Configuration dialog box From that box you can configure the scan device for the Ethernet paora zl Network operation is a purchased option Enter Authorization Code boo Ooo N Please enter your authorization code to enabled this feature ChartView Plus Disable ChartView Net Disable Cancel Trial period expired OK Stats Way we Message and Authorization Code Boxes Reference Note For details regarding the Net232 refer to the Net232 User s Guide p n 1037 0901 A copy of the guide is shipped with the Net323 Ethernet RS 232 Converter Simulated Instrument The program will generate
332. perature unit Conversion to degrees Fahrenheit degrees Rankine and degrees Kelvin are via the following formulas ChartScan User s Manual 958296 C 7 C 8 Centigrade 3276 7 lt C lt 3276 7 Fahrenheit F 9 5 C 32 Rankine R 9 5 C 491 69 Note R F 459 69 Kelvin K C 273 16 For channels configured as thermocouples all ASCII readings will be returned in the format which corresponds with the engineering unit selected The formats are as follows where X is an ASCII digit Centigrade XXXX XX Fahrenheit XXXX XX Rankine XXXX XX Kelvin XXXX XX Volts The default units and resolution are dependent on the low or high volts range High Range 100mV 3 12 uV bit 78 75 uV bit 31 21 uV bit 787 46 uV bit 156 06 pV bit 250 V 7 87 mV bit 312 12 uV bit The default binary format returns 2 bytes of 2 s complement binary data with the user selecting low high byte or high low byte For Volts channels all ASCII readings will be of the form XXX XXXXXXX where X is an ASCII digit Time Date Stamp Time Date values have the following ASCII format hh mn ss t mm dd yy hh mn ss t mm dd yy hh 00 lt hh lt 23 hh mn ss t mm dd yy mm 012 mme 12 dd valid by month vy 00 yy 99 mn 00 mn lt 59 35 00 lt ss lt 59 t 00 lt t lt 9 tenth of seconds Time Date stamp output values occur within HLL and acquisition buffer output queries Time Date stam
333. ple binary weighting The switch labeled IEEE Address 1 micro switch number 8 is the least significant bit 16 micro switch 4 is the most significant bit The following figure shows an example IEEE 488 bus address setting of 7 If address 31 is selected the address defaults to 30 because the IEEE 488 standard has reserved the IEEE Address 31 The DIP switch is only read when power is first applied to ChartScan and for that reason must be set before applying power to the unit Understanding the Hardware 959096 ChartScan User s Manual IEEE 488 Configuration Settings Standard Unit Early Production Unit T 1 i IEEE RS 422 ADDRESS en AEBEEEGN 4 5 6 8 4 5 6 7 8 comm 168421 RS232 com 168421 cA SELECT l ixis 4 SELECT L4axd 1 1x2 2 1x2 2 1x4 4 gt IEEE Address 7 4 1x4 4 Le Be 0 0x8 Q 0x16 0 L 0x16 0 Standard Units Only Early Production Units Only 1 Ensure IEEE 488 Interface is installed 1 Ensure IEEE 488 Interface is installed 2 Turn the ChartScan system s power OFF 2 Turn the ChartScan system s power OFF 3 Ensure the COMM SELECT micro switch on the rear 3 Ensure the COMM SELECT micro switch on the rear panel DIP switch is in the 1 up position This selects panel DIP switch is in the 0 down position IEEE 488 This selects IEEE 488 4 Adjust micro switches 4 through 8 for address setting see 4 Adjust mic
334. plication Query commands are immediate Their responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted before any other commands including the Execute X command Note Even though Query commands generate their responses as soon as they are interpreted they must still be followed by an Execute X command for proper termination For more information on command execution refer to the X command reference presented later in this appendix EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V1 X V X Get the response of current User Terminator PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows V1 PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 VO X V X Change User Terminator and get response PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows VO PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V4 V X Change User Terminator and get response No intermediate X command PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows VO User Terminator Response is still VO because the immediate command V was executed before the deferred command V4 PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V Get User Terminator response PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows new User Terminator V4 A 44 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Q SetQuery Terminator EXECUTION SYNTAX Set the query terminators with the following parameters r es p is the hl response terminator h is the channel terminator scan i
335. ponse of current User Terminator PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows V1 PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 VO X V X Change User Terminator and get response PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows VO PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V4 V X Change User Terminator and Get response No intermediate X command PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows VO User Terminator Response is still VO because V was executed before V4 since V is an immediate and V4 is a deferred command PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 V X Get User Terminator response PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Retrieve response INPUT A Screen shows new User Terminator V4 Note Although query commands generate their response as soon as they are interpreted they must still be followed by an Execute X command for proper termination For more information on command execution refer to the X command in Appendix A ChartScan Users Manual 958296 C 11 U Status Commands Status commands are used to return information about various ChartScan conditions The unit s status may be read at any time with no interference to normal operation Any error conditions except Calibration Errors are cleared after the status string is read by the controller The Calibration Errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated Status strings are returned when ChartScan is next addressed to Talk The terminators use
336. ppears when you attempt to run ChartView for the very first time as well as when a configuration file does not exist When a configuration file already exists you can easily access the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Wizard in the Chart pull down menu It is important to realize running the Chart Setup Wizard will result in a reset of your display setup it will not however change your channel and alarm configuration with the exception of new display channels now enabled The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the following e number of chart groups available for viewing e number of charts shown for each selected group e the number of overlapping channels in each chart not to exceed 4 You can choose to manually create a configuration or have one created automatically The automatic setup method offers three choices Simple Moderate and Advanced Moderate and advanced are only available with ChartView Plus Note You can use Chart Setup Wizard to quickly set up a large number of charts You can then fine tune the layout manually via the Manual Chart Creation feature CV 48 ChartView 988992 Software Reference A Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a manual mode This option makes use of ChartView s Display Configuration feature discussed on page CV 12 Manual chart creation allows you to vary the number of assigned channels
337. ppendix C The Set Real Time Clock command is used to set the battery backed internal real time clock of the unit In order for the time date stamped data to be accurate the internal real time clock must be set to an accurate time date Once set however the battery backed real time clock will remember the current time even when powered off EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 S 14 00 00 0 4 30 93X Current date and time A 50 958296 ChartScan User s Manual T Set Trigger Configuration SYNTAX Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following parameters Start is the start event stop is the stop event r e ar m determines if the unit should continue acquiring after the first acquisition completes where 1 is on and 0 is off Sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronized with the internal timebases where 1 is on and 0 is off Query the present trigger configuration DESCRIPTION The Set Trigger Configuration T command is the central command which controls how an acquisition is to be configured Upon execution of this command the unit enters the acquiring mode This will be indicated on the front panel by the flashing of the TRIGGER light If a pre trigger has been configured via the Y command then the sampling for pre trigger data will begin at this time Since the Set Trigger Configuration command controls the configuration of an acquisition all other acquisition dependent commands should be
338. quisition Parameters Scan Counts O Pre tigger O Post Stop Average weight Je 4 Mode Normal High speed single channel Burst Mode Setting Average Weight to 32 in the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box 4 Run the acquisition as normal Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 45 Data Destination Dialog Box The Data Destination dialog box can be accessed from the Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters screen following figure by selecting the Data Destination tab or by selecting Data Destination from the Setup pull down menu The box contains two panels The upper panel is labeled Data Destination The lower panel is labeled Binary data options and selected file formats Data Destination The Data Destination portion of the box is used to assign a Data File Name and a Base Directory location 1 e the location of the new data file s The panel includes an Auto Re Arm section Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Data destination Data File Name Jcharty iat Base Directory C PROGRAM FILES CHART VIEW SAPPLICS TIONS Browse Auto Rem M Enable Auto Re Arm Filename Incrementind Fi t hart 000D iot w Convert when done a 0 j iii gt Convert on the fly Last 5 chartvO005 iot Binary data options and selected file formats ae C PROGRAM
339. quisition is taking place Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A B 8 958296 ChartScan User s Manual CSN14 HV S Configuring High Volts Channels When the CSN14 HV S signal conditioning module is used ChartScan measures high voltages providing a programmable range per channel To configure the channels on a CSN14 HV S use the Configure Channel C command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module Channels not included in the channel scan do not have to be configured In addition to channel type each channel in the scan can optionally have a high and low alarm level and hysteresis associated with it ChartScan s alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of desired limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on ChartScan s back panel More information on using alarms appears later in this appendix in the section Configuring Alarms The CSN14 HV S supports both DC and AC voltages Simply select the desired channel type during configuration 250 V 250 V Note Above mentioned ranges are maximum peak to peak signals for AC volts Vrms values are accurate to 70 7 of peak value The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a high volts channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition
340. r character should be used Valid options forsep are 0 Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read Q Query current terminator settings QC Query Card Data QC Read back card ID and calibration information from the card previously selected by the Select Card C command 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where t y pe is the type of data request being made Valid options fort ype are 1 Read the oldest scan currently residing in the acquisition buffer 2 Read the oldest complete trigger block currently residing in the acquisition buffer and 3 Read all the scan data that currently resides in the acquisition buffer Query the contents of the data buffer Read Last Readings Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where l lt chan lt max orfirst last fora range of channels where 1 lt first lt l ast lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 Set Real Time Clocks Set the unit s internal real time clock where t i me is in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes 9 is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and y y is year Query the in
341. ram Trigger Times Deferred Quey Immediate Set Query Terminator Deferred Query Card Data Immediate Read Buffered Data Immediate Read Last Readings Immediate Set Real Time Clocks Immediate Set Trigger Configuration Deferred User Status Immediate Set User Terminator Deferred _Set Averaging Weight Deferred Execute Immediate Deferred lt EOS EK Eda PS Er A At Eee D Ee l Hi e EN Et i G i H pe peas Ph K M M N E pee a is pees OC R R cee ures Ev We E Pye 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Deferred Commands Order of Execution The immediate commands take effect immediately when they are interpreted Even so they must be followed by an Execute x command to terminate the command string for correct operation For example K00001X Deferred commands are not executed until the x command has been successfully parsed and interpreted Upon interpretation of the x command the order of execution of all deferred commands is as follows Order O Foncion O OS 4 V SetUserterminator OOS 2 Set Query Terminator O o 3 F SeDaafomt O O O o 4 m SetSRQMask O O OO OOS 5 N SetEvenMak O O O 6 lt Set Trigger Level O OC O CRE T E a ia a ao mn 412 C Configure Channels SSS t Clear Channel Configuration SCS Set Averaging Weight Program Trigger Times Set Scan Interval Set Count
342. rds Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card Banana Plug Type Harness for CSN14 HV S see note Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter used for verification of calibration voltages see required specifications on page 6 2 Note The harness for CSN14 HV S is illustrated later in this section WARNING High voltage potentials exist which could cause serious injury or death Observe proper electrical safety precautions throughout this procedure CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain and the signal conditioning cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards for gain CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquis
343. re Reference 988992 ChartView CV 31 Bar Graph Meters Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Bar Graph window This window displays several channels in bar graph format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time w 1H ene aul dx H ChartView Bar Graph Meters Control View Biel Es 0 100000 4 0 050000 0 050000 D Select Channel 6 O 000000 O 000000 Set Scale 7 Show Peak Hold Indicator g O 050000 0 050000 Reset Peak Hold Indicator 9 0 100000 0 100000 Show Trend Indicator 40 1 CH1 OsS4 FS Y 2 CHe O 0354 3 Y Set Limits Show Limits Properties Bargraph Meters Shown with 3 Meters Selected for Viewing Note 1 Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop up menu item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu The items in this window are as follows A Start C Reset Peak Hold E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu These items are discussed in more detail following the description of Digital Meters Configuration Note f
344. red channels You can not access HLL Registers of non configured channels You can clear the High and Low readings for each actively configured channel in any of the following ways e Power cycle ChartScan e Create a new channel configuration e Explicitly clear the readings by command This is discussed in the next section Note When the High and Low values are cleared their associated Time Date Stamps are cleared as well After being cleared the new High and Low values along with their associated Time Date Stamp will be initialized on the next updating of the HLL Registers Accessing HLL Registers C 2 You can access the HLL Registers by issuing commands from the controller You can use the commands to access any or all the HLL contents of configured channels as well as clear the High and Low readings and associated Time Date Stamps Briefly the commands are as follows U4 Read HLL Registers for all configured channels U5 Read HLL Registers for all configured channels and reset the High and Low values U13 Read Last only for all configured channels R Read Last only for channel s specified Note The HLL registers contain the highest and lowest values of the channel since it was last cleared and the last value read for each channel in the channel scan Two queries are available to read the HLL registers U4 and U5 The U4 command requests the HLL data while U5 requests the HLL data then clears and resets the high and low val
345. reference Specifications and Calibration Specifications are subject to change without notice Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to the manual As applicable the hardware is calibrated to published specifications Periodic hardware calibration is not covered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual Improper calibration procedures may void the warranty Your order was carefully inspected prior to shipment When you receive your system carefully unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales representative Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory CAUTION Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause personal injury or equipment damage Before setting up and using your equipment you should read all documentation that covers your system Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions Note During software installation Adobe PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support The default location is in the Programs group which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop Initial navigation is as follows Start Desktop Start pull down menu gt Programs gt IOtech ChartView You can also a
346. ro switches 4 through 8 for parameter following table for standard units preferences see following table for early production units Note Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton If you have an early production unit refer to the right hand DIP switch illustration above IEEE 488 Settings Standard Units COMM 1 0 Serial Communication RS 232 or SELECT RS 422 depending on switch 9 1 Selects IEEE 488 HANDSHAKE oy No effect when switch 1 is set to 1 H S IEEE 488 ADDRESS Decimal Values IEEE 488 Settings Early Production Units COMM 1 0 selects IEEE 488 interface card SELECT 1 Selects RS 232 422 HANDSHAKE No effect when switch 1 is set to 0 H S IEEE 488 ADDRESS Decimal Values 6 7 8 RS 232 or i i ai ae CALIBRATION 0 Calibration Mode Disabled RS 422 MODE 1 Calibration Mode Enabled normal position is 0 disabled ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Understanding the Hardware 3 13 Digital I O Lines ChartScan has eight digital input lines and thirty two digital output lines available on a rear panel DB 50 connector These lines can be output and or input using ChartScan commands Note The first 16 output lines are available for use with relays via the high current CSN Relay card option If used the relay card must be installed in slot 1 bottom slot of the ChartScan main unit The CSN Relay card is discussed at the end
347. roller to deplete the FIFO buffer as the data is being collected or a buffer overrun error will occur A Post Stop Event Count can also be associated with an acquisition to collect a counted amount of samples after the Stop Event occurs If a trigger is encountered before the pre trigger count is satisfied the unit will trigger but have fewer than the specified pre trigger count in its buffer The Buffer Status String U6 command can be used to query the box for the size of the pre trigger Although normal pre trigger scans are acquired as soon as the acquisition is armed they are not available or valid until the start trigger event occurs Note The unit can be configured to have different timebases for its pre and post trigger states When the user specified trigger condition is satisfied the unit goes from the pre trigger to the post trigger state changing its timebase if configured to do so Refer to the Continuous Gap Free Acquisition with Two Timebases in Appendix B for more information High Speed Single Channel Mode When in High speed single channel mode burst mode count see syntax is used to select the number of 256 sample blocks to collect Valid values for count are as follows In each case the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2 EXAMPLE for Normal Mode PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q1 0 1 1 1X Set the reading separator flag ON PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Data format is engineering units degr
348. roup and target chart selected For additional information refer to Chart Display Pop up Menu in the the main ChartView section of this manual ChartScan User s Manual 948591 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 1 9 Once ChartView has a configuration file you can start the program quickly using the Windows Run dialog box Before executing this command by clicking on the OK box specify a configuration file as a command line parameter In the following example the user has specified a configuration file which he had previously saved as Testl cvw Note The file name can be manually entered or can be accessed using the pull down arrow and scrolling the list of available file names Run Ei Ea Type the name of a program folder or document ard Windows will open it for you Oper C lxferiChartviewNEWichartw exe Testi cvw m Ten hartviewhEV wich arb C lxferiChartviewNEWichartw exe Testi cvw m Testi cvw Y Cancel Browse Browse Drive Folder Folder cyw File Single Space Exe File Example of Using Windows Run Dialog Box to Open a File After executing the command ChartView s Main Window opens At this point review the following configurable items prior to Data Acquisition Make changes or load a different configuration file if desired Device Interface Check the Interface and Status via the Device pull down menu Channel Configuration Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Chan
349. rows or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections for the number of groups charts and channels as applicable 5 If you desire to start with a channel other than channel 1 use the pull down arrow and select the desired starting channel number 6 When your setup is complete click on the Automatic Chart Creation Create Charts button A percentage of completion bar will appear followed by the Channel and Alarm Setup box 7 Make appropriate configuration changes if any are desired including enabling additional channels then click on the OK button After clicking OK the Main Window appears and you can begin running charts The Channel and Alarm Setup section of this chapter contains related information The channels in the setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on ChartView s Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart for ChartView Plus applications and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time As mentioned earlier you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data to disk however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup You can bypass Chart Setup Wizard by clicking on the Manual Chart Cr
350. rt and or Stop Event When External TTL Level is specified as a trigger source T6 or T7 a TTL level signal on the external trigger connector rear panel BNC will generate a trigger The external trigger is level sensitive and triggering on the high level or low level can be specified Selected Temperature Channel High or Low Level Start and or Stop Event When a selected channel is specified data collection starts when the level for the selected channel has been crossed either high level or low level as the user defined with the L command GET Note GET is not applicable to RS 232 applications Start and or Stop Event When GET is selected as the trigger source T2 data collection starts whenever the IEEE488 Group Execute Trigger GET command is sensed on the IEEE 488 bus and ChartScan is addressed to LISTEN TALK Note TALK is not applicable to RS 232 applications Start and or Stop Event When TALK is selected as the trigger source T3 data collection starts when ChartScan is addressed to TALK character Start and or Stop Event When is selected as the trigger source the command trigger generates a trigger when the Trigger Source is set for a command trigger T1 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 15 Alarm on or off Start and or Stop Event When alarm is selected as a trigger source the acquisition will start or stop when any channel goes into or out of an alarm condition Absolute time
351. rt of ChartView the default configuration is automatically loaded If the default configuration becomes corrupt or if you would like to bypass the default configuration when starting ChartView you can hold down the Shift Key when starting ChartView This causes the program to ignore the default channel configuration settings and causes the ChartView Startup dialog box to appear This allows you to select Load File to make use of a specified channel configuration file from a previously saved configuration Chart Ea wizard Cla Setup Display configuration Open 5 a Stop FG Paige FF Hertmrodp Ett Faster Chrl 7 Chart 1 Slower Ctrl Chart 2 zoom ee S vR hF Absolute Ctrl F4 Grid limit lines Solid Chrl F2 w Relative Ctrl F5 Timestamp d Dots Ctri F3 Wizard Ctrl W Accesses Chart Setup Wizard feature for automated chart configuration Setup Accesses Chart Setup window allowing you to edit your display configuration Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 21 CV 22 Display config Note Start F5 Stop F6 Pause F7 Next Group Ctrl G Faster Ctrl Z Slower Ctrl X Zoom Restore Grid limit lines Off Ctrl F1 solid Ctrl F2 Dots Ctrl F3 Timestamp Absolute Ctrl F4 Relative Ctrl F5 View Allows you to Open a previously saved display configuration file save the current display configuration file or save the current display configuration file in a different
352. rt with 4 channels for standard ChartView users the display will be for 1 group only Because Automatic Chart Creation was chosen starting with Channel 1 for ChartView Plus users the Channel arrangement was automatically assigned as follows Chart 1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Chart 1 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 Chart 2 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Chart 3 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 Chart 2 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 Chart 3 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 By using the mouse arrow and clicking on a Group Chart or Channel you will alter the appearance of the display but not alter its actual configuration For example in the previous Display tree figure we see channels 1 through 4 assigned to Chart 1 of the first Group gt 11 ChartView Plus users click on the word number Group 2 gt 12 ChartView Plus users click on the word number Chart 3 of Group 2 You should now see channels 21 through 24 listed at that location The channels in the setup you just created will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on ChartView sS Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at a time even if you are using ChartView Plus You can enable additional channels from the Channel Configuration window This allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView sS Main Window In other word
353. rval command Post Trigger scans will be collected at this rate until the stop event occurs The number of scans collected during the Post Trigger state is not restricted by the internal buffer size ChartScan can collect scans in the post trigger state indefinitely if the controlling computer is capable of reading data out of the acquisition buffer fast enough to prevent a buffer overrun The Post Trigger state may be detected by querying the Triggered Bit of the Status Byte STB Register and the Stopped Bit of the Event Status Register ESR ChartScan is in the Post Trigger state if and only if the Triggered Bit of the STB is set and the Stopped Bit of the ESR is not set The unit will exit the Post Trigger state when the stop event occurs Post Stop State The Post Stop state is the period between the occurrence of the stop event and the completion of the acquisition While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated at the post stop scan rate ChartScan will only enter this state when a non zero value of the post stop count parameter of the Set Counts Y command has been specified If this is the case upon the occurrence of the stop event the unit will enter the Post Stop state and collect the specified number of post stop scans When the specified number of post stop scans have been collected the unit will terminate the current acquisition and return to a non acquiring
354. ry system settings 4 Query current High Low Last registers 5 Query and clear current High Low Last 6 Query the Buffer Status String 7 Query assigned alarm outputs 8 Query configured channels 9 Query digital inputs 10 Query memory option in Kbytes 11 Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints 12 Query last calibration time date 13 Query last scan read 14 Query card IDs 15 Query product information 16 Query measuring mode parameters 17 Query root mean square RMS 18 Query acquisition states and various system flags DESCRIPTION The User Status U command is used to return information about various conditions of the unit and may be sent at any time without interfering with normal operation Any error conditions except Calibration Errors are cleared after the status string is read by the controller Calibration errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated Status strings are returned when the unit is next addressed to Talk The terminators used and the use of the End Or Identify EOI line can be changed with the Set Query Terminator Q and Set User Terminator V commands If the unit is configured to trigger on Talk requesting a status report will not cause the unit to trigger The following paragraphs provide more detailed information about the U responses U0 Reads and clears the Event Status Register ESR Refer to the Status and Event Reporting sections of Appendix C for details on
355. s Charts I Restrict scroll speed to actual scan rate Cancel Restricts Scroll Speed to Eliminate Aliasing It is possible for chart displays to exhibit aliasing when using ChartScan NetScan or MultiScan devices The aliasing effect can be eliminated from the display by enabling the Restrict scroll speed to actual scan rate feature This reduces the scroll speed to a range that results in non aliased displays System Communications Timeout 2A Timeout seconds E Reties 0 AC Line Frequency A i 60Hz 0 50 Hz Cancel Determines Communication Timeout in Seconds and Communications Timeout Panel The system communications timeout determines how long the software will wait in seconds before declaring a detected communications error You can enter a number for retries AC Line Frequency Radio buttons provide a choice of 60 Hz or 50 Hz The default is 60 Hz The frequency indicated 1 e 50 Hz or 60 Hz needs to agree with the frequency of the power supply to your scan unit Under the System tab of the View Menu s Option Settings the frequency indicated i e 50 Hz or 60 Hz needs to agree with the frequency of the power supply to your scan unit 988992 ChartView CV 23 Acquisition T Automatic Keyboard Trigger on Auto Rearm P Ask to overwrite existing data files Cancel Auto Re Arm Trigger and Overwrite Options Automatic Keyboard Trigger on Auto Re Arm
356. s Hardware configuration for RS 232 and IEEE 488 are discussed in Chapter 3 Configuration for Net232 Ethernet RS 232 Converter is discussed in the Net232 User s Guide part number 1037 0921 Contents Memory Allocation B 2 Measuring Modes B 3 Overview B 3 Normal Mode B 4 High Speed Single Channel Mode Burst Mode B 5 Configuration Requirements B 6 Channel Configuration B 7 CSN14 TC P Configuring Thermocouple Channels B 8 CSN14 LV T B or S Configuring Low Volts Channels B 8 CSN14 HV S Configuring High Volts Channels B 9 Scan Configuration B 10 Configuring a Scan B 10 Configuring the Scan Interval B 10 Acquisition Configuration B 11 Introduction B 11 Pre Trigger State B 11 Continuous Gap Free Acquisition with Two Timebases B 13 Post Trigger State B 14 Post Stop State B 14 Trigger and Stop Events B 15 Time Stamping T B 16 Alarm Stamping A B 17 Digital Input Stamping I B 18 Acquisition Buffer A Description B 19 Trigger Block Organization B 19 Multiple Trigger Blocks B 21 Acquisition Buffer Interrogation B 22 Reading the Acquisition Buffer B 25 Configuring Alarms B 27 Alarm Setpoints B 27 Digital alarm Outputs B 27 Setpoint Hysteresis B 28 Digital I O Operation
357. s Set Trigger Configuration Trigger On Command Y 7 Note Data acquisition may begin once the Set Trigger Configuration T command has been defined The above order of deferred commands ensures the configuration of acquisitions will take place before any data is acquired ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 5 Command Summary Trigger On Command Trigger on receipt of an Flush Acquisition oS Flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer Buffer yas Clear Channel C Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are Configuration configured F Restore Factory F Restore unit to factory configuration Settings K Change Calibration Kkey Change the calibration keyword where key is the keyword in the Keyword form of a 5 digit number nnn nn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters Adjust Calibration Card Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment Valid options Pots forchan are 01 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card 02 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card and 03 Select 0 Volts GND Power On Reset Power on reset Equivalent to hardware reset mS Power Up Settings Smode Specify power up configuration mode Valid options for mo de are 0 Power up under last known configuration default and 1 Power up under factory default configuration Time Stamping Tstate Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled Valid options for state
358. s you can acquire data from channels which you do not monitor gt 13 Click Okay to exit the dialog box 1 14 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual 3 Configure Channels amp Alarms Configure channels and alarms as follows gt 14 On ChartView s Main Window click on Setup in the pull down menu row The Setup pull down menu appears allowing you to make more specific selections Setup larm Channels amp Alarms Ctrl L Acquisition Ctrl C Data destination 3 gt 15 Click on the Channels amp Alarms selection The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box appears similar to that shown in the following figure Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination CHOOSE TYPE dem een S E Channel Configuration J JCH G r 60 3276 60 00050 oo J CH2 JE 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 2 00054 40 J CH3 C 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 3 00051 40 J CH4 E 3276 60 3276 60 aa 00053 20 J CH5 E 3276 60 3276 60 TET n pa 00053 80 J CHG T 3276 60 3276 60 TET i OaE 00050 00 J CH7 E 3276 60 3276 60 TET aR Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Channel and Alarm Setup Button Descriptions Button 1 Turn On All Channels Alt N Button 2 Turn Off All Channels Not Assigned to Charts Alt F Button 3 Turn On Off Channel Readings Alt R Button 4 Print Entire Channel and
359. s of various channels to one of the 32 digital TLL level outputs located on the back panel You can tie as many of the alarm conditions as you want to any digital output Use the C and A commands to configure alarm conditions for driving the digital output lines to enable alarm monitoring e C command determines the high and low setpoints and hysteresis of the alarm condition e A command assigns an input channel alarm to a digital output The following example indicates how to configure alarms and associate them with digital outputs for 24 channels on ChartScan PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 24 1 100 0 100 0 10 0X Setup channels 1 24 type J low setpoint 100 0 C high setpoint 100 0 hysteresis 10 0 C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Al 1X Assign alarm channel 1 to Digital Output 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A2 2X Assign alarm channel 2 to Digital Output 2 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 27 As mentioned before more than one channel can be assigned to any given output bit For example if the following statement were appended to the above example then either channel 2 or channel 3 will set digital output 2 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A3 2X Assign alarm channel 3 to digital output 2 To disable a channel from an alarm assign the channel to the null or O output PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A3 0X Disable channel 3 from digital output 2 High Set Point Hysteresis Low Set Point Enter Leave Enter Leave Alar
360. s point on text discussions will assume references to logical trigger blocks only The U6 command may be used to query the current read trigger block For example the U6 response for the previous figure assuming it was the only trigger block would be as follows PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X Get status of current read trigger block PRINT 1 ENTER 07 Get the response INPUT A Screen shows 0000001 0001234 0000076 12 34 54 200 03 23 97 00000767 12 54 12 900 03 24 97 00001156 01 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 19 This response indicates that the first available scan is 0000076 which is a pre trigger scan This scan can be retrieved as follows PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R1X Get the 0000076 scan PRINT 1 ENTER 07 Get the scan INPUT A Screen shows 4 channels configured 1234 50 0234 2040984 0010323 30 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X Now get status of current read trigger block PRINT 1 ENTER 07 Get the response INPUT A Screen shows 000001 001233 0000075 12 34 54 200 03 23 97 00000767 12 54 12 900 03 24 97 00001156 01 Notice that the current read pointer has now advanced to pre trigger location 000075 and that the total scan count has been decremented to 001233 To retrieve data after a trigger event has occurred ChartScan provides multiple query functions The R command can be used to read the last scan in the data buffer R1 the last block in the da
361. s set up for Network ethernet you should change the device interface to RS 232 serial communications prior to performing calibration Refer to your hardware setup chapter as needed To use ChartView s built in calibration feature 1 Select the desired device from the inventory list see the preceding figure 2 Click the lt Calibrate gt button on the screen A Password Dialog Box will appear prompting you to enter a calibration password H Password x Enter Calibration i Password Password Dialog Box 3 Enter the password then click the lt OK gt button The Select ChartScan Model Type dialog box will appear following figure Select ChartScan Model Type Select the Switch below that matches the switch overlay on the rear panel of your Instrument C Older ChartScan MultiScan Tempscan switches Serial _ Calibration IEEE 7 Disabled Select ChartScan Model Type Dialog Box 4 Verify that the selection previous figure is for the DIP switch that matches the overlay on the rear panel of the device If not select the other model 5 After selecting the applicable model type click the lt OK gt button The Calibration Procedure dialog box will appear similar to that indicated by the following figure At this point ChartView s calibration feature will automatically step you through the calibration process 6 After the calibration is complete return the device to its calibration protection
362. s the terminator which follows each scan output and b 0c k is the terminator which follows each trigger block output sep determines whether or not a separator character should be used Valid options fors ep are 0 Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read 10 Query current terminator settings DESCRIPTION The Set Query Terminator Q command is used to set the following query terminators resp This argument specifies the response terminator for general purpose queries issued by the controller These queries are queries that do not request High Low Last or Acquisition Buffer data This terminator is used in all query responses unless the query refers to data in the High Low Last registers or the Acquisition Buffer In these cases these types of queries have separate terminators as described below hl This argument specifies the channel terminator to be used for queries which request data residing in the High Low Last registers When this terminator is specified the terminator will be inserted between each channel response when a High Low Last register query request is made The queries that request High Low Last register data are U4 U5 U13 and R Remember the Read Last Readings R command is an HLL register query scan This argument speci
363. s well as overlapping channels up to four per chart If you have the basic ChartView program you will be limited to one group and only one channel per chart Display Configuration Setup E OF Automatically 4dd Groups to the Setup Add UMMM Groups to the Setup And create Charts in each Group Create Groups Manually Add Groupe to the Setup Enter Group name Add Display Group Display Configuration Setup The Clean Slate Approach Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 15 CV 16 ChartView As seen in the previous figure for the Clean Slate approach you have two options at this point Perform 4a or 4b as appropriate With ChartView Plus option 4a is typically used 4a Automatically add groups to the setup Enter the number of groups and charts desired by using the cursor and typing in the value or by using the pull down arrows and making the appropriate selections then click on the Create Groups button 4b Manually add groups to the setup Type in the name of the chart group then click on the Add Display Group button The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups and the number of charts for the selected black highlighted chart group From this screen you can change the number of charts in a group as well as change the group name Display Configuration Setup Ej Ok Display Number of charts in 1 the selected Group Group Nam
364. sent before the Set Trigger Configuration command is sent to the unit The commands which should be sent to the unit prior to the Set Trigger Configuration command will depend on the desired start and or stop triggers For instance if configuring for Trigger on Command it would not be necessary to send the Set Trigger Level L command The following table lists the valid trigger types and their associated required prior issue commands Start Stop Start Stop Trigger Definition Pre Trigger Required Prior Issue Trigger Post Stop Commands Type None Event Not Defined N A N A Trigger on Command See command yes no Trigger on GET IEEE 488 only yes no Trigger on Talk IEEE 488 only yes no Trigger on Channel Above Level L command yes no Trigger on Channel Below Level L command yes no Trigger on TTL Signal Rising yes no Trigger on TTL Signal Falling yes no Trigger on Count Y command Trigger on Alarm Turning On C commana yee no Trigger on Alarm Turning Off C command yes no Trigger on Absolute Time P command yes Y P no J bP Note Ifthe start and stop triggers are of different types a combination of the start and stop prior issue commands is required The Set Trigger Configuration T command is used to configure the manner in which scans are to be acquired It sets the sources to determine when an acquisition is to be initiated and when it is to be terminated It also determines how these acquisition sour
365. ser s Manual The CSN Relay card if used must be installed in the bottom slot of the main unit Aside from this requirement cards may be installed in any slot a Ensure ChartScan 1400 is powered down and not connected to any power source b With channel labels oriented upright carefully slide the card into the unit and along the card support grooves Gently force the card to engage its edge connector with ChartScan 1400 S internal mating connector c Tighten the external screws snug at each end of the card TC Volts Scanning Card with Mini Plugs Low Volts Scanning Card K with Removable Screw Terminals ee eas Card j 00000000000000 2 Low or High Volts Scanning Card 0000M 0M 00000000000 with Safety Jacks ChartScan Front Panel One of Many Possible Set ups 4 Install the IEEE 488 Interface Communications Card option if applicable If you ordered an optional IEEE 488 Interface Card CSN14 488 please refer to the JEEE 488 Configuration Option section of Chapter 3 for installation instructions 5 Connect the optional CSN Exp Expansion Chassis if applicable If you ordered an expansion chassis CSN Exp refer to Chapter 5 CSN Exp Expansion Chassis for installation instructions IV Connect the ChartScan 1400 to the Host Computer ZN Reference Note
366. shold in between scans it will not be detected or posted Alarm detection will generate an SRQ You can then issue an alarm query A which will return a 4 byte image of the 32 alarm outputs EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUT07 C1 32 1 Configure channels 1 32 100 0 100 0 1 0X PRI NT 1 OUTPUTO7 Al 1X Assign channel 1 alarm to digital output channel 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A2 16 2X Assign channels 2 16 alarms to digital output channel 2 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Al7 25 3X Assign channels 17 25 alarms to digital output channel 3 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A26 32 32X Assign channels 26 32 alarms to digital output channel 32 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 19 A Alarm Stamping System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX A state Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable alarm stamping default and 1 Enable alarm stamping DESCRIPTION The Alarm Stamping A command when enabled will append the alarm state to the end of each scan as it occurs The alarm status consists of 32 bits A31 through AOO each with a 1 signifying alarm on or a 0 signifying alarm off In Binary Low High mode 4 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 1 A07 A00 Byte 2 A15 A08 Byte 3 A23 A16 Byte 4 A31 A24 In Binary High Low mode 4 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 1 A15 A08 Byte 2 A07 A00 Byte 3 A31 A34 Byte 4 A23 A16 In ASCII mode 12 b
367. sition Scan Counts Specify the number of scans in an acquisition Parameters Pre trigger Post Stop Average weight Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode The value for the average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in Normal Mode Values of 1 2 4 and 8 are for high speed multiple channel applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue Values of 16 32 64 128 and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection Scan Intervals Time between scans frequency of scans Pre trigger and Post Stop Post trigger Use one Interval High Speed Setup Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high speed single channel mode Note These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress Note If Normal Mode is selected channels assigned to a chart must be and will be enabled in the Acquisition CV 42 ChartView 988992 Software Reference ENABLE ar DISABLE on i The assigned channels will be ON in the Channel Configuration portion of the Channel and Alarm Setup spreadsheet and Channel Configuration 1 Un d J CH1 E 3276 60 can not be turned off while assigned to a oe ee chart However additional channels not J CH4 c 3276 60 f assigned to charts can still be enabled and disabled from the Channel and Alarm Setup i H You have attempted to disable one or more channels that are assigned sheet to a Chart in
368. sk to start server if not running If MsgBox The server is not running Do you want to start it vbQuestion vbYesNo lt gt vbYes Then Bese ould End If VIEWXL Interface vxlConfig End If update current server status VIEWXL Interface vxlUpdateViewXL if the server iS acquiring stop it Tf VIEWXL Interface vxliIsAcquiring Then halt the acquisition in progress VIEWXL Interface vxlDisArmServer End If Continue with Excel VBA program vxl 12 ViewXL 989092 Software Reference Appendices Appendix A API Commands Appendix B Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D ChartScan Program Examples Appendix E Bus States Bus Lines and Data Transfer Aspects Appendix F ASCII Code Summary Appendix G ChartScan Error Messages Appendix H Abbreviations Synopsis of Appendices With exception of Appendix G these appendices provide programming related information that is not necessary for users of ChartView and ChartView Plus The appendices cover the following information Appendix A API Commands describes the entire command set for ChartScan Syntax parameters interpretation and error codes are explained Sections on the individual commands include their parameters types typical use related information and a sample program excerpt Appendix B Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation channel an
369. slot of the main unit with 1 being the bottom slot and 5 6 7 or 8 Selects the corresponding slot on the expansion chassis with slot 5 being the bottom slot of the expansion chassis With optional Relay Card installs in slot 1 Valid options for car d are 0 Selects the chassis 1 selects card in slot 2 2 selects card in slot 3 and so on with 7 selecting the card in slot 8 and no card 8 available A 6 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Command Set Relay Make Time D make Specify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before reading valid data where make is the number of 520 833 microsecond intervals End Calibration Mode E Terminate Calibration Mode Error Status Query Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following error codes E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO E004 Channel configuration error E008 Calibration error E016 Trigger overrun E032 Open TC or Range Error E128 Command conflict error Set Data Format Fengr Configure the input and output formats format engr converts the raw data to the engineering units that you prefer to work with Valid options are 0 degrees Celsius default 1 degrees Fahrenheit 2 degrees Rankine 3 degrees Kelvin and 4 Volts f or mat places the readings in a format that you prefer to work with Valid options are 0
370. sociated with 32 temperature input channels it is necessary to select 4 channels Each channel is associated with one of the 4 cold junction temperature sensors in order to calibrate all cold junction temperature sensors on a given card Note Four separate channels on each card must be supplied with an accurate thermocouple signal of known warm junction temperature The parameter t ype is the same channel type that is used with the Configure Channels C command After the command has been issued the applied thermocouple signal must remain at its value until the trigger LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results For further details on channel calibration see Chapter 6 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Apply precision temperature PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 J1 2 101 7X Compute cold junction offset for the temperature sensor associated with the type K thermocouple on channel 1 of card 1 at 101 7 C Wait for command to complete Remove precision temperature PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 EX End calibration mode A 36 958296 ChartScan User s Manual K Enter Calibration Mode Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Kkey Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword or password is correct where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters K Query Kkey as defined above DESCRIPTION Note Calibration s
371. source M004 SRQ On Ready This command causes a service request to be generated when the unit has completed executing a set of commands from the IEEE 488 bus controller This is used to allow the bus controller to attend to other bus matters while the unit is changing its internal state M008 SRQ On Scan Available Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when at least one scan is available to be read in the acquisition buffer M016 SRQ On Message Available MAV Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when there is data available in the output queue to be read M032 SRQ On Event Detected Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when at least one of the defined events in the Event Status Register has occurred Refer to the Set Event Mask N command on how to define events M128 SRQ On Buffer Overrun Sending this command will cause the unit to generate an SRQ when it has detected that an overrun of the acquisition buffer has occurred EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 MOX Clear the Service Request Enable SRE register PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 M1XM2X Set the unit to SRQ on Alarm or Trigger PRINT 1 OUTPUT0O7 M X Read the current Service Request Enable SRE register PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Computer screen shows M003 LINE INPUT 2 MS PRINT MS ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 39 M Set Measuring Mode eee a System EXECUTION Deferred S
372. st acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 X PRINT Waiting for acquisition to complete ChartScan User s Manual 958296 D 19 U 0 WHILE U AND 1 lt gt 1 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U0X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 U WE ND PRINT The Acquisition is now complete Query the ChartScan for the of 256 sample scans available in the Buffer PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U UA MID U 9 7 UVA VAL UA PRINT The ChartScan collected UA scans of data Program terminators for LF EOI and a space between channels PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 V32X Q7 0 7 7 1X Upload data one scan at a time from the ChartScan PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 R2X FOR i 1 TO UA PRINT 1 ENTER 07 INPUT 2 SCAN LOCATE 14 1 PRINT Scan i is PRINT SCAN NEXT i END 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Appendix E Bus States Bus Lines and Data Transfer Aspects Bus State Bus Line Data Transfer DIO Lines 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bus Management Lines FC Interface Clear ee IEEE 488 Interface Bus Management Lines Attention amp H04 End Or lIdentify amp H80 Service Request amp H40 IEEE 488 Interface Handshake Lines Data Valid amp H08 Not Data Accepted amp H10 Not Ready For Data amp H20 Serial Interface Bus Management Lines Data Terminal Ready amp H02 Ring Indicator amp H10 Request To Send amp H01 Serial Interface Handshake Lines Clear To Send am
373. st known configuration when it is powered on or when the Power On Reset R command is issued The last known configuration will be exactly the same as the configuration it had when it was last powered down or a R command issued Specifying this mode will insure that the unit will always come up with the configuration which has most recently been defined Using this mode is convenient if it is undesirable to reconfigure the unit every time it is powered up or a R command is issued Specifying the mode to be 1 will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration when it is powered on or when a R command is issued Using this mode is the same as power cycling the unit then issuing the F command The factory defaults settings are defined in the Configuring Power Up State section of Appendix C Note Issuing the Power Up Default Settings S1 command and then power cycling the unit or issuing the R command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors for the unit and its slaves however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the settings INPUT A Screen shows Q1 7 7 7 0 T1 3 0 0 Y000100 001000 000000 PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 S1X Configure to power up with factory defaults PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 RX Reset the unit SLEEP 5 Wait for the unit to reset PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 Q T Y X
374. status reporting UO responds with 001 Acquisition Complete 016 Execution Error 002 Stop Event 032 Command Error 004 Query Error 064 Buffer 75 Full 008 Device Dependent Error 128 Power On Ul Reads the Status Byte register STB The response to this request is the same as in an IEEE 488 Serial Poll except that bit 6 carries the Master Summary Status MSS rather than the Request for Service The Status Byte register is a read only register whose bits correspond to those of the Service Request Enable SRE register with the addition of bit value 64 which responds with the Master Summary Status The Master Summary Status bit indicates whether or not this device needs service It responds with 001 Alarm 016 Message Available 002 Triggered 032 Event Detected 004 Ready 128 Buffer Overrun 008 Scan Available U2 Read and clear the Calibration Status Register CSR The response to this request is the current contents of the Calibration Status Register This register contains information regarding the calibration of the unit and any errors encountered while attempting to calibrate the unit Refer to the following figure for details about the Calibration Status Register ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 53 STATE INDICATOR 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Loo State Indicator 00 Normal run mode 01 EPROM test mode 10 Cal mode idle 11 Cal mode cmd active BIT DEFINITIONS Normal Read Failure Write
375. stored in an on board battery backed up RAM and the constants for each signal conditioning card are stored on the card s EEPROM Hardware Protected RAM 6 2 Your scanning device contains a security circuit This circuit disables writing to the portion of battery backed up RAM which holds the main unit s calibration constants and calibration password You must enable the calibration mode prior to calibrating the main unit or changing the password Note that the calibration mode applies only to the main unit calibration not to the calibration of signal conditioning cards LLLLLLE ALARA TRG AH SENG RECENT SERIAL DIP Switch Note 2 Calibration Enable Disable RS 232 422 Pushbutton Note 1 DB9 Connector NetScan Rear Panel ChartScan s Calibration Enable Disable pushbutton is located in the same relative position Calibration 959096 ChartScan User s Manual To enable calibration locate the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton on the unit s rear panel Push the button so it is in the indent position This enables writing to RAM See previous figure for location Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For units with no calibration pushbutton a DIP Switch is used instead of the pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch s right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position CAUTION gt Unless you are setting mai
376. t 20 pA maximum Maximum Common Mode Voltage 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Maximum Normal Mode Voltage 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Allowable Input 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Channel to Channel Isolation 500 VDC or 500VAC peak Channel to Power Ground Isolation 500V DC or 500 VAC peak Note 1 Specified for coupling impedance gt 30 MQ and common mode frequency lt 60 Hz 700 VDC or 700 VAC peak 325 VDC or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC 24 scanning module before equipment damage occurs Note 2 325 VDC or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC 24 scanning module 4 4 Option Cards 959696 ChartScan User s Manual CSN Relay Card for High Current Digital Output ZB SSV WGGS8 8S SSS8 Seoo eda BZ qa aa adadad ad Ss Ny y Ne a adadad adad ad da ool ooo a ai oto E a 0 a E o O CHARISCAN A ARMIRELAY CARD i J i dannandi CSN Relay Card The high current digital output CSN Relay Card allows you to add relay functions to the first 16 digital outputs The CSN Relay card installs into ChartScan s slot 1 bottom card slot Only one relay card can be used per ChartScan unit and a relay card can not be installed in a
377. t 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 ChartScan sd 13 32 33 48 Expansion ChartScan s 64 65 80 81 96 93 112 option CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a ChartScan system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of ChartScan s main unit could possibly cause equipment damage ChartScan User s Manual 959696 Option Cards 4 5 CSN Relay Card Specifications Number of Channels 16 2 groups of 8 channels Relay Contacts Manufacturer s Ratings e 8 Amps 125 250 VAC Resistive e 5 Amps 30 VDC Resistive Card Contact Ratings 8 Amps maximum on group commons Contact to System Isolation 500 Volts AC or DC Manufacturer s ratings for the relays used on the CSN Relay Card 4 6 Option Cards 959696 ChartScan User s Manual CSN Exp Expansion Chassis option 5 Connecting the Expansion Chassis 5 1 Automatic Channel Assignment 5 3 CSN Exp Specifications 5 4 You can add up to 64 additional analog channels to ChartScan by using a CSN Exp expansion chassis The expansion chassis accepts the same types of signal conditioning cards as the ChartScan unit and is powered and controlled by the ChartScan unit Expansion channels are accessed in the same way as channels in the master ChartScan unit When the main unit detects the presence of the expansion chassis during its power on sequence the system makes the additional channels available to the user The U8 comma
378. t section of the window brings up a list of all available formats to which the selected file can be converted to Once the desired formats have been selected simply click the lt Convert gt button wa elect File s To Convert Look im bin 2 24 03 1 53 30 PM Source File s chartv iot Formats Target Directory C PROGRAM FILES CHARTVIEW APPLICATIONS Data files are placed in format specitic subdirectories of the target directory Browse Exit Selecting a File for Conversion Device Interface gt Setup IEEE 488 Status d Setup RS 232 Setup Network w Simulated Instrumert Setup IEEE 488 The IEEE 488 Setup dialog box appears Valid addresses are O to 30 DIP switch settings must agree with this setup For ChartScan an IEEE 488 interface card is required for use of IEEE 488 interface NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications you must make use of an IOtech Driver 488 driver In addition the device must be configured in the Driver 488 and be named WAVE NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface IEEE 488 Setup IEEE Board EEEQ IEEE Address lo zj CV 26 ChartView 988992 Software Reference Setup The RS 232 Setup dialog box appears If Yes is chosen for modem the RS 232 Setup RS 232 window changes allowing you to cancel your call waiting service by entering your can
379. t the specified file is known to be compatible with the currently running acquisition application for example ChartView or DaqView 1 Start by clicking the lt Run Macro gt toolbar button Clicking the Run Macro Button following figure This brings up the Macro dialog box where we will create a new macro 2 Enter the name GetData in the Macro name field then press the lt Create gt button as indicated in the following figure Macro RAEI Macro name GetData Run a Cancel a Sa Ea B i N Step Into Edit E Delete Macros in fan Open Workbooks Options Description Creating a Macro Named GetData You will see the newly created macro in the Visual Basic editor 989092 457 0913 rev 3 0 vxl 10 ViewXL 3 Inside the Macro between the Sub and End Sub lines type in the string viewxl interface see following figure As you type the Period character after the word interface you will see a list pop up that shows the ViewXL Add In functions 4 Select vxlLoadConfigFile from the list I General GetData oub Getbatal wiew l Interface End Sub wlConfig lt gt v DisSArmm Server gt vwlLoadConfigkjle D valSetDataDestmation S villsebataDestination valllseHeader GetData Macro 5 Enter a Blank Space after the macro and enter the name of the configuration file In this case we will use exceltest cfg as indicated in the following figure
380. t the voltage indicated by a sticker or tag located on the rear of the unit near the power switch If you need to change the voltage selection complete the following steps WARNING Never disassemble ChartScan s case while it is connected to the AC power line Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog lines 3 disconnect AC power line 4 disconnect all additional lines WARNING Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan while analog connections to an external device exist Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge 1 Ensure the ChartScan is not connected to any power source 2 Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and on side of unit and slide top cover plate free of ChartScan unit 3 Locate the two position slide on the power supply board You will notice the switch above the AC power inlet The number visible 115 or 230 indicates the selected power setting To change the voltage selection from 115V to 230V press down on the switch To change the voltage selection from 230V to 115V press up on t
381. t trigger block that the stop event occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 6 Stop Event Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the stop event occurred for the current trigger block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 958296 ChartScan User s Manual 7 End Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current trigger block that the end scan occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer unless a post stop count is specified Y command in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event Pointer by the value of the post stop count 8 Block Status This field represents the status of the current trigger block If the current tri
382. t user terminator value Set Average Weight In Normal mode specify the number of samples to average for line cycle integration or high speed multi channel use where wt is the average weight Valid options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and256 with 32 being the default value X Execute X Execute preceding command string Set Counts Ypre post When in Normal mode set acquisition counts where pr e is the stop pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and st Op is the post stop count Select Blocks YQ count 0 When in High speed single channel mode burst mode set count wherecount is the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Query current acquisition count selections ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 9 A 10 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Command Reference The following pages provide the command set for ChartScan For each command the command name the descriptive name and the command description are given In turn the command description includes the following format Command Description Format Type This item refers to the part of the system that the command acts upon The defined Types are as follows Refers to those commands which affect how the scans channels are acquired Refers to those commands which affect the buffer operations and or pointers Calibration Refers to those commands which affect instrument calibration Refers to those commands which affect channel c
383. ta buffer R2 or all the data available R3 The U6 command will query the current trigger block for a variety of information such as the trigger block number current scan in block the scan number that trigger occurred etc See the U command description in the Command Reference section for details Ue Tecan 15 Read Pointer Pre trigger Pre trigger SE PAnR ees Z Scan 000a Scan Nolonger Scan 000 each scan is accessable e a ay l Wo ooo l Post trigger Post trigger EE Scans Pe 379th Scan Scans E _ E 768th Scan 768th Scan e E o Post stop Post stop Scans Scans aoe ete el 1157th Scan 1157th Scan The Read Pointer is at Due to Reads Read the first scan in the Pointer has advanced trigger block into Post Trigger area Trigger Block Read Operations B 20 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Multiple Trigger Blocks Through the Auto Rearm capability of ChartScan it is possible to capture more than one trigger block in the unit s Acquisition Buffer Each trigger block would contain one and only one trigger point These trigger blocks are stacked end to end in the buffer as the last reading of the first trigger block is read by the controller the next scan to be read will be from the second trigger block The trigger can only be re armed after a trigger block has been completed If the Auto Rearm feature is not in use a T command must be issued to re arm ChartScan for acquisition
384. tage according to Installation Categories Overvoltage Category II for mains supply The minimum and normal category is II Pollution Degree I in accordance with IEC 664 Number of Option Card Slots 4 Number of Channels up to 64 channels expandable to 128 with ChartScan expansion chassis 16 channels per card up to 4 cards installed in ChartScan up to 4 additional cards with use of ChartScan expansion chassis Channel Attributes High and low set points hysteresis values for high and low set points Scan Sequence Any combination of temperature and voltage channels may be scanned but channels are scanned in ascending numerical order Scan Interval Absolute time between scans hh mm ss t min 00 00 00 0 max 99 59 59 9 Note Specifying a value of 00 00 00 0 results in no delay between channel scans 2 4 Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual Installation Category CE Category Programmable Triggering Temperature or Voltage level above or below absolute time of day alarm condition on or off IEEE GET IEEE TALK external TTL trigger rising or falling specified number of readings Temperature Level Trigger Programmable value for any one channel Not available in Burst mode TTL Trigger Programmable for rising or falling edges Pre Trigger Count and Post Trigger Count Programmable integer lt memory size 1 and programmable integer Digital Filtering
385. tage as a function of ambient temperature to create the effect of a cold junction at the main unit Adjust the output setting to the desired temperature and verify the channel reading is within the range of ChartScan s or NetScan s tolerance band for the T C type and temperature Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels Repeat this test for all thermocouple type signal conditioning cards The T C Calibrator Simulator Method is not recommended because unlike voltage calibrators T C Calibrator Simulators have no provisions for remote sensing and are therefore more readily subject to the transient effects of sampled data acquisition systems such as ChartScan and NetScan These transient effects can cause erroneous readings even when both units are calibrated within specifications 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Cold Cell T T i i Type T C Wire Simulator for 0 C and subminiature plug connector iee 1 Thermocouples 2 fae SS at 0 C O O 4 4 fe J INP T a rS Ee on I alt Jellelautelle e delle laala fs alk 4 4 00 4 3 alla alla 4 400 4 8 fo lls al ee 1 i T WZ HI w gili o U 17 B
386. tamps start at 00 00 00 Select the desired scroll rate for the chart from a pull down list Elect to have solid limit lines dotted limit lines or no limit lines off Restore the selected chart s default values The grids are turned on timestamps are off the scroll rate of 1 sec div is selected and the limit line option is turned off Using the pop up menus Edit current channel feature l Chart View Simulated Instrument File Chart View Acquire Data Window Device Setup Group 1 oA RE a a pe vi sev son A as Nac aa i tan as T de fost besoei Papapa Si ae paaie ot eS LMT teen ar 50 0014 Center 13 702 C ddi fs37000 c e 49 5033 Center 4 13 5555 Ho div an hat Clear chart 2 Clear all charts amp timestamp Restore all charts properties Syne all charts amp timestamp v Main Timestamp visible Properties ef 50 0014 Center 13 702 4 Of div 4 1 sec div Initializing Chatting Disk O Buffering in Instrument Uploading Selecting Edit Current Channel from the Pop up Menu Perform the following steps to edit a channel by using the pop up menu The step numbers correspond directly to the numbers in the preceding figure Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 9 CV 10 ChartView 1 2 3 Look at the channel selection box to ensure t
387. ted for that line voltage must be used 2 6 Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual Calibration Calibration must be completed periodically to ensure equipment is accurate and can be performed manually or with the use ChartView s calibration feature Chapter 6 contains instructions including calibration equipment requirements for the following ChartScan main unit calibration for offset and gain Offset calibration for all card types Gain calibration for low volts cards Gain calibration for high volts cards Cold junction calibration for TC cards Note ChartScan main unit constants are stored in NV RAM Signal Conditioning Card constants stored in each card s EEPROM Note Industry standard calibration period is once every year Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual 2 7 2 8 Operational Aspects amp Specifications 949091 ChartScan User s Manual Understanding the Hardware 3 Front and Rear Panels 3 1 Power Aspects 3 3 Changing the Voltage Setting 3 3 Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse 3 4 Memory Configuration 3 4 Expanded Memory Options 3 4 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable 3 6 Interface Configurations 3 7 RS 232 422 Interface Configuration 3 7 Ethernet Interface Configuration 3 10 IEEE 488 Configuration Option 3 12 Digital I O Lines 3 14 L
388. ternal real time clock Set Trigger Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following Configuration parameters start is the start event and st 0p is the stop event r e arm determines if the unit should continue acquiring after the first acquisition completes where 1 is on and 0 is off sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronized with the internal timebases where 1 is on and 0 is off Query the present trigger configuration User Status Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where r eq refers to one of the following request types 0 Query and clear the Event Status Register ESR 1 Query the Status Byte Register STB 2 Query and clear Calibration Status Register CSR 3 Query system settings 4 Query current High Low Last registers 5 Query and clear current High Low Last 6 Query the Buffer Status String 7 Query assigned alarm outputs 8 Query configured channels 9 Query digital inputs 10 Query memory option in Kbytes 11 Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints 12 Query last calibration time date 13 Query last scan read 14 Query card IDs 15 Query product information 16 Query measuring parameters 17 Query root mean square RMS 18 Query acquisition states and various system flags V Set User Terminator Vval Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value val is in the range 0 to255 Query the presen
389. terpreted as Engineering Units These parameters will always be interpreted as Engineering Units as currently defined by the Engineering Units argument of the F command except when the Counts format is specified When the Counts format is specified these parameters are interpreted as Counts For additional information on the different format types see the Data Format section in Appendix C If readings are interpreted as Counts or Binary format then the engineering unit parameter of the F command is ignored continued A 28 958296 ChartScan Users Manual Data Output Formats Data Type Engineering Units Counts High Byte Low Byte Low Byte High Byte Temperature XX XX H L gl XXXXX XX XX K Volts Time Date hh mmi ss mil hms t MDY hh mm ss mil Absolute MM DD YY MM DD YY Relative hh mm ss mil hms t MDY hh mm ss mil DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD Timebase Interpreted as engineering units Interpreted as engineering units Legend X ASCII digit H high order byte X ASCII digit h hours L low order byte h hours m minutes h hours m minutes S seconds i S seconds mi see Note 1 mi see Note 1 MM months MM months DD days DD days YY years YY years DDDDDDDD Days DDDDDDDD Days Note 1 mil is milliseconds for ASCII but microseconds for binary 2 hexidecimal output format Data output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may b
390. th ChartView Plus Create Charts Automatic Chart Creation Simple Moderate Advanced Create 3 Display Groupe Tw ith 2 Charts per group overlapping channels That have fa per chart Starting with channel CH1 Automatic Chart Creation Simple Moderate Advanced Create 16 Charts l mE q overlapping channels with per chart Starting with channel CH The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 The above setup will assign 64 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CHE4 The above setup will assign 24 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CH24 Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation ChartView Plus Only Software Reference 988992 ChartView CV 49 It is a simple task to create chart display configurations using the automatic method The following steps apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard 1 Select Wizard from the Chart pull down menu of ChartView s main window The New Display Setup dialog box appears Hew Display Setup AN This operation will reset your Display Setup Cancel 2 Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box The Wizard setup window appears 3 Select the desired mode tab Simple Moderate or Advanced Moderate and advanced modes are only available with ChartView Plus 4 Use the pull down ar
391. the subroutine named in the ON PEN GOSUB command To activate this feature in the Personal488 driver the command ARM SRQ must be sent to the driver ON PEN GOSUB AlarmHandler PEN ON PRINT 1 ARM SRQ The M1 command instructs the unit to assert the SRQ signal when it is in an alarm state PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 M1X 958296 ChartScan User s Manual The C command is used twice to configure multiple channels as part of the scan group and to assign them a type Additionally the alarm parameters for channels one and two are used to activate the alarms for those channels Although 16 channels are included in the scan group only 2 are armed for alarming After the C command is issued the ChartScan is now completely armed for alarming In our example levels above 25 or below 1 for channels 1 or 2 will cause a system alarm Since the M1 command has already been issued this will also result in an IEEE 488 SRQ assertion If the intent of the application was to use alarm levels to trigger an acquisition only the following 2 lines would be required to arm the alarms to satisfy the trigger and or stop events PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 3X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 2 3 1 25 0X In addition to causing an internal system alarm state the alarm conditions can also be attached to any one of the 16 digital output lines The A command is used to assign the temperature input channel to the digital alarm bit PRINT 1 OUTPUT
392. the COMM SELECT micro switch on the rear 2 Ensure the COMM SELECT micro switch on the rear panel DIP switch is in the 0 down position panel DIP switch is in the 1 up position 3 Set micro switches 2 through 9 according to the following 3 Set micro switches 2 through 8 according to the following table for standard units Note that the configuration table for early production units Note that the configuration depicted above is recommended depicted above is recommended Note Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton If you have an early production unit refer to the right hand DIP switch illustration above RS 232 422 Serial Settings Standard Units RS 232 422 Serial Settings Early Production Units Setting The recommended settings are in bold COMM 0 Serial Communication RS 232 or COMM SELECT RS 422 depending on switch 9 SELECT 1 Selects IEEE 488 HANDSHAKE 0 0 No Handshake HANDSHAKE H S 0 1 Software Handshake Only H S XON XOFF 1 0 Hardware Handshake Only RTS CTS 1 1 Both Hardware and Software Handshake PARITY 0 0 No Parity PARITY 0 1 Odd Parity 1 0 Even Parity 1 1 N A SERIAL 0 0 0 300 Baud SERIAL BAUD RATE 0 0 1 600 Baud BAUD RATE 0 1 0 1200 Baud 0 1 1 2400 Baud 1 0 0 4800 Baud 1 0 1 9600 Baud 1 1 0 19200 Baud 1 1 1 N A Setting The recommended settings are in bold 0 selects IEEE 4
393. the Chart Setup Channels assigned to the Chart Setup Hes SMe a Seu Rotana eich aTeuromecrar Example In the figure to the lett a Channel and Channel 2 can not be o turned OFF Each is assigned to a chart b Both Channel 3 and Channel 4 can be This message box appeared because the user tried to disable CH2 As can be seen in the Display Configuration Setup CH2 is assigned to Chart 1 turned OFF Neither is assigned to a chart c An attempt to remove a chart assigned channel will result in a message box similar to that in the figure Normal Mode CH1 and CH2 Assigned to a Chart Burst Mode Operational Issues Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters OF Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Event Configuration Trigger Keyboard k Stop Count from trigger 7 Count 100 Enter number of blocks of 256 samples Acquisition Parameters Scan Counts 0 Pre trigger High Speed Setup 4 o Fost Stop Channel noO H Average weight E Scan Rate 0000 Hz Mode 7 Normal Acquisition Setup Dialog Box High Speed Single Channel Mode The Burst Mode also referred to as High speed single channel mode is selected with a radio button located on the lower left of the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box The following bulleted issues apply to Burst Mode operations e When in the High speed single channel burst mode all ChartView display fu
394. the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command and then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 4 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command will be used twice to configure a range of channels from 1 to 16 as Type J thermocouples and a range of channels from 17 to 32 as Type K thermocouples PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C1 16 1X PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 C17 32 2X The Y command is used to configure the number of scans to take while in the different acquisition states In this example 30 scans are taken while in the pre trigger state 1 while in the post trigger state and 200 while in the post stop state The post trigger count is only valid when the stop event set by the T command is set to Counted This application does not use Counted so this parameter is ignored PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 Y30 1 200X ChartScan Users Manual 958296 D 3 The command sets the time between scans in hours minutes seconds format The ChartScan can have two separate scan intervals one that is used in the post trigger state and one that is used in all other states This example sets up the post trigger scan interval to 0 3 seconds 3 33 Hz and the pre trigger and post stop scan int
395. tion extracts 6 characters from the string U starting at character 8 PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 U6X Ask for trigger block info PRINT 1 ENTER 07 LINE INPUT 2 U PRINT U UA MID U UVA VAL UA PRINT UA PRINT 1 The ChartScan collected UA scans of data 8 6 The R1 command is used to request one scan from the unit Using the variable UA calculated from the previous step all of the data is transferred to the controller FOR i 1 TO UA PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RIX PRINT 1 ENTER 14 INPUT 2 SCAN PRINT Scan i is i PRINT SCAN NEXT 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Operating Alarms using ALARM2 BAS The following program ALARM2 BAS in the EXAMPLES directory will set up the alarm system of the ChartScan Although not necessary it is good practice to reset the ChartScan at the beginning of your application by sending it the R command then waiting a few seconds CLS PRINT The ChartScan is resetting PRINT 1 OUTPUT 07 RX SLEEP 10 To be certain that the reset was successful and the device is ready serial poll the device until the proper status is returned S 0 WHILE S AND 4 0 PRINT 1 SPOLL 07 INPUT 2 S WE ND The C command is used to configure multiple channels as part of the scan group and to assign them a type Additionally the alarm parameters are used to activate the alarms for those channels
396. tion finishes Pushing the button again during the acquisition halts it 457 0913 rev 3 0 Load Configuration ET When pushed the Load Configuration dialog box appears with a list of configuration files that are compatible with the running data acquisition application server To load a new configuration select one of the files in the list then press the lt Load File gt button Display Header This push push button instructs ViewXL to display or hide Header Information in the worksheet along with the acquisition data Header Information includes Channel Labels Channel Units and in some cases the Source data file Use Data Destination o This push push button instructs ViewXL to start loading or stop loading acquisition data and header information into the worksheet starting from the data destination cell that is the upper left corner where the data will be placed Set Data Destination Cell Pushing this button saves the position of the currently selected cell as the data destination location where acquisition header and data information will be saved Load Configuration Options vxl 4 ViewXL The Load Configuration dialog box presents a list of configuration files that are compatible with the currently running data acquisition application such as ChartView or DaqView The Options dialog allows you select a data acquisition server program and choose how the Add In performs specific operations
397. tly seen in the meter Note double clicking the left mouse button in the meter region will also bring up a dialog box that allows you to select a new channel La Set Scale Set the high and low points of the scale as well as define the decimal place format Show Peak Hold Places high and low uni directional floating markers on the scale to indicate the highest and Indicator lowest values reached up to the present time This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters selection Reset Peak Hold Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly adjust to indicate the Indicator highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters selection Show Trend Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend Note during rapid meter fluctuations Indicator the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously Set Limits Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set points Show Limits Displays limits in color red for high blue for low The color is applied to scale regions gt the set limit values For Digital Meters the limits are indicated by red numbers and an upper red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit and blue numbers and a lower blue bar when reaching or exceeding the low limit 6 Properties Allows setting and showing limits as well as opening the Scale dialog box You can access a different dialog box from the o
398. top acquiring scans at that point unless post stop count is defined see Y command The last scan collected the Stop Trigger scan will be time date stamped for later reference Also when the Stop Trigger is recognized the Trigger Bit 02 of the Status Byte will be cleared and the TRIGGER light on the front panel will turn off Setting the stop parameter to 0 will have the same effect as setting the stop parameter to 1 Stop on Count with Post Stop Count Y command set to 0 In both cases the Start Trigger scan will be collected and the acquisition immediately terminated 3 The third parameter re arm determines if after the initial acquisition the acquisition should be re enabled automatically If this parameter is set then after the Stop Trigger is recognized and the acquisition terminated a new acquisition with the same configuration will be enabled automatically In other words after the termination of the previous acquisition the unit will immediately begin another acquisition of the same configuration Otherwise if the parameter is not set new acquisitions will remain disabled after the initial acquisition has terminated 4 The fourth parameter sync determines if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre Trigger Scan Interval I command value If the Pre Trigger Count Y command is defined this parameter will be examined to determine if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre
399. ts it will then reference the current settings of the engineering units and then perform the necessary conversion Data Input Formats see Note 1 Data Type 0 3 Engineering Units Counts C Temperature HE KICK XXXX XX XXXX XX XXXX XX XXXX XX K Time Date Interpreted as hh mm ss mil MM DD YY Engineering Units hh mm ss mil DDDDDDDD Timebase Interpreted as Engineering Units Legend xX ASCII digit MM month h hour DD day m minute YY year S second DDDDDDDD day mi see Note 2 Note 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 1 and Binary High Byte Low Byte 2 are interpreted as engineering units Note 2 mil is milliseconds for ASCII but microseconds for binary 2 hexidecimal format The Set Data Format F command determines the format of readings input from the controller However the only readings input from the controller come in the form of command parameters and there are only two commands which take readings as parameters the Configure Channels C and the Set Trigger Level L commands These are the only command parameters over which the F command has control With both the C and L command the F command may determine the format of the hysteresis parameter The F command may also determine the high and low setpoint format in the C command The reading parameters for the C and L commands cannot be issued in binary format If binary format is specified by the F command these parameters will be in
400. ture currently being applied to the selected channel with the form nnn n in degrees C Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword or password is correct where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters Query Kkey as defined above ChartScan User s Manual 958296 A 7 Set Trigger Level Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed where c han is the channel number such that l lt chan lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 evel is the level against which the readings are tested to T if the level has been exceeded st is the hysteresis level o O a the the current level settings Set SRQ Mask Use the IEEE 488 Service Request SRQ mechanism to inform the IEEE 488 bus controller of certain conditions where mas k is in the form of the number nnn such that000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed from the following conditions 000 Power on default mask value 001 SRQ On Alarm 002 SRQ On Trigger Event 004 SRQ On Ready 008 SRQ On Scan Available 016 SRQ On Message Available MAV 032 SRQ On Event Detected 128 SRQ On Buffer Overrun M Query the SRQ mask o Set Mode M mo anil e Specify measuring mode Valid options for mo de are 0 Line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode and 1 Single channel high speed burst mode Set Event Mask Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register
401. type Chartview Importing Server Data Files Dialog Box Select the desired files from the Open Binary Descriptor File dialog box then press the lt Open gt Look jn E bin amp B a ea button See the figure to the right chartv iof chartv00OS io Multiscan0003 io chartvO000 io chartvOO06 io Ream TestO000 io The selected file names will be placed in the chartyvOO0 jot Ls charty 0007 iot t Ream Test0001 io drop down list in the Import Previously Acquired AUDI a EE Peame TE a Ej chartv0003 io 3 chartvO003 io Ream Test0003 io Binary Data Files dialog box shown below heated ing CS S Mutiscan iog k When one or more files have been added to the drop down file list following figure TONGAN File name chartvO003 i0 chartvOO01 io chartv0002 a press the Import button to view the data in an Files of ype Desci OOOO Cancel Excel worksheet or les of type Descriptor i0 b check the Preview Info box to view a summary of the highlighted file as indicated in the Using the Preview Option figure ve Selecting Binary Descriptor Files Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files Import Previously Acquired Binary Data Files EJ Server Data Fies Browse Help Import Server Data Fies Browse Help Import m Files chartvO000 io Data type IV Preview Files Data type T Preview Acquisition Information c
402. ue to the last value If not cleared the high and low will be maintained All HLL data will be sent to the controller in the order dictated by the scan configuration and in the format specified by the Data Format command F The HLL data is retrieved in the following sequence high the high reading ht the high time date stamp low the low reading It the low time stamp last the last reading 958296 ChartScan User s Manual You can use the Query Terminator Q command to specify a response terminator between each channel of the HLL response Use the Format F command to specify the output format of the HLL Registers The following examples show how to use these commands to configure and query the HLL Registers Example 1 Example 1 shows how to configure and query all the HLL registers and how the HLL terminator can be used to control the flow of the HLL response output PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F0 0 Q1 1 0 0 OX Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 2 1C10 1C 15 1X Configure four channels 1 2 10 and 15 After an indiscriminate amount of time oe Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4X Query the current HLL settings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get HLL for channel 1 INPUT A Screen shows PRINT A 1450 20812 23 21 700 03 24 9740850 20812 35 09 300 03 24 97 0950 30 PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get HLL for channel 2
403. ue would be dependent upon the channel type that has been specified for the channel in question Note The Counts format closely follows the channel type that has been specified Example 1 If channel 16 was type 1 Type J TC with cold junction compensation and linearization then the Counts format output value for this channel would also be cold junction compensated and linearized Example 2 If channel 16 was type 31 Raw A D data then the Counts format output value for channel 16 would also be raw Both temperature and volts readings will be represented by a bipolar 16 bit value of the form x x xxx Time Date stamp format is hms t MDY which is the same as that specified for the binary data format The Counts format is both a valid input C and L command format and a valid output format R R U4 U5 U8 U13 C andL command queries ChartScan User s Manual 958296 C 9 Configuring Power Up State ChartScan has an internally stored factory default configuration that can be recalled at any time You can program the ChartScan to power up in a user defined state or if desired can configure the unit to power up with the default configuration During normal operations the factory defaults may be recalled by issuing the Restore Factory Defaults F command When this command is processed ChartScan loads the factory default configuration and operates accordingly This command however may not be issued while an acquisitio
404. uest Enable Register C 18 IEEE 488 Serial Poll Response C 19 Trigger Latency C 21 Trigger Overrun C 21 Buffer Overrun C 22 Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block C 22 Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks C 22 Real Time Clock C 23 Open Thermocouple Range Error Checking C 23 ChartScan User s Manual 958296 Using High Low Last HLL Registers The High Low Last HLL registers are an alternative method of getting channel data from the ChartScan unit The HLL registers are updated during an acquisition at the current programmed scan rate At any time the HLL registers can be queried for channel values without affecting the buffered data The returned data is in the engineering unit and format ASCII or binary defined by the user Data formats are described later in this appendix HLL Register Contents The HLL Registers contain the following for each configured channel e The High Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query U5 e The Time Date Stamp of the High Reading e The Low Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query U5 e The Time Date Stamp for the Low Reading e The Last or most recent Reading for the channel Note HLL Registers will only be updated for configured channels Furthermore you can only access HLL Registers for configu
405. ular time the Buffer Status String U6 command may be issued The Set Query Terminators Q command determines the format for the terminators for acquisition buffer data For more information regarding the acquisition buffer terminators refer to the Set Query Terminators Q command Note In High speed single channel burst mode scan means one block of 256 samples EXAMPLE S 0 Wait for a scan While S and 8 0 PRINT 1 SPOLLO7 NPUT 2 S WE ND PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 R1X Get the scan PRINT 1 ENTERO7 LINE I NPUT 2 A A 48 958296 ChartScan User s Manual R Read Last Readings System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last fora range of channels where 1 lt first lt l ast lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 DESCRIPTION The Read Last Readings R command will return a subset of the Query Last U1 3 command It allows the specifying of specific channels within the current channel configuration This command is useful for querying specific channels without having unwanted channels returned The response to this command takes the same form as the Query Last U1 3 command whereby each reading conforms to the reading output format specified by the Set Data Format F command In addition each channel is terminated by the HLL termin
406. up This chapter has been written for both ChartScan and NetScan devices Note that main unit calibration is supported only when operating in the Calibration Mode ChartView includes a calibration application that provides step by step calibration instructions in the form of text and on screen graphics If you do not wish to use the built in calibration feature you can manually calibrate the system according to instructions presented later in this chapter A specific set of commands is provided for performing manual calibration Although the main unit ChartScan or NetScan and signal conditioning cards are calibrated prior to shipment these devices still require periodic calibration to ensure that accuracy is maintained The industry standard for this calibration is once every year CAUTION To ensure accurate measurements calibration must only be performed by authorized personnel Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab CAUTION The VDC Calibrator used must meet the following criteria 1 Range 0 100mV_ Resolution 0 1 pV 2 Range 0 10V Resolution 10 uV 3 Range 0 1000V Resolution 1 mV for CSN14 HV S card calibration 4 Remote sensing terminals Note that stabilizing capacitors will typically be required at the point of connection to the main unit due to the relatively low bandwidth of high resolution VDC calibrators
407. upported Absolute timestamps are displayed in a Date Time format For example 01 24 02 10 33 20 AM Since these timestamps only have a One Second resolution they are not practical for data that was acquired at moderate to fast scan rates Unless your scan rate is very slow it is recommended that you use Relative timestamps e Display Relative Timestamps Relative timestamps show the time in seconds of a scan relative to the trigger position For example if you have an acquisition that has three pretrigger scans and the pre and post trigger scan rates were 1000 scans second the timestamps for the first four scans would be 0 003 0 002 0 001 and 0 000 respectively This indicates that the first scan was taken 3 ms prior to the trigger point the next scan 2 ms prior and the next ms prior Scan number four was the trigger point so its relative time was zero 989092 457 0913 rev 3 0 Multiple Data Files This option selects how the files are displayed if either a an acquisition contains multiple data files acquired using auto rearm or b if multiple files have been selected for Import e Place in multiple worksheets This tells the Add In that you want multiple files to be placed in multiple worksheets Excel will create a new worksheet for each file selected or for each file in the acquisition The sheets will be named with the file name excluding the extension Existing worksheets will be reused if the file names are t
408. ured for IEEE 488 S m gt IEEE 488 Interface Card option WARNING Never remove or install an interface card while ChartScan 1400 is connected to the AC power line Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death WARNING Never disconnect the AC power line from ChartScan 1400 while its analog lines are connected to an external device Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge In order to use the IEEE 488 bus address you must first turn off the ChartScan unit and install the optional IEEE 488 Interface Card Also note that on ChartScan s rear panel DIP switch the COMM SELECT micro switch switch 1 must be in the down 0 position to select the interface card option The IEEE 488 Bus Address settings are then made using the DIP switch on ChartScan s rear panel When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications you must make use of an IOtech Driver 488 W31 W95 W98 or WNT when made available In addition the device must be configured in the Driver 488 and be named WAVE The bus address can be set from 0 through 30 and is read only at power on or reset The address is selected by sim
409. urred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2 X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error V130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error V136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 959096 ChartScan User s Manual Gain Calibration of Main Unit Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter used for verification of calibration voltages Calibration Card installed in bottom slot slot 1 of main unit see required specifications on page 6 2 CAUTION Offset calibration of main unit must be completed prior to calibrating the main unit for gain CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note Grounding circuit white is only partially shown Ground Line see note _GND_ V S i Digital C
410. usaddresso4 er as Percent Sign Busaddresso5s s 26 amp Ampersand Busaddresso6 eo a f Apostrophe Busaddresso7 ao 28 Opening Parenthesis Bus address08 am 2 J Closing Parenthesis Bus address09 a a fastes f Busadcress 0 pas f Puss Buscadcress i pa ec Comma f Busadcress 12 pas Fyren or Minus Sign Bus address 13 o Perod f Bus address a a ar 7 sen f Bs address is Listen Address Group LAG OO o zo Buwas pao fat 1 foe f Buseoress7 sof 2 m Buers s 3 twee Busaddress to s2 a a fror f Busadcress 20 ss fas s fre f Buseoresat sa e 6 fee f Baoe s a7 7 f seen f Busadcress 23 se ss e feom Buades s fae 9 Ne f Busadaress25 s 3a fecoon f Bus address 26 so 3B i Semicon Bus address 27 Peo sc lt tess Than Sign Bus address 28 per so EaualSign Busaddress29 e2 gt Greater Than Sign Bus address 30 es ar f Question ark Unisten WNI ChartScan User s Manual 889802 F 5 F 6 Decimal Values 64 to 95 TAG Dec Hex Character Name Bus Message ea o so Busadaresso e a a cama Busaddressor e a B camas Busaddresso2 e a c camac Busaadresso3 e a o Capital Busaddressoa eo as Cantal Bus address 05 o as F captar Busaaaresso6 n a 6 cmas Buscadcress 07 r as Hu Captan Bus address 08 n a i caman Busaddressoo a a J fca
411. utorial to indicate an action you are to complete Text without the arrow is for information content and does not require you to take any action 1 12 ChartScan Unit Startup and ChartView Tutorial 948591 ChartScan User s Manual 1 Select Interface Device 2 1 From Windows start ChartView by double clicking on the Bite Lets ChartView icon The ChartView Startup dialog box PE rs appears Retry Load File Exit ChartView Setup Dialog Box gt 2 Choose the Select Device button The Select Interface Dialog Box appears as indicated in the following figure Note The Load File button is for loading a previously saved configuration file 3 gt 3 Select Simulated Instrument In an actual application you would select Rae iE IEEE 488 RS 232 422 or Network whichever you configured your ee acquisition system for Network users should refer to the Net232 User s neni Guide p n 1037 0901 Simulated Instrument OK Cancel Select Interface 2 Configure Chart Setup gt 4 On the Select Interface box shown in step 1 click OK A Chart Setup Wizard window appears Chart Setup Wizard op ee e a AF Z oo Y Snar Detuy wizard m Automatic Chart Creation Simple Moderate Advanced Came i Fl Charts with one channel 1 assigned per chart Starting with channel CH1 v Channels Manual Chart Creation The number of Instrument Data Channels available is
412. ve been assigned alarm output in the form of Achan output where 744 lt chan gt 1 and 32 lt output gt 1 Returns the channel settings for each configured channel Returns the digital input values corresponding to each of the eight digital inputs Returns memory size in the form mmmmm where m is each digit in the memory size Kbytes Returns the channel number followed by 0 for not in an alarm state or 1 for in an alarm state Queried channels are those having programmed valid alarm set points Returns the last date the unit was calibrated in the form 12 54 00 9 01 28 99 Returns the last scan read Returns card ID s Returns the lOtech product information in the form Otech ChartScan 0 v r where v is the version and r is the revision Returns measurement parameters Returns the RMS value of the last burst mode operation Returns the contents of the system register 958296 ChartScan User s Manual Status Event Reporting and Mask Registers ChartScan has several internal eight bit registers Each bit represents a certain condition event or error The contents and operation of each of these registers is described in subsequent sections You can access the registers via a command issued from the controller Status and Event Reporting Registers The following four registers cover a wide range of internal error and event conditions and each covers a particular aspect of event reporting responsib
413. vel compatible Can be programmed as alarms Note The 32 TTL outputs can be set or cleared via program control Alarm Conditions May be detected by SRQ or by software query SPOLL or U command Alarm Update Rate Alarms are updated whenever a channel assigned to an alarm is measured Connector Female DB50 50 pin 32 Alarms 8 digital inputs 10 ground pins mating connector supplied Note See chapter 3 for information regarding External TTL BNC Connectors WARNING Service must be performed by qualified personnel All electrical connections to device including the AC line and analog inputs must be disconnected prior to opening ChartScan main unit or expansion chassis casing Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death WARNING ChartScan s ground on the AC power connector must be connected to an external earth ground Failure to make such a connection could present an electric shock hazard causing bodily injury or death Fuse 1 2A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 100 140V power line or 1 4A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 200 240V power line CAUTION Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designa
414. xample 1f you set Channel 1 going above 30 C as a trigger you can choose to have 100 or more acquisitions to be initiated by the same trigger criteria Channel 1 gt 30 C Whether you select to capture the trigger blocks in one file or each in a separate file each of the data acquisitions will occur automatically and each will make use of your set configuration Disabling Auto Re Arm To disable Auto Re Arm simply uncheck the Enable Auto Re Arm selection The default setting of Capture one trigger block will then be in effect Note The trigger event trigger by absolute time is not suitable for automatic re arming In this instance the default of Capture one trigger block is automatically forced Binary Data Options and Selected File Formats Software Reference This panel allows you to select a combination of three different data stamps that you would like to have included with the acquisition data The possible stamps are e Time Date Stamp e Alarm Stamp e Digital Input Stamp The panel includes a lt File Conversion Preferences gt button Clicking the button brings up a dialog box similar to the following aa File Converter Preferences x Data File Ext Header File Z DlAdemn R32 DAT Dl dem E ASCII Text Spreadsheet TT ASCII DADISP DAT HED SDADISP 4 DAS YLab OOF DASYLab EO MATLAB MAT DSC Matlab E Post iew IOT 0 Postview ET Snap Master SMA DAT SM Delete the source data
415. yVal bState As Boolean This is used to enable or disable the use of the data destination worksheet cell If a True or False value is passed in the call the data destination is enabled or disabled If a value is omitted from the call the data destination state is toggled on and off Data destination is discussed on pages vxl 3 and 4 Sub vxlUseHeader Optional ByVal bState As Boolean This is used to enable or disable the use of the data header If a True or False value is passed in the call the data header is enabled or disabled If a value is omitted from the call the data header state is toggled on and off The data header is discussed on pages vxl 3 and 4 Sub vxl1SetDataDestination ByRef wksCell As Range This sets the data destination to the worksheet cell identified by the Excel Range object reference passed to the method The Range object must not reference a range of cells that span multiple rows or columns For example the following call would set the data destination to Row 3 and Column C then enable usage of the data destination VIEWXL Interface vxlSetDataDestination Range C3 VIEWXL Interface vxlUseDataDestination True Public Function vxliIsServerReady As Boolean Returns True if the Server is in a state where it can receive commands from an Excel VBA program The Server would not be ready if it was busy performing a lengthy task or if a message or dialog box that requires user action is displayed 457 0913 rev 3 0 Pub
416. ylene capacitor connected across the input terminals of each channel This capacitor filters input noise when measuring signals from thermocouples When the circuit card is set to the 100 mV range the capacitor reacts with user source impedance to form a low pass filter The filter pole frequency is 1 2 pi RSHI RSLO 4700 10 where RSHI and RSLO are the source resistance of the input leads ChartScan User s Manual CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards There are three versions of low voltage signal conditioning cards for use with ChartScan Each card supports 16 differential input channels and is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of four programmable ranges 100 mV 1 volt 5 volt and 10 volt The cards share the same signal conditioning characteristics but differ in their style of input connector 1 e terminal strip BNC and safety jack CSN14 LV T CSN14 LV B and CSN14 LV S respectively
417. you place the mouse cursor over a chart and right click a pop up menu appears The menu provides a means to perform the following tasks Note that the term selected chart refers to the chart from which the pop up menu was accessed In the preceding figure Chart 2 is the selected chart Edit current channel Brings up the Chart Display Configuration Setup dialog box for the current channel of the selected chart See Using the pop up menus Edit current channel feature on page CV 9 for detailed information Zoom chart Un Zoom chart Zoom chart causes the selected chart to occupy the entire ChartView main window After the zoom in the pop up menu s Zoom chart selection is replaced by an Un zoom option The latter returns the ChartView window to its previous display of multiple charts if applicable Note that double clicking the left mouse button will also zoom or un zoom the selected chart Clear chart erases all channels from the selected chart Timestamps if shown are also cleared If charts are scrolling the channels will begin to chart again immediately following the clear chart action Note that the clear action does not reset a relative timestamp to 00 00 00 Clear all charts and timestamps erases all channels from the all charts Timestamps if shown are also cleared If charts are scrolling the channels will begin to chart again immediately following the action Note that the clear action does n
418. ype EX to end the calibration mode 5 Type U2X to confirm calibration mode is disabled A return of V000 confirms this Note You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following C 1X QC for slot 1 You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry similar to the following B to clear the buffer C1 1X to addresses the channel this example is for slot 1 channel 1 T1 1 0 0X X to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes X starts acquisition U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Note that X can be used to start or stop the acquisition ChartScan User s Manual 959096 Calibration 6 17 Cold Junction Calibration Required Equipment Equipment for CJC Calibration Cold ice cell for calibration with thermocouples at 0 C T C wire and subminiature plug connectors T Type T C wire is recommended U Type copper shorting plugs Thermocouples Equipment for Verification of Calibrated Temperature Option a Cold Cell Method Cold ice cell Volts DC Calibrator Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter 2 22 Twisted pairs Voltage to temperature reference tables Thermocouples T C wire and subminiature plug connectors T Type T C wire is recommended Option b Hot Cell Method Hot Cell Thermocouple T C wire and subminiature plug connector T Type T C wire is recommended Option c T C Calibrator Simulator Met
419. ystem to start on stop on count Start the acquisition The remainder of this appendix and the next pertaining to acquisition setup refers to normal mode acquisitions only ChartScan User s Manual 958296 B 5 Configuration Requirements B 6 ChartScan does not scan channels on its initial power up Even though most user set configuration states have associated defaults you must configure a few items before scanning begins For ChartScan to begin scanning the controlling computer must perform two operations 1 Configure each channel and 2 select the channels that are to be included in the scan These operations are illustrated in the following figure Scan Interval Timebase L time Scan Scan Scan Channel Scan EE SNE S S 13 4 5 8 68 69 80 Channels configured and included in the scan Channel Scan and Scan Interval Definition After completing these two operations the alarms and the High Low Last Registers are updated at the maximum possible scan rate However the scans are not being placed in the Acquisition Buffer at this time PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 C1 16 1X Configure master channels 1 4 with Type JTC Inspecting the unit s High Low Last Registers shows the temperature or voltage values of the configured channels PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4X Query HLL registers for the configured channels PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Get the response INPUT A To begin storing scans in the unit s A
420. yte High Byte C c L L Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Command ChartScan Users Manual 958296 A 29 EXAMPLES PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 FO 0X Set the engineering units to C and reading format to engineering units PRI Pa A a Ae 7 C1 1 100 0 Set points and hysteresis interpreted as C PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4X Retrieve High Low Last readings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Returned readings are in engineering C format LINE INPUT 2 A PRINT A PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 F1 1X Set the engineering units to F and reading format to binary low high PRI Tha i a a 7 C1 1 100 0 Set points and hysteresis interpreted as F PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 U4X Retrieve High Low Last readings PRINT 1 ENTERO7 Returned readings in binary low high format LINE INPUT 2 A PRINT A 958296 ChartScan User s Manual F Set Burst Mode Frequency ee ars where 38 5 lt freq lt 20000 0 Hertz default DESCRIPTION S DESCRIPTION The Set Burst Mode Frequency F command is used to select the channel sampling frequency when in the High speed single channel mode burst mode See Measuring Modes section of Appendix C for more information For AC measurements where the RMS value is to be returned via the U1 6 command it is the user s responsibility to program a frequency which will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle in order to compute the R
421. ytes will be appended as follows DwwwDxxxDyyyDzzz where D User Terminator www Decimal equivalent of A07 A00 xxx Decimal equivalent of A15 A08 yyy Decimal equivalent of A23 A16 zzz Decimal equivalent of A31 A24 Note This feature is not available in ChartScan 1400 s high speed single channel mode burst mode since alarms are not monitored Note If Digital Input Stamp I is also enabled it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp A EXAMPLE PRI NT 1 OUTPUT07 A 1X Enable alarm stamping PRINT 1 OUTPUTO7 A 0X Disable alarm stamping A 20 958296 ChartScan User s Manual C Configure Channels EXECUTION SYNTAX Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units chans and type are required arguments while owsp highsp andhyst are optional chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max orfirst last fora range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for ChartScan 1400 The chassis ischan 0 t ype is the type to assign to those channels Query current channel configuration DESCRIPTION The optional arguments lowsp highsp and hyst are the low setpoint high setpoint and hysteresis values respectively for the Configure Channels C command These arguments are only needed if it is desired to configure alarms on the specified channel s The format for these optional arguments follow the rules for readings

ChartScan/1400 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents